SiENBE04-808_A

Service
Manual

Inverter Pair
Wall Mounted Type G-Series

[Applied Models]
z Inverter Pair: Cooling only
z Inverter Pair: Heat Pump

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SiENBE04-808_A

Service
Manual

Inverter Pair
Wall Mounted Type G-Series

[Applied Models]
z Inverter Pair: Cooling only
z Inverter Pair: Heat Pump

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SiENBE04-808_A

Inverter Pair
Wall Mounted Type
G-Series
zCooling Only

Indoor Units
FTXS20G2V1B
FTXS25G2V1B
FTXS35G2V1B
FTXS42G2V1B
FTXS50G2V1B

Outdoor Units
RKS20G2V1B RKS20G2V1B9
RKS25G2V1B RKS25G2V1B9
RKS35G2V1B RKS35G2V1B9
RKS42G2V1B
RKS50G2V1B

zHeat Pump

Indoor Units
FTXS20G2V1B ATXS20G2V1B
FTXS25G2V1B ATXS25G2V1B
FTXS35G2V1B ATXS35G2V1B
FTXS42G2V1B ATXS42G2V1B
FTXS50G2V1B ATXS50G2V1B

Outdoor Units
RXS20G2V1B RXS20G2V1B9 ARXS20G2V1B ARXS20G3V1B
RXS25G2V1B RXS25G2V1B9 ARXS25G2V1B ARXS25G3V1B
RXS35G2V1B RXS35G2V1B9 ARXS35G2V1B ARXS35G3V1B
RXS42G2V1B ARXS42G2V1B
RXS50G2V1B ARXS50G2V1B

i Table of Contents
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A

1. Introduction ............................................................................................ vi
1.1 Safety Cautions ....................................................................................... vi
1.2 Used Icons ...............................................................................................x

Part 1 List of Functions ................................................................ 1

1. Functions.................................................................................................2
1.1 Cooling Only.............................................................................................2
1.2 Heat Pump ...............................................................................................3

Part 2 Specifications .................................................................... 5

1. Specifications ..........................................................................................6
1.1 Cooling Only.............................................................................................6
1.2 Heat Pump ...............................................................................................9

Part 3 Printed Circuit Board Connector Wiring Diagram ........... 17

1. Printed Circuit Board Connector Wiring Diagram..................................18
1.1 Indoor Unit..............................................................................................18
1.2 Outdoor Unit ...........................................................................................21

Part 4 Function and Control........................................................ 29

1. Main Functions......................................................................................30
1.1 Frequency Principle................................................................................30
1.2 Airflow Direction Control.........................................................................32
1.3 Fan Speed Control for Indoor Units........................................................33
1.4 Program Dry Operation ..........................................................................34
1.5 Automatic Operation...............................................................................35
1.6 Thermostat Control.................................................................................36
1.7 NIGHT SET Mode ..................................................................................37
1.8 ECONO Operation .................................................................................38
1.9 2-Area INTELLIGENT EYE Operation ...................................................39
1.10 INTELLIGENT EYE Operation ...............................................................41
1.11 Inverter POWERFUL Operation .............................................................42
1.12 Other Functions......................................................................................43
2. Function of Thermistor ..........................................................................44
3. Control Specification .............................................................................45
3.1 Mode Hierarchy ......................................................................................45
3.2 Frequency Control..................................................................................46
3.3 Controls at Mode Changing / Start-up....................................................48
3.4 Discharge Pipe Temperature Control.....................................................50
3.5 Input Current Control..............................................................................51
3.6 Freeze-up Protection Control .................................................................53
3.7 Heating Peak-cut Control .......................................................................53
3.8 Outdoor Fan Control...............................................................................54
3.9 Liquid Compression Protection Function................................................54
3.10 Defrost Control .......................................................................................55
3.11 Electronic Expansion Valve Control .......................................................56
3.12 Malfunctions ...........................................................................................59
3.13 Forced Operation Mode .........................................................................60
3.14 Standby Electricity Saving......................................................................60

Table of Contents ii
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A

Part 5 Operation Manual ............................................................. 61

1. System Configuration............................................................................62
2. FTXS20/25/35/42/50G2V1B .................................................................63
2.1 Auto Dry Cool Heat Fan Operation ........................................................64
2.2 Adjusting the Airflow Direction................................................................66
2.3 COMFORT AIRFLOW and INTELLIGENT EYE Operation....................68
2.4 POWERFUL Operation ..........................................................................71
2.5 OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET Operation.......................................................72
2.6 ECONO Operation .................................................................................73
2.7 TIMER Operation ...................................................................................74
2.8 WEEKLY TIMER Operation ...................................................................76
3. ATXS20/25/35/42/50G2V1B .................................................................81
3.1 Auto Dry Cool Heat Fan Operation ........................................................82
3.2 Adjusting the Airflow Direction................................................................84
3.3 COMFORT AIRFLOW Operation ...........................................................86
3.4 INTELLIGENT EYE Operation ...............................................................87
3.5 POWERFUL Operation ..........................................................................89
3.6 OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET Operation.......................................................90
3.7 ECONO Operation .................................................................................91
3.8 TIMER Operation ...................................................................................92

Part 6 Service Diagnosis............................................................. 94

1. Caution for Diagnosis............................................................................95
1.1 Troubleshooting with LED ......................................................................95
2. Problem Symptoms and Measures .......................................................96
3. Service Check Function ........................................................................97
3.1 ARC452 Series.......................................................................................97
3.2 ARC433 Series.....................................................................................100
4. Troubleshooting ..................................................................................103
4.1 Error Codes and Description ................................................................103
4.2 Indoor Unit PCB Abnormality ...............................................................104
4.3 Freeze-up Protection Control or Heating Peak-cut Control..................105
4.4 Fan Motor (DC Motor) or Related Abnormality.....................................107
4.5 Thermistor or Related Abnormality (Indoor Unit)..................................109
4.6 Signal Transmission Error (between Indoor Unit and Outdoor Unit) ....110
4.7 Unspecified Voltage (between Indoor Unit and Outdoor Unit) .............111
4.8 Outdoor Unit PCB Abnormality.............................................................112
4.9 OL Activation (Compressor Overload) .................................................114
4.10 Compressor Lock .................................................................................115
4.11 DC Fan Lock ........................................................................................116
4.12 Input Overcurrent Detection .................................................................117
4.13 Four Way Valve Abnormality................................................................118
4.14 Discharge Pipe Temperature Control...................................................120
4.15 High Pressure Control in Cooling .........................................................122
4.16 Compressor System Sensor Abnormality ............................................124
4.17 Position Sensor Abnormality ................................................................126
4.18 DC Voltage / Current Sensor Abnormality (20/25/35/42 Class) ...........129
4.19 CT or Related Abnormality (50 Class)..................................................130
4.20 Thermistor or Related Abnormality (Outdoor Unit)...............................132
4.21 Electrical Box Temperature Rise..........................................................134

iii Table of Contents

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A

4.22 Radiation Fin Temperature Rise ..........................................................136

4.23 Output Overcurrent Detection ..............................................................138
4.24 Refrigerant Shortage ............................................................................140
4.25 Low-voltage Detection or Over-voltage Detection................................143
4.26 Signal Transmission Error on Outdoor Unit PCB
(50 Class Only)145
5. Check ..................................................................................................146
5.1 How to Check .......................................................................................146

Part 7 Removal Procedure154

1. Indoor Unit...........................................................................................155
1.1 Removal of Air Filter.............................................................................155
1.2 Removal of Front Panel........................................................................157
1.3 Removal of Front Grille ........................................................................159
1.4 Removal of Horizontal Blades / Vertical Blades ...................................162
1.5 Removal of Electrical Box ....................................................................165
1.6 Removal of PCB...................................................................................168
1.7 Removal of Indoor Heat Exchanger .....................................................173
1.8 Removal of Swing Motors ....................................................................176
1.9 Removal of Fan Motor..........................................................................180
2. Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S20-35G2V1B,
ARXS20-35G2V1B183
2.1 Removal of Outer Panels / Fan Motor..................................................183
2.2 Removal of Electrical Box ....................................................................192
2.3 Removal of Thermistors .......................................................................196
2.4 Removal of PCB...................................................................................198
2.5 Removal of Reactor / Partition Plate ....................................................201
2.6 Removal of Sound Blanket...................................................................203
2.7 Removal of Four Way Valve.................................................................204
2.8 Removal of Compressor.......................................................................207
3. Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S20-35G2V1B9,
ARXS20-35G3V1B209
3.1 Removal of Outer Panels / Fan Motor..................................................209
3.2 Removal of Electrical Box ....................................................................218
3.3 Removal of PCB...................................................................................221
3.4 Removal of Reactor / Partition Plate ....................................................229
3.5 Removal of Sound Blanket...................................................................231
3.6 Removal of Four Way Valve.................................................................233
3.7 Removal of Compressor.......................................................................236
4. Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S42G2V1B, ARXS42G2V1B .............................238
4.1 Removal of Outer Panels .....................................................................238
4.2 Removal of Electrical Box ....................................................................240
4.3 Removal of PCB...................................................................................245
4.4 Removal of Sound Blanket...................................................................250
4.5 Removal of Outdoor Fan / Fan Motor...................................................252
4.6 Removal of Thermistors .......................................................................255
4.7 Removal of Four Way Valve / Electronic Expansion Valve ..................256
4.8 Removal of Compressor.......................................................................259
5. Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S50G2V1B, ARXS50G2V1B .............................262
5.1 Removal of Outer Panels .....................................................................262
5.2 Removal of Outdoor Fan / Fan Motor...................................................266

Table of Contents iv
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A

5.3 Removal of Electrical Box ....................................................................270

5.4 Removal of PCB...................................................................................275
5.5 Removal of Sound Blanket / Thermistors.............................................278
5.6 Removal of Four Way Valve.................................................................280
5.7 Removal of Electronic Expansion Valve...............................................281
5.8 Removal of Compressor.......................................................................282

Part 8 Trial Operation and Field Settings................................. 286

1. Trial Operation ....................................................................................287
2. Field Settings ......................................................................................289
2.1 Model Type Setting ..............................................................................289
2.2 When 2 Units are Installed in 1 Room..................................................289
2.3 Standby Electricity Saving....................................................................290
2.4 Facility Setting Jumper and Switch (cooling at low outdoor temperature)..
291
2.5 Jumper and Switch Settings.................................................................292
3. Application of Silicon Grease to a Power Transistor and a Diode Bridge .
293

Part 9 Appendix......................................................................... 294

1. Piping Diagrams..................................................................................295
1.1 Indoor Unit............................................................................................295
1.2 Outdoor Unit .........................................................................................296
2. Wiring Diagrams..................................................................................300
2.1 Indoor Unit............................................................................................300
2.2 Outdoor Unit .........................................................................................300

v Table of Contents
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Introduction

1. Introduction
1.1 Safety Cautions
Cautions and „ Be sure to read the following safety cautions before conducting repair work.
Warnings „ The caution items are classified into “ Warning” and “ Caution”. The “ Warning”
items are especially important since they can lead to death or serious injury if they are not
followed closely. The “ Caution” items can also lead to serious accidents under some
conditions if they are not followed. Therefore, be sure to observe all the safety caution items
described below.
„ About the pictograms
This symbol indicates the item for which caution must be exercised.
The pictogram shows the item to which attention must be paid.
This symbol indicates the prohibited action.
The prohibited item or action is shown in the illustration or near the symbol.
This symbol indicates the action that must be taken, or the instruction.
The instruction is shown in the illustration or near the symbol.
„ After the repair work is complete, be sure to conduct a test operation to ensure that the
equipment operates normally, and explain the cautions for operating the product to the
customer.

1.1.1 Cautions Regarding Safety of Workers

Warning
Be sure to disconnect the power cable plug from the plug socket before
disassembling the equipment for repair.
Working on the equipment that is connected to the power supply may cause an
electrical shook.
If it is necessary to supply power to the equipment to conduct the repair or
inspecting the circuits, do not touch any electrically charged sections of the
equipment.
If the refrigerant gas is discharged during the repair work, do not touch the
discharged refrigerant gas.
The refrigerant gas may cause frostbite.

When disconnecting the suction or discharge pipe of the compressor at the

welded section, evacuate the refrigerant gas completely at a well-ventilated
place first.
If there is a gas remaining inside the compressor, the refrigerant gas or
refrigerating machine oil discharges when the pipe is disconnected, and it may
cause injury.

If the refrigerant gas leaks during the repair work, ventilate the area. The
refrigerant gas may generate toxic gases when it contacts flames.

The step-up capacitor supplies high-voltage electricity to the electrical

components of the outdoor unit.
Be sure to discharge the capacitor completely before conducting repair work.
A charged capacitor may cause an electrical shock.

Do not start or stop the air conditioner operation by plugging or unplugging the
power cable plug.
Plugging or unplugging the power cable plug to operate the equipment may
cause an electrical shock or fire.

vi
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Introduction SiENBE04-808_A

Warning
Be sure to wear a safety helmet, gloves, and a safety belt when working at a
high place (more than 2 m). Insufficient safety measures may cause a fall
accident.

In case of R-410A refrigerant models, be sure to use pipes, flare nuts and tools
for the exclusive use of the R-410A refrigerant.
The use of materials for R-22 refrigerant models may cause a serious accident
such as a damage of refrigerant cycle as well as an equipment failure.

Caution
Do not repair the electrical components with wet hands.
Working on the equipment with wet hands may cause an electrical shock.

Do not clean the air conditioner by splashing water.

Washing the unit with water may cause an electrical shock.

Be sure to provide the grounding when repairing the equipment in a humid or

wet place, to avoid electrical shocks.

Be sure to turn off the power switch and unplug the power cable when cleaning
the equipment.
The internal fan rotates at a high speed, and cause injury.

Be sure to conduct repair work with appropriate tools.

The use of inappropriate tools may cause injury.

Be sure to check that the refrigerating cycle section has cooled down enough
before conducting repair work.
Working on the unit when the refrigerating cycle section is hot may cause
burns.

Use the welder in a well-ventilated place.

Using the welder in an enclosed room may cause oxygen deficiency.

vii
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Introduction

1.1.2 Cautions Regarding Safety of Users

Warning
Be sure to use parts listed in the service parts list of the applicable model and
appropriate tools to conduct repair work. Never attempt to modify the
equipment.
The use of inappropriate parts or tools may cause an electrical shock,
excessive heat generation or fire.

If the power cable and lead wires have scratches or deteriorated, be sure to
replace them.
Damaged cable and wires may cause an electrical shock, excessive heat
generation or fire.

Do not use a joined power cable or extension cable, or share the same power
outlet with other electrical appliances, since it may cause an electrical shock,
excessive heat generation or fire.

Be sure to use an exclusive power circuit for the equipment, and follow the local
technical standards related to the electrical equipment, the internal wiring
regulations, and the instruction manual for installation when conducting
electrical work.
Insufficient power circuit capacity and improper electrical work may cause an
electrical shock or fire.

Be sure to use the specified cable for wiring between the indoor and outdoor
units. Make the connections securely and route the cable properly so that there
is no force pulling the cable at the connection terminals.
Improper connections may cause excessive heat generation or fire.

When wiring between the indoor and outdoor units, make sure that the terminal
cover does not lift off or dismount because of the cable.
If the cover is not mounted properly, the terminal connection section may cause
an electrical shock, excessive heat generation or fire.

Do not damage or modify the power cable.

Damaged or modified power cable may cause an electrical shock or fire.
Placing heavy items on the power cable, and heating or pulling the power cable
may damage the cable.

Do not mix air or gas other than the specified refrigerant (R-410A / R-22) in the
refrigerant system.
If air enters the refrigerating system, an excessively high pressure results,
causing equipment damage and injury.

If the refrigerant gas leaks, be sure to locate the leaking point and repair it
before charging the refrigerant. After charging refrigerant, make sure that there
is no refrigerant leak.
If the leaking point cannot be located and the repair work must be stopped, be
sure to perform pump-down and close the service valve, to prevent the
refrigerant gas from leaking into the room. The refrigerant gas itself is
harmless, but it may generate toxic gases when it contacts flames, such as fan
and other heaters, stoves and ranges.
When relocating the equipment, make sure that the new installation site has
sufficient strength to withstand the weight of the equipment.
If the installation site does not have sufficient strength and if the installation
work is not conducted securely, the equipment may fall and cause injury.

viii
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Introduction SiENBE04-808_A

Warning
Check to make sure that the power cable plug is not dirty or loose, then insert
the plug into a power outlet securely.
If the plug has dust or loose connection, it may cause an electrical shock or fire.

Be sure to install the product correctly by using the provided standard For unitary type
installation frame. only
Incorrect use of the installation frame and improper installation may cause the
equipment to fall, resulting in injury.

Be sure to install the product securely in the installation frame mounted on the For unitary type
window frame. only
If the unit is not securely mounted, it may fall and cause injury.

When replacing the coin battery in the remote control, be sure to disposed of
the old battery to prevent children from swallowing it.
If a child swallows the coin battery, see a doctor immediately.

Caution
Installation of a leakage breaker is necessary in some cases depending on the
conditions of the installation site, to prevent electrical shocks.

Do not install the equipment in a place where there is a possibility of

combustible gas leaks.
If the combustible gas leaks and remains around the unit, it may cause a fire.

Check to see if the parts and wires are mounted and connected properly, and
if the connections at the soldered or crimped terminals are secure.
Improper installation and connections may cause excessive heat generation,
fire or an electrical shock.

If the installation platform or frame has corroded, replace it.

Corroded installation platform or frame may cause the unit to fall, resulting in
injury.

Check the grounding, and repair it if the equipment is not properly grounded.
Improper grounding may cause an electrical shock.

ix
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Introduction

Caution
Be sure to measure the insulation resistance after the repair, and make sure
that the resistance is 1 MΩ or higher.
Faulty insulation may cause an electrical shock.

Be sure to check the drainage of the indoor unit after the repair.
Faulty drainage may cause the water to enter the room and wet the furniture
and floor.

Do not tilt the unit when removing it.

The water inside the unit may spill and wet the furniture and floor.

Be sure to install the packing and seal on the installation frame properly. For unitary type
If the packing and seal are not installed properly, water may enter the room and only
wet the furniture and floor.

1.2 Used Icons

Icons are used to attract the attention of the reader to specific information. The meaning of each
icon is described in the table below:

Icon Type of Description

Information
Note A “note” provides information that is not indispensable, but may
nevertheless be valuable to the reader, such as tips and tricks.
Note:

Caution A “caution” is used when there is danger that the reader, through
incorrect manipulation, may damage equipment, loose data, get
Caution an unexpected result or has to restart (part of) a procedure.

Warning A “warning” is used when there is danger of personal injury.

Warning

Reference A “reference” guides the reader to other places in this binder or

in this manual, where he/she will find additional information on a
specific topic.

x
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A

Part 1
List of Functions
1. Functions.................................................................................................2
1.1 Cooling Only.............................................................................................2
1.2 Heat Pump ...............................................................................................3

1 List of Functions
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Functions

1. Functions
1.1 Cooling Only

FTXS20/25/35/42G2V1B

FTXS20/25/35/42G2V1B
RKS20/25/35/42G2V1B

RKS20/25/35/42G2V1B
RKS20/25/35G2V1B9

RKS20/25/35G2V1B9
FTXS50G2V1B

FTXS50G2V1B
RKS50G2V1B

RKS50G2V1B
Category Functions Category Functions

Basic Inverter Health &

{ { Air-Purifying Filter — —
Function (with Inverter Power Control) Clean
–10 –10
Operation Limit for Cooling (°CDB) ~46H ~46H Photocatalytic Deodorizing Filter — —

Operation Limit for Heating (°CWB) — — Air-Purifying Filter with

Photocatalytic Deodorizing Function — —
PAM Control { {
Standby Electricity Saving { — Titanium Apatite Photocatalytic
Air-Purifying Filter { {
Compressor Oval Scroll Compressor — —
Swing Compressor { { Air Filter (Prefilter) { {
Rotary Compressor — — Wipe-Clean Flat Panel { {
Reluctance DC Motor { { Washable Grille — —
Comfortable Power-Airflow Flap — — MOLD PROOF Operation — —
Airflow
Power-Airflow Dual Flaps { { Good-Sleep Cooling Operation — —
Power-Airflow Diffuser — — Timer WEEKLY TIMER Operation { {
Wide-Angle Louvers { { 24-Hour ON/OFF TIMER { {
Vertical Auto-Swing (Up and Down) { { NIGHT SET Mode { {
Horizontal Auto-Swing { { Worry Free Auto-Restart (after Power Failure) { {
(Right and Left) “Reliability &
Durability”
Self-Diagnosis (Digital, LED)
3-D Airflow { { { {
Display
COMFORT AIRFLOW Operation { { Wiring Error Check — —
Comfort Anti-Corrosion Treatment of
Auto Fan Speed { { { {
Control Outdoor Heat Exchanger
Flexibility Multi-Split / Split Type Compatible
Indoor Unit Quiet Operation { { Indoor Unit { {

NIGHT QUIET Mode (Automatic) — — H/P, C/O Compatible Indoor Unit { {

OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET Operation
(Manual) { { Flexible Voltage Correspondence — —

2-Area INTELLIGENT EYE Operation { { High Ceiling Application — —

INTELLIGENT EYE Operation — — Chargeless 10 m 10 m
Quick Warming Function — — Either Side Drain (Right or Left) { {
(Preheating Operation)
Hot-Start Function — — Power Selection — —

Automatic Defrosting — — Remote 5-Rooms Centralized Controller { {

Control (Option)
Operation Automatic Operation — — Remote Control Adapter
(Normal Open Pulse Contact) { {
Program Dry Operation { { (Option)
Remote Control Adapter
Fan Only { { { {
(Normal Open Contact) (Option)
Lifestyle New POWERFUL Operation DIII-NET Compatible (Adapter)
Convenience (Non-Inverter) — — (Option) { {

Inverter POWERFUL Operation { { Remote Wireless { {

Control
Priority-Room Setting — — Wired (Option) { {
COOL / HEAT Mode Lock — —
HOME LEAVE Operation — —
ECONO Operation { {
Indoor Unit ON/OFF Button { {
Signal Receiving Sign { {
Temperature Display — —
Note: { : Holding Functions H : Lower limit can be extended to –15°C by cutting
jumper (20-42 class) or turning switch (50 class).
— : No Functions (facility use only)

List of Functions 2
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Functions SiENBE04-808_A

1.2 Heat Pump

FTXS20/25/35/42G2V1B

FTXS20/25/35/42G2V1B
RXS20/25/35/42G2V1B

RXS20/25/35/42G2V1B
RXS20/25/35G2V1B9

RXS20/25/35G2V1B9
FTXS50G2V1B

FTXS50G2V1B
RXS50G2V1B

RXS50G2V1B
Category Functions Category Functions

Basic Inverter Health &

Function (with Inverter Power Control) { { Clean Air-Purifying Filter — —

Operation Limit for Cooling (°CDB) –10 –10 Photocatalytic Deodorizing Filter — —
~46 ~46
–15 –15 Air-Purifying Filter with
Operation Limit for Heating (°CWB) — —
~20 ~18 Photocatalytic Deodorizing Function
PAM Control { { Titanium Apatite Photocatalytic
{ {
Standby Electricity Saving { — Air-Purifying Filter
Compressor Oval Scroll Compressor — — Air Filter (Prefilter) { {
Swing Compressor { { Wipe-Clean Flat Panel { {
Rotary Compressor — — Washable Grille — —
Reluctance DC Motor { { MOLD PROOF Operation — —
Comfortable Power-Airflow Flap — — Good-Sleep Cooling Operation — —
Airflow
Power-Airflow Dual Flaps { { Timer WEEKLY TIMER Operation { {
Power-Airflow Diffuser — — 24-Hour ON/OFF TIMER { {
Wide-Angle Louvers { { NIGHT SET Mode { {
Vertical Auto-Swing (Up and Down) { { Worry Free Auto-Restart (after Power Failure) { {
“Reliability &
Horizontal Auto-Swing { { Durability” Self-Diagnosis (Digital, LED) { {
(Right and Left) Display
3-D Airflow { { Wiring Error Check — —

COMFORT AIRFLOW Operation { { Anti-Corrosion Treatment of { {

Outdoor Heat Exchanger
Comfort Flexibility Multi-Split / Split Type Compatible
Auto Fan Speed { { { {
Control Indoor Unit
Indoor Unit Quiet Operation { { H/P, C/O Compatible Indoor Unit { {
NIGHT QUIET Mode (Automatic) — — Flexible Voltage Correspondence — —
OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET Operation { { High Ceiling Application — —
(Manual)
2-Area INTELLIGENT EYE Operation { { Chargeless 10 m 10 m
INTELLIGENT EYE Operation — — Either Side Drain (Right or Left) { {
Quick Warming Function
(Preheating Operation) { { Power Selection — —

Remote 5-Rooms Centralized Controller

Hot-Start Function { { Control (Option) { {

Automatic Defrosting { { Remote Control Adapter

(Normal Open Pulse Contact) { {
Operation Automatic Operation { { (Option)

Program Dry Operation { { Remote Control Adapter { {

(Normal Open Contact) (Option)
DIII-NET Compatible (Adapter)
Fan Only { { { {
(Option)
Lifestyle New POWERFUL Operation remote control
Convenience (Non-Inverter) — — Wireless { {

Inverter POWERFUL Operation { { Wired (Option) { {

Priority-Room Setting — —
COOL / HEAT Mode Lock — —
HOME LEAVE Operation — —
ECONO Operation { {
Indoor Unit ON/OFF Button { {
Signal Receiving Sign { {
Temperature Display — —
Note: { : Holding Functions
— : No Functions

3 List of Functions
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Functions

ARXS20/25/35/42G2V1B

ARXS20/25/35/42G2V1B
ATXS20/25/35/42G2V1B

ATXS20/25/35/42G2V1B
ARXS20/25/35G3V1B

ARXS20/25/35G3V1B
ARXS50G2V1B

ARXS50G2V1B
ATXS50G2V1B

ATXS50G2V1B
Category Functions Category Functions

Basic Inverter { { Health & Air-Purifying Filter — —

Function (with Inverter Power Control) Clean
–10 –10
Operation Limit for Cooling (°CDB) Photocatalytic Deodorizing Filter — —
~46 ~46
–15 –15 Air-Purifying Filter with
Operation Limit for Heating (°CWB) ~20 ~18 Photocatalytic Deodorizing Function — —

PAM Control { { Titanium Apatite Photocatalytic

Air-Purifying Filter { {
Standby Electricity Saving { —
Compressor Oval Scroll Compressor — — Air Filter (Prefilter) { {
Swing Compressor { { Wipe-Clean Flat Panel { {
Rotary Compressor — — Washable Grille — —
Reluctance DC Motor { { MOLD PROOF Operation — —
Comfortable Power-Airflow Flap — — Good-Sleep Cooling Operation — —
Airflow
Power-Airflow Dual Flaps { { Timer WEEKLY TIMER Operation — —
Power-Airflow Diffuser — — 24-Hour ON/OFF TIMER { {
Wide-Angle Louvers { { NIGHT SET Mode { {
Vertical Auto-Swing (Up and Down) { { Worry Free Auto-Restart (after Power Failure) { {
“Reliability &
Horizontal Auto-Swing Self-Diagnosis (Digital, LED)
{ { Durability” { {
(Right and Left) Display
3-D Airflow { { Wiring Error Check — —
Anti-Corrosion Treatment of
COMFORT AIRFLOW Operation { { { {
Outdoor Heat Exchanger
Comfort Flexibility Multi-Split / Split Type Compatible
Control Auto Fan Speed { { Indoor Unit { {

Indoor Unit Quiet Operation { { H/P, C/O Compatible Indoor Unit — —

NIGHT QUIET Mode (Automatic) — — Flexible Voltage Correspondence — —
OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET Operation
{ { High Ceiling Application — —
(Manual)
2-Area INTELLIGENT EYE Operation — — Chargeless 10 m 10 m
INTELLIGENT EYE Operation { { Either Side Drain (Right or Left) { {
Quick Warming Function { { Power Selection — —
(Preheating Operation)
Hot-Start Function { { Remote 5-Rooms Centralized Controller
Control (Option) { {
Automatic Defrosting { {
Operation Automatic Operation { { Remote Control Adapter
(Normal Open Pulse Contact) { {
Program Dry Operation { { (Option)
Remote Control Adapter
Fan Only { { { {
(Normal Open Contact) (Option)
Lifestyle New POWERFUL Operation DIII-NET Compatible (Adapter)
Convenience (Non-Inverter) — — (Option) { {

Inverter POWERFUL Operation { { remote control Wireless { {

Priority-Room Setting — — Wired (Option) { {
COOL / HEAT Mode Lock — —
HOME LEAVE Operation — —
ECONO Operation { {
Indoor Unit ON/OFF Button { {
Signal Receiving Sign { {
Temperature Display — —
Note: { : Holding Functions
— : No Functions

List of Functions 4
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A

Part 2
Specifications
1. Specifications ..........................................................................................6
1.1 Cooling Only.............................................................................................6
1.2 Heat Pump ...............................................................................................9

5 Specifications
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Specifications

1. Specifications
1.1 Cooling Only
50 Hz, 220 - 230 - 240 V
Indoor Units FTXS20G2V1B FTXS25G2V1B FTXS35G2V1B
Models
Outdoor Units RKS20G2V1B RKS25G2V1B RKS35G2V1B
kW 2.0 (1.3 ~ 2.8) 2.5 (1.3 ~ 3.2) 3.5 (1.4 ~ 4.0)
Capacity
Btu/h 6,800 (4,400 ~ 9,600) 8,500 (4,400 ~ 10,900) 11,900 (4,800 ~ 13,600)
Rated (Min. ~ Max.)
kcal/h 1,720 (1,120 ~ 2,410) 2,150 (1,120 ~ 2,750) 3,010 (1,200 ~ 3,440)
Moisture Removal L/h 0.9 1.2 1.9
Running Current (Rated) A 2.8 - 2.7 - 2.5 3.2 - 3.0 - 2.9 4.4 - 4.2 - 4.0
Power Consumption
W 470 (320 ~ 910) 550 (320 ~ 810) 870 (350 ~ 1,190)
Rated (Min. ~ Max.)
Power Factor % 76.3 - 75.7 - 78.3 78.1 - 79.7 - 79.0 89.9 - 90.1 - 90.6
COP (Rated) W/W 4.26 (4.06 ~ 3.08) 4.55 (4.06 ~ 3.95) 4.02 (4.00 ~ 3.36)
Liquid mm φ 6.4 φ 6.4 φ 6.4
Piping Gas mm φ 9.5 φ 9.5 φ 9.5
Connections
Drain mm φ 18.0 φ 18.0 φ 18.0
Heat Insulation Both Liquid and Gas Pipes Both Liquid and Gas Pipes Both Liquid and Gas Pipes
Max. lnterunit Piping Length m 20 20 20
Max. lnterunit Height Difference m 15 15 15
Chargeless m 10 10 10
Amount of Additional Charge of
Refrigerant g/m 20 20 20
Indoor Units FTXS20G2V1B FTXS25G2V1B FTXS35G2V1B
Front Panel Color White White White
H 9.4 (332) 9.1 (321) 10.4 (367)
m³/min M 7.4 (262) 7.1 (252) 7.7 (270)
Airflow Rate
(cfm) L 5.5 (193) 5.2 (182) 4.8 (170)
SL 4.0 (141) 3.7 (130) 3.5 (125)
Type Cross Flow Fan Cross Flow Fan Cross Flow Fan
Fan Motor Output W 23 23 23
Speed Steps 5 Steps, Quiet, Auto 5 Steps, Quiet, Auto 5 Steps, Quiet, Auto
Air Direction Control Right, Left, Horizontal, Downward Right, Left, Horizontal, Downward Right, Left, Horizontal, Downward
Air Filter Removable / Washable / Mildew Proof Removable / Washable / Mildew Proof Removable / Washable / Mildew Proof
Running Current (Rated) A 0.09 - 0.08 - 0.08 0.09 - 0.08 - 0.08 0.12 - 0.12 - 0.11
Power Consumption (Rated) W 18 - 18 - 18 18 - 18 - 18 26 - 26 - 26
Power Factor % 90.9 - 97.8 - 93.8 90.9 - 97.8 - 93.8 98.5 - 94.2 - 98.5
Temperature Control Microcomputer Control Microcomputer Control Microcomputer Control
Dimensions (H × W × D) mm 295 × 800 × 215 295 × 800 × 215 295 × 800 × 215
Packaged Dimensions (H × W × D) mm 274 × 870 × 366 274 × 870 × 366 274 × 870 × 366
Weight kg 9 9 10
Gross Weight kg 13 13 13
Operation
Sound H / M / L / SL dBA 38 / 32 / 25 / 22 38 / 32 / 25 / 22 42 / 34 / 26 / 23
Sound Power dBA 54 54 58
Outdoor Units RKS20G2V1B RKS25G2V1B RKS35G2V1B
Casing Color Ivory White Ivory White Ivory White
Type Hermetically Sealed Swing Type Hermetically Sealed Swing Type Hermetically Sealed Swing Type
Compressor Model 1YC23AFXD 1YC23AFXD 1YC23AFXD
Motor Output W 600 600 600
Refrigerant Type FVC50K FVC50K FVC50K
Oil Charge L 0.375 0.375 0.375
Type R-410A R-410A R-410A
Refrigerant
Charge kg 0.80 1.00 1.20
m³/min H 36.2 (1,278) 33.5 (1,183) 36.0 (1,272)
Airflow Rate
(cfm) SL 34.0 (1,201) 31.4 (1,109) 31.4 (1,109)
Type Propeller Propeller Propeller
Fan
Motor Output W 50 50 50
Running Current (Rated) A 2.67 - 2.55 - 2.45 3.06 - 2.93 - 2.81 4.26 - 4.08 - 3.91
Power Consumption (Rated) W 452 - 452 - 452 532 - 532 - 532 844 - 844 - 844
Power Factor % 76.9 - 77.1 - 76.9 79.0 - 78.9 - 78.9 90.1 - 89.9 - 89.9
Starting Current A 2.8 3.2 4.4
Dimensions (H × W × D) mm 550 × 765 × 285 550 × 765 × 285 550 × 765 × 285
Packaged Dimensions (H × W × D) mm 612 × 906 × 364 612 × 906 × 364 612 × 906 × 364
Weight kg 32 34 34
Gross Weight kg 37 40 40
Operation H / SL dBA 46 / 43 46 / 43 48 / 44
Sound
Sound Power H dBA 61 61 63
Drawing No. 3D059727 3D059728 3D059729

Note: „ The data are based on the conditions shown in the table below.
Conversion Formulae
Cooling Piping Length
kcal/h = kW × 860
Indoor ; 27°CDB / 19°CWB 5m Btu/h = kW × 3412
Outdoor ; 35°CDB / 24°CWB cfm = m³/min × 35.3

Specifications 6
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Specifications SiENBE04-808_A

50 Hz, 220 - 230 - 240 V

Indoor Units FTXS20G2V1B FTXS25G2V1B FTXS35G2V1B
Models
Outdoor Units RKS20G2V1B9 RKS25G2V1B9 RKS35G2V1B9
kW 2.0 (1.3 ~ 2.8) 2.5 (1.3 ~ 3.2) 3.5 (1.4 ~ 4.0)
Capacity
Btu/h 6,800 (4,400 ~ 9,600) 8,500 (4,400 ~ 10,900) 11,900 (4,800 ~ 13,600)
Rated (Min. ~ Max.)
kcal/h 1,720 (1,120 ~ 2,410) 2,150 (1,120 ~ 2,750) 3,010 (1,200 ~ 3,440)
Moisture Removal L/h 0.9 1.2 1.9
Running Current (Rated) A 2.8 - 2.7 - 2.5 3.2 - 3.0 - 2.9 4.4 - 4.2 - 4.0
Power Consumption
W 470 (320 ~ 910) 550 (320 ~ 810) 870 (350 ~ 1,190)
Rated (Min. ~ Max.)
Power Factor % 76.3 - 75.7 - 78.3 78.1 - 79.7 - 79.0 89.9 - 90.1 - 90.6
COP (Rated) W/W 4.26 (4.06 ~ 3.08) 4.55 (4.06 ~ 3.95) 4.02 (4.00 ~ 3.36)
Liquid mm φ 6.4 φ 6.4 φ 6.4
Piping
Gas mm φ 9.5 φ 9.5 φ 9.5
Connections
Drain mm φ 18.0 φ 18.0 φ 18.0
Heat Insulation Both Liquid and Gas Pipes Both Liquid and Gas Pipes Both Liquid and Gas Pipes
Max. lnterunit Piping Length m 20 20 20
Max. lnterunit Height Difference m 15 15 15
Chargeless m 10 10 10
Amount of Additional Charge of
g/m 20 20 20
Refrigerant
Indoor Units FTXS20G2V1B FTXS25G2V1B FTXS35G2V1B
Front Panel Color White White White
H 9.4 (332) 9.1 (321) 10.4 (367)
m³/min M 7.4 (262) 7.1 (252) 7.7 (270)
Airflow Rate
(cfm) L 5.5 (193) 5.2 (182) 4.8 (170)
SL 4.0 (141) 3.7 (130) 3.5 (125)
Type Cross Flow Fan Cross Flow Fan Cross Flow Fan
Fan Motor Output W 23 23 23
Speed Steps 5 Steps, Quiet, Auto 5 Steps, Quiet, Auto 5 Steps, Quiet, Auto
Air Direction Control Right, Left, Horizontal, Downward Right, Left, Horizontal, Downward Right, Left, Horizontal, Downward
Air Filter Removable / Washable / Mildew Proof Removable / Washable / Mildew Proof Removable / Washable / Mildew Proof
Running Current (Rated) A 0.09 - 0.08 - 0.08 0.09 - 0.08 - 0.08 0.12 - 0.12 - 0.11
Power Consumption (Rated) W 18 - 18 - 18 18 - 18 - 18 26 - 26 - 26
Power Factor % 90.9 - 97.8 - 93.8 90.9 - 97.8 - 93.8 98.5 - 94.2 - 98.5
Temperature Control Microcomputer Control Microcomputer Control Microcomputer Control
Dimensions (H × W × D) mm 295 × 800 × 215 295 × 800 × 215 295 × 800 × 215
Packaged Dimensions (H × W × D) mm 274 × 870 × 366 274 × 870 × 366 274 × 870 × 366
Weight kg 9 9 10
Gross Weight kg 13 13 13
Operation
Sound H / M / L / SL dBA 38 / 32 / 25 / 22 38 / 32 / 25 / 22 42 / 34 / 26 / 23
Sound Power dBA 54 54 58
Outdoor Units RKS20G2V1B9 RKS25G2V1B9 RKS35G2V1B9
Casing Color Ivory White Ivory White Ivory White
Type Hermetically Sealed Swing Type Hermetically Sealed Swing Type Hermetically Sealed Swing Type
Compressor Model 1YC23AEXD 1YC23AEXD 1YC23AEXD
Motor Output W 600 600 600
Refrigerant Type FVC50K FVC50K FVC50K
Oil Charge L 0.375 0.375 0.375
Type R-410A R-410A R-410A
Refrigerant
Charge kg 0.80 1.00 1.20
m³/min H 36.2 (1,278) 33.5 (1,183) 36.0 (1,272)
Airflow Rate (cfm) SL 32.7 (1,153) 30.1 (1,064) 30.1 (1,064)
Type Propeller Propeller Propeller
Fan
Motor Output W 23 23 23
Running Current (Rated) A 2.67 - 2.55 - 2.45 3.06 - 2.93 - 2.81 4.26 - 4.08 - 3.91
Power Consumption (Rated) W 452 - 452 - 452 532 - 532 - 532 844 - 844 - 844
Power Factor % 76.9 - 77.1 - 76.9 79.0 - 78.9 - 78.9 90.1 - 89.9 - 89.9
Starting Current A 2.8 3.2 4.4
Dimensions (H × W × D) mm 550 × 765 × 285 550 × 765 × 285 550 × 765 × 285
Packaged Dimensions (H × W × D) mm 612 × 906 × 364 612 × 906 × 364 612 × 906 × 364
Weight kg 32 34 34
Gross Weight kg 35 38 38
Operation H / SL dBA 46 / 43 46 / 43 48 / 44
Sound
Sound Power H dBA 61 61 63
Drawing No. 3D066471 3D066472 3D066474

Note: „ The data are based on the conditions shown in the table below.
Conversion Formulae
Cooling Piping Length
kcal/h = kW × 860
Indoor ; 27°CDB / 19°CWB Btu/h = kW × 3412
5m
Outdoor ; 35°CDB / 24°CWB cfm = m³/min × 35.3

7 Specifications
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Specifications

50 Hz, 220 - 230 - 240 V

Indoor Units FTXS42G2V1B FTXS50G2V1B
Models
Outdoor Units RKS42G2V1B RKS50G2V1B
kW 4.2 (1.7 ~ 5.0) 5.0 (1.7 ~ 5.3)
Capacity
Btu/h 14,300 (5,800 ~ 17,100) 17,100 (5,800 ~ 18,100)
Rated (Min. ~ Max.)
kcal/h 3,610 (1,460 ~ 4,300) 4,300 (1,460 ~ 4,560)
Moisture Removal L/h 2.3 2.8
Running Current (Rated) A 6.2 - 5.9 - 5.6 7.1 - 6.7 - 6.5
Power Consumption
W 1,220 (440 ~ 2,230) 1,520 (440 ~ 1,810)
Rated (Min. ~ Max.)
Power Factor % 89.4 - 89.9 - 90.8 97.3 - 98.6 - 97.4
COP (Rated) W/W 3.44 (3.86 ~ 2.24) 3.29 (3.86 ~ 2.93)
Liquid mm φ 6.4 φ 6.4
Piping
Gas mm φ 9.5 φ 12.7
Connections
Drain mm φ 18.0 φ 18.0
Heat Insulation Both Liquid and Gas Pipes Both Liquid and Gas Pipes
Max. Interunit Piping Length m 20 30
Max. Interunit Height Difference m 15 20
Chargeless m 10 10
Amount of Additional Charge of
g/m 20 20
Refrigerant
Indoor Units FTXS42G2V1B FTXS50G2V1B
Front Panel Color White White
H 9.1 (321) 10.2 (360)
m³/min M 7.7 (273) 8.6 (305)
Airflow Rate
(cfm) L 6.3 (221) 7.0 (246)
SL 5.4 (190) 6.0 (212)
Type Cross Flow Fan Cross Flow Fan
Fan Motor Output W 23 23
Speed Steps 5 Steps, Quiet, Auto 5 Steps, Quiet, Auto
Air Direction Control Right, Left, Horizontal, Downward Right, Left, Horizontal, Downward
Air Filter Removable / Washable / Mildew Proof Removable / Washable / Mildew Proof
Running Current (Rated) A 0.11 - 0.11 - 0.10 0.12 - 0.12 - 0.11
Power Consumption (Rated) W 24 - 24 - 24 26 - 26 - 26
Power Factor % 99.2 - 94.9 - 100.0 98.5 - 94.2 - 98.5
Temperature Control Microcomputer Control Microcomputer Control
Dimensions (H × W × D) mm 295 × 800 × 215 295 × 800 × 215
Packaged Dimensions (H × W × D) mm 274 × 870 × 366 274 × 870 × 366
Weight kg 10 10
Gross Weight kg 13 13
Operation
Sound H / M / L / SL dBA 42 / 38 / 33 / 30 43 / 39 / 34 / 31
Sound Power dBA 58 59
Outdoor Units RKS42G2V1B RKS50G2V1B
Casing Color Ivory White Ivory White
Type Hermetically Sealed Swing Type Hermetically Sealed Swing Type
Compressor Model 2YC36BXD 2YC36BXD
Motor Output W 1,100 1,100
Refrigerant Type FVC50K FVC50K
Oil Charge L 0.65 0.65
Type R-410A R-410A
Refrigerant
Charge kg 1.30 1.70
m³/min HH 37.3 (1,317) 50.9 (1,797)
Airflow Rate (cfm) SL 30.6 (1,079) 48.9 (1,727)
Type Propeller Propeller
Fan
Motor Output W 50 53
Running Current (Rated) A 6.04 - 5.78 - 5.54 6.93 - 6.63 - 6.35
Power Consumption (Rated) W 1,196 - 1,196 - 1,196 1,494 - 1,494 - 1,494
Power Factor % 90.0 - 90.0 - 90.0 98.0 - 98.0 - 98.0
Starting Current A 6.2 7.1
Dimensions (H × W × D) mm 550 × 765 × 285 735 × 825 × 300
Packaged Dimensions (H × W × D) mm 612 × 906 × 364 797 × 960 × 390
Weight kg 39 47
Gross Weight kg 45 52
Operation H / SL dBA 48 / 44 48 / 44
Sound
Sound Power H dBA 63 62
Drawing No. 3D059730 3D059731

Note: „ The data are based on the conditions shown in the table below.
Conversion Formulae
Cooling Piping Length
Indoor ; 27°CDB / 19°CWB kcal/h = kW × 860
5m Btu/h = kW × 3412
Outdoor ; 35°CDB / 24°CWB
cfm = m³/min × 35.3

Specifications 8
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Specifications SiENBE04-808_A

1.2 Heat Pump

50 Hz, 220 - 230 - 240 V
Indoor Units FTXS20G2V1B FTXS25G2V1B
Models RXS20G2V1B RXS25G2V1B
Outdoor Units
Cooling Heating Cooling Heating
kW 2.0 (1.3 ~ 2.8) 2.7 (1.3 ~ 4.3) 2.5 (1.3 ~ 3.2) 3.4 (1.3 ~ 4.7)
Capacity
Rated (Min. ~ Max.) Btu/h 6,800 (4,400 ~ 9,600) 9,200 (4,400 ~ 14,700) 8,500 (4,400 ~ 10,900) 11,600 (4,400 ~ 16,000)
kcal/h 1,720 (1,120 ~ 2,410) 2,320 (1,120 ~ 3,700) 2,150 (1,120 ~ 2,750) 2,920 (1,120 ~ 4,040)
Moisture Removal L/h 0.9 — 1.2 —
Running Current (Rated) A 2.8 - 2.7 - 2.5 3.6 - 3.5 - 3.3 3.2 - 3.0 - 2.9 4.3 - 4.1 - 3.9
Power Consumption W 470 (320 ~ 910) 630 (310 ~ 1,360) 550 (320 ~ 810) 750 (310 ~ 1,290)
Rated (Min. ~ Max.)
Power Factor % 76.3 - 75.7 - 78.3 79.5 - 78.3 - 79.5 78.1 - 79.7 - 79.0 79.3 - 79.5 - 80.1
COP (Rated) W/W 4.26 (4.06 ~ 3.08) 4.29 (4.19 ~ 3.16) 4.55 (4.06 ~ 3.95) 4.53 (4.19 ~ 3.64)
Liquid mm φ 6.4 φ 6.4
Piping
Connections Gas mm φ 9.5 φ 9.5
Drain mm φ 18.0 φ 18.0
Heat Insulation Both Liquid and Gas Pipes Both Liquid and Gas Pipes
Max. lnterunit Piping Length m 20 20
Max. lnterunit Height Difference m 15 15
Chargeless m 10 10
Amount of Additional Charge of
g/m 20 20
Refrigerant
Indoor Units FTXS20G2V1B FTXS25G2V1B
Front Panel Color White White
H 9.4 (332) 9.9 (350) 9.1 (321) 9.8 (346)
m³/min M 7.4 (262) 8.2 (290) 7.1 (252) 7.9 (280)
Airflow Rate (cfm) L 5.5 (193) 6.5 (228) 5.2 (182) 6.2 (217)
SL 4.0 (141) 5.5 (193) 3.7 (130) 5.2 (183)
Type Cross Flow Fan Cross Flow Fan
Fan Motor Output W 23 23
Speed Steps 5 Steps, Quiet, Auto 5 Steps, Quiet, Auto
Air Direction Control Right, Left, Horizontal, Downward Right, Left, Horizontal, Downward
Air Filter Removable / Washable / Mildew Proof Removable / Washable / Mildew Proof
Running Current (Rated) A 0.09 - 0.08 - 0.08 0.10 - 0.10 - 0.09 0.09 - 0.08 - 0.08 0.10 - 0.10 - 0.09
Power Consumption (Rated) W 18 - 18 - 18 21 - 21 - 21 18 - 18 - 18 21 - 21 - 21
Power Factor % 90.9 - 97.8 - 93.8 95.5 - 91.3 - 97.2 90.9 - 97.8 - 93.8 95.5 - 91.3 - 97.2
Temperature Control Microcomputer Control Microcomputer Control
Dimensions (H × W × D) mm 295 × 800 × 215 295 × 800 × 215
Packaged Dimensions (H × W × D) mm 274 × 870 × 366 274 × 870 × 366
Weight kg 9 9
Gross Weight kg 13 13
Operation H / M / L / SL dBA 38 / 32 / 25 / 22 38 / 33 / 28 / 25 38 / 32 / 25 / 22 39 / 34 / 28 / 25
Sound
Sound Power dBA 54 54 54 55
Outdoor Units RXS20G2V1B RXS25G2V1B
Casing Color Ivory White Ivory White
Type Hermetically Sealed Swing Type Hermetically Sealed Swing Type
Compressor Model 1YC23AFXD 1YC23AFXD
Motor Output W 600 600
Refrigerant Type FVC50K FVC50K
Oil Charge L 0.375 0.375
Type R-410A R-410A
Refrigerant
Charge kg 0.80 1.00
m³/min H 36.2 (1,278) 32.6 (1,151) 33.5 (1,183) 30.2 (1,066)
Airflow Rate
(cfm) SL 34.0 (1,201) 24.6 (869) 31.4 (1,109) 22.6 (798)
Type Propeller Propeller
Fan
Motor Output W 50 50
Running Current (Rated) A 2.67 - 2.55 - 2.45 3.50 - 3.35 - 3.21 3.06 - 2.93 - 2.81 4.14 - 3.96 - 3.80
Power Consumption (Rated) W 452 - 452 - 452 609 - 609 - 609 532 - 532 - 532 729 - 729 - 729
Power Factor % 76.9 - 77.1 - 76.9 79.1 - 79.0 - 79.0 79.0 - 78.9 - 78.9 80.0 - 80.0 - 79.9
Starting Current A 3.6 4.3
Dimensions (H × W × D) mm 550 × 765 × 285 550 × 765 × 285
Packaged Dimensions (H × W × D) mm 612 × 906 × 364 612 × 906 × 364
Weight kg 32 34
Gross Weight kg 37 40
Operation
H / SL dBA 46 / 43 47 / 44 46 / 43 47 / 44
Sound
Sound Power H dBA 61 62 61 62
Drawing No. 3D059722 3D059723

Note: „ The data are based on the conditions shown in the table below.
Conversion Formulae
Cooling Heating Piping Length
kcal/h = kW × 860
Indoor ; 27°CDB / 19°CWB Indoor ; 20°CDB 5m Btu/h = kW × 3412
Outdoor ; 35°CDB / 24°CWB Outdoor ; 7°CDB / 6°CWB cfm = m³/min × 35.3

9 Specifications
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Specifications

50 Hz, 220 - 230 - 240 V

Indoor Units FTXS35G2V1B FTXS20G2V1B
Models RXS35G2V1B RXS20G2V1B9
Outdoor Units
Cooling Heating Cooling Heating
kW 3.5 (1.4 ~ 4.0) 4.0 (1.4 ~ 5.2) 2.0 (1.3 ~ 2.8) 2.7 (1.3 ~ 4.3)
Capacity
Btu/h 11,900 (4,800 ~ 13,600) 13,600 (4,800 ~ 17,700) 6,800 (4,400 ~ 9,600) 9,200 (4,400 ~ 14,700)
Rated (Min. ~ Max.)
kcal/h 3,010 (1,200 ~ 3,440) 3,440 (1,200 ~ 4,470) 1,720 (1,120 ~ 2,410) 2,320 (1,120 ~ 3,700)
Moisture Removal L/h 1.9 — 0.9 —
Running Current (Rated) A 4.4 - 4.2 - 4.0 4.8 - 4.6 - 4.4 2.8 - 2.7 - 2.5 3.6 - 3.5 - 3.3
Power Consumption
Rated (Min. ~ Max.) W 870 (350 ~ 1,190) 960 (340 ~ 1,460) 470 (320 ~ 910) 630 (310 ~ 1,360)
Power Factor % 89.9 - 90.1 - 90.6 90.9 - 90.7 - 90.9 76.3 - 75.7 - 78.3 79.5 - 78.3 - 79.5
COP (Rated) W/W 4.02 (4.00 ~ 3.96) 4.17 (4.12 ~ 3.56) 4.26 (4.06 ~ 3.08) 4.29 (4.19 ~ 3.16)
Liquid mm φ 6.4 φ 6.4
Piping
Connections Gas mm φ 9.5 φ 9.5
Drain mm φ 18.0 φ 18.0
Heat Insulation Both Liquid and Gas Pipes Both Liquid and Gas Pipes
Max. lnterunit Piping Length m 20 20
Max. lnterunit Height Difference m 15 15
Chargeless m 10 10
Amount of Additional Charge of
g/m 20 20
Refrigerant
Indoor Units FTXS35G2V1B FTXS20G2V1B
Front Panel Color White White
H 10.4 (367) 10.6 (374) 9.4 (332) 9.9 (350)
m³/min M 7.7 (270) 8.5 (302) 7.4 (262) 8.2 (290)
Airflow Rate (cfm) L 4.8 (170) 6.4 (226) 5.5 (193) 6.5 (228)
SL 3.5 (125) 5.4 (191) 4.0 (141) 5.5 (193)
Type Cross Flow Fan Cross Flow Fan
Fan Motor Output W 23 23
Speed Steps 5 Steps, Quiet, Auto 5 Steps, Quiet, Auto
Air Direction Control Right, Left, Horizontal, Downward Right, Left, Horizontal, Downward
Air Filter Removable / Washable / Mildew Proof Removable / Washable / Mildew Proof
Running Current (Rated) A 0.12 - 0.12 - 0.11 0.13 - 0.13 - 0.12 0.09 - 0.08 - 0.08 0.10 - 0.10 - 0.09
Power Consumption (Rated) W 26 - 26 - 26 28 - 28 - 28 18 - 18 - 18 21 - 21 - 21
Power Factor % 98.5 - 94.2 - 98.5 97.9 - 93.6 - 97.2 90.9 - 97.8 - 93.8 95.5 - 91.3 - 97.2
Temperature Control Microcomputer Control Microcomputer Control
Dimensions (H × W × D) mm 295 × 800 × 215 295 × 800 × 215
Packaged Dimensions (H × W × D) mm 274 × 870 × 366 274 × 870 × 366
Weight kg 10 9
Gross Weight kg 13 13
Operation H / M / L / SL dBA 42 / 34 / 26 / 23 42 / 36 / 29 / 26 38 / 32 / 25 / 22 38 / 33 / 28 / 25
Sound
Sound Power dBA 58 58 54 54
Outdoor Units RXS35G2V1B RXS20G2V1B9
Casing Color Ivory White Ivory White
Type Hermetically Sealed Swing Type Hermetically Sealed Swing Type
Compressor Model 1YC23AFXD 1YC23AEXD
Motor Output W 600 600
Refrigerant Type FVC50K FVC50K
Oil Charge L 0.375 0.375
Type R-410A R-410A
Refrigerant
Charge kg 1.20 0.80
m³/min H 36.0 (1,272) 30.2 (1,066) 36.2 (1,278) 30.6 (1,080)
Airflow Rate
(cfm) SL 31.4 (1,109) 22.6 (798) 32.7 (1,153) 28.5 (1,005)
Type Propeller Propeller
Fan
Motor Output W 50 23
Running Current (Rated) A 4.26 - 4.08 - 3.91 4.71 - 4.50 - 4.31 2.67 - 2.55 - 2.45 3.50 - 3.35 - 3.21
Power Consumption (Rated) W 844 - 844 - 844 932 - 932 - 932 452 - 452 - 452 609 - 609 - 609
Power Factor % 90.1 - 89.9 - 89.9 89.9 - 90.0 - 90.1 76.9 - 77.1 - 76.9 79.1 - 79.0 - 79.0
Starting Current A 4.8 3.6
Dimensions (H × W × D) mm 550 × 765 × 285 550 × 765 × 285
Packaged Dimensions (H × W × D) mm 612 × 906 × 364 612 × 906 × 364
Weight kg 34 32
Gross Weight kg 40 35
Operation
H / SL dBA 48 / 44 48 / 45 46 / 43 47 / 44
Sound
Sound Power H dBA 63 63 61 62
Drawing No. 3D059724 3D066468

Note: „ The data are based on the conditions shown in the table below.
Conversion Formulae
Cooling Heating Piping Length
kcal/h = kW × 860
Indoor ; 27°CDB / 19°CWB Indoor ; 20°CDB Btu/h = kW × 3412
Outdoor ; 35°CDB / 24°CWB Outdoor ; 7°CDB / 6°CWB 5m
cfm = m³/min × 35.3

Specifications 10
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Specifications SiENBE04-808_A

50 Hz, 220 - 230 - 240 V

Indoor Units FTXS25G2V1B FTXS35G2V1B
Models RXS25G2V1B9 RXS35G2V1B9
Outdoor Units
Cooling Heating Cooling Heating
kW 2.5 (1.3 ~ 3.2) 3.4 (1.3 ~ 4.7) 3.5 (1.4 ~ 4.0) 4.0 (1.4 ~ 5.2)
Capacity
Btu/h 8,500 (4,400 ~ 10,900) 11,600 (4,400 ~ 16,000) 11,900 (4,800 ~ 13,600) 13,600 (4,800 ~ 17,700)
Rated (Min. ~ Max.)
kcal/h 2,150 (1,120 ~ 2,750) 2,920 (1,120 ~ 4,040) 3,010 (1,200 ~ 3,440) 3,440 (1,200 ~ 4,470)
Moisture Removal L/h 1.2 — 1.9 —
Running Current (Rated) A 3.2 - 3.0 - 2.9 4.3 - 4.1 - 3.9 4.4 - 4.2 - 4.0 4.8 - 4.6 - 4.4
Power Consumption
Rated (Min. ~ Max.) W 550 (320 ~ 810) 750 (310 ~ 1,290) 870 (350 ~ 1,190) 960 (340 ~ 1,460)
Power Factor % 78.1 - 79.7 - 79.0 79.3 - 79.5 - 80.1 89.9 - 90.1 - 90.6 90.9 - 90.7 - 90.9
COP (Rated) W/W 4.55 (4.06 ~ 3.95) 4.53 (4.19 ~ 3.64) 4.02 (4.00 ~ 3.96) 4.17 (4.12 ~ 3.56)
Liquid mm φ 6.4 φ 6.4
Piping
Connections Gas mm φ 9.5 φ 9.5
Drain mm φ 18.0 φ 18.0
Heat Insulation Both Liquid and Gas Pipes Both Liquid and Gas Pipes
Max. lnterunit Piping Length m 20 20
Max. lnterunit Height Difference m 15 15
Chargeless m 10 10
Amount of Additional Charge of
g/m 20 20
Refrigerant
Indoor Units FTXS25G2V1B FTXS35G2V1B
Front Panel Color White White
H 9.1 (321) 9.8 (346) 10.4 (367) 10.6 (374)
m³/min M 7.1 (252) 7.9 (280) 7.7 (270) 8.5 (302)
Airflow Rate (cfm) L 5.2 (182) 6.2 (217) 4.8 (170) 6.4 (226)
SL 3.7 (130) 5.2 (183) 3.5 (125) 5.4 (191)
Type Cross Flow Fan Cross Flow Fan
Fan Motor Output W 23 23
Speed Steps 5 Steps, Quiet, Auto 5 Steps, Quiet, Auto
Air Direction Control Right, Left, Horizontal, Downward Right, Left, Horizontal, Downward
Air Filter Removable / Washable / Mildew Proof Removable / Washable / Mildew Proof
Running Current (Rated) A 0.09 - 0.08 - 0.08 0.10 - 0.10 - 0.09 0.12 - 0.12 - 0.11 0.13 - 0.13 - 0.12
Power Consumption (Rated) W 18 - 18 - 18 21 - 21 - 21 26 - 26 - 26 28 - 28 - 28
Power Factor % 90.9 - 97.8 - 93.8 95.5 - 91.3 - 97.2 98.5 - 94.2 - 98.5 97.9 - 93.6 - 97.2
Temperature Control Microcomputer Control Microcomputer Control
Dimensions (H × W × D) mm 295 × 800 × 215 295 × 800 × 215
Packaged Dimensions (H × W × D) mm 274 × 870 × 366 274 × 870 × 366
Weight kg 9 10
Gross Weight kg 13 13
Operation H / M / L / SL dBA 38 / 32 / 25 / 22 39 / 34 / 28 / 25 42 / 34 / 26 / 23 42 / 36 / 29 / 26
Sound
Sound Power dBA 54 55 58 58
Outdoor Units RXS25G2V1B9 RXS35G2V1B9
Casing Color Ivory White Ivory White
Type Hermetically Sealed Swing Type Hermetically Sealed Swing Type
Compressor Model 1YC23AEXD 1YC23AEXD
Motor Output W 600 600
Refrigerant Type FVC50K FVC50K
Oil Charge L 0.375 0.375
Type R-410A R-410A
Refrigerant
Charge kg 1.00 1.20
m³/min H 33.5 (1,183) 28.3 (999) 36.0 (1,272) 28.3 (999)
Airflow Rate
(cfm) SL 30.1 (1,064) 25.6 (905) 30.1 (1,064) 25.6 (905)
Type Propeller Propeller
Fan
Motor Output W 23 23
Running Current (Rated) A 3.06 - 2.93 - 2.81 4.14 - 3.96 - 3.80 4.26 - 4.08 - 3.91 4.71 - 4.50 - 4.31
Power Consumption (Rated) W 532 - 532 - 532 729 - 729 - 729 844 - 844 - 844 932 - 932 - 932
Power Factor % 79.0 - 78.9 - 78.9 80.0 - 80.0 - 79.9 90.1 - 89.9 - 89.9 89.9 - 90.0 - 90.1
Starting Current A 4.3 4.8
Dimensions (H × W × D) mm 550 × 765 × 285 550 × 765 × 285
Packaged Dimensions (H × W × D) mm 612 × 906 × 364 612 × 906 × 364
Weight kg 34 34
Gross Weight kg 38 38
Operation
H / SL dBA 46 / 43 47 / 44 48 / 44 48 / 45
Sound
Sound Power H dBA 61 62 63 63
Drawing No. 3D066469 3D066470

Note: „ The data are based on the conditions shown in the table below.
Conversion Formulae
Cooling Heating Piping Length
kcal/h = kW × 860
Indoor ; 27°CDB / 19°CWB Indoor ; 20°CDB Btu/h = kW × 3412
Outdoor ; 35°CDB / 24°CWB Outdoor ; 7°CDB / 6°CWB 5m
cfm = m³/min × 35.3

11 Specifications
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Specifications

50 Hz, 220 - 230 - 240 V

Indoor Units FTXS42G2V1B FTXS50G2V1B
Model RXS42G2V1B RXS50G2V1B
Outdoor Units
Cooling Heating Cooling Heating
kW 4.2 (1.7 ~ 5.0) 5.4 (1.7 ~ 6.0) 5.0 (1.7 ~ 5.3) 5.8 (1.7 ~ 6.5)
Capacity
Btu/h 14,300 (5,800 ~ 17,100) 18,400 (5,800 ~ 20,500) 17,100 (5,800 ~ 18,100) 19,800 (5,800 ~ 22,200)
Rated (Min. ~ Max.)
kcal/h 3,610 (1,460 ~ 4,300) 4,640 (1,460 ~ 5,160) 4,300 (1,460 ~ 4,560) 4,990 (1,460 ~ 5,590)
Moisture Removal L/h 2.3 — 2.8 —
Running Current
A 6.2 - 5.9 - 5.6 7.4 - 7.1 - 6.8 7.1 - 6.7 - 6.5 7.3 - 7.0 - 6.7
Rated
Power Consumption
W 1,220 (440 ~ 2,230) 1,470 (400 ~ 1,980) 1,520 (440 ~ 1,810) 1,570 (400 ~ 2,000)
Rated (Min. ~ Max.)
Power Factor % 89.4 - 89.9 - 90.8 90.3 - 90.0 - 90.1 97.3 - 98.6 - 97.4 97.8 - 97.5 - 97.6
COP
W/W 3.44 (3.86 ~ 2.24) 3.67 (4.25 ~ 3.03) 3.29 (3.86 ~ 2.93) 3.69 (4.25 ~ 3.25)
Rated (Min. ~ Max.)
Liquid mm φ 6.4 φ 6.4
Piping
Connections Gas mm φ 9.5 φ 12.7
Drain mm φ 18.0 φ 18.0
Heat Insulation Both Liquid and Gas Pipes Both Liquid and Gas Pipes
Max. Interunit Piping Length m 20 30
Max. Interunit Height Difference m 15 20
Chargeless m 10 10
Amount of Additional Charge of
Refrigerant g/m 20 20
Indoor Unit FTXS42G2V1B FTXS50G2V1B
Front Panel Color White White
H 9.1 (321) 11.2 (395) 10.2 (360) 11.0 (388)
m³/min M 7.7 (273) 9.4 (333) 8.6 (305) 9.3 (330)
Airflow Rate
(cfm) L 6.3 (221) 7.7 (271) 7.0 (246) 7.6 (267)
SL 5.4 (190) 6.8 (240) 6.0 (212) 6.7 (236)
Type Cross Flow Fan Cross Flow Fan
Fan Motor Output W 23 23
Speed Steps 5 Steps, Quiet, Auto 5 Steps, Quiet, Auto
Air Direction Control Right, Left, Horizontal, Downward Right, Left, Horizontal, Downward
Air Filter Removable / Washable / Mildew Proof Removable / Washable / Mildew Proof
Running Current (Rated) A 0.11 - 0.11 - 0.10 0.14 - 0.14 - 0.13 0.12 - 0.12 - 0.11 0.15 - 0.14 - 0.14
Power Consumption (Rated) W 24 - 24 - 24 30 - 30 - 30 26 - 26 - 26 32 - 32 - 32
Power Factor % 99.2 - 94.9 - 100.0 97.4 - 93.2 - 96.2 98.5 - 94.2 - 98.5 97.0 - 99.4 - 95.2
Temperature Control Microcomputer Control Microcomputer Control
Dimensions (H × W × D) mm 295 × 800 × 215 295 × 800 × 215
Packaged Dimensions (H × W × D) mm 274 × 870 × 366 274 × 870 × 366
Weight kg 10 10
Gross Weight kg 13 13
Operation
Sound H / M / L / SL dBA 42 / 38 / 33 / 30 42 / 38 / 33 / 30 43 / 39 / 34 / 31 44 / 39 / 34 / 31
Sound Power dBA 58 58 59 60
Outdoor Unit RXS42G2V1B RXS50G2V1B
Casing Color Ivory White Ivory White
Type Hermetically Sealed Swing Type Hermetically Sealed Swing Type
Compressor Model 2YC36BXD 2YC36BXD
Motor Output W 1,100 1,100
Refrigerant Model FVC50K FVC50K
Oil Charge L 0.65 0.65
Model R-410A R-410A
Refrigerant
Charge kg 1.30 1.70
HH 37.3 (1,317) 31.3 (1,107) 50.9 (1,797) 45.0 (1,589)
Airflow Rate m³/min (cfm)
SL 30.6 (1,079) 27.2 (959) 48.9 (1,727) 43.1 (1,522)
Type Propeller Propeller
Fan
Motor Output W 50 53
Running Current (Rated) A 6.04 - 5.78 - 5.54 7.27 - 6.96 - 6.67 6.93 - 6.63 - 6.35 7.13 - 6.82 - 6.54
Power Consumption (Rated) W 1,196 - 1,196 - 1,196 1,440 - 1,440 - 1,440 1,494 - 1,494 - 1,494 1,538 - 1,538 - 1,538
Power Factor (Rated) % 90.0 - 90.0 - 90.0 90.0 - 90.0 - 90.0 98.0 - 98.0 - 98.0 98.0 - 98.0 - 98.0
Starting Current A 7.4 7.3
Dimensions (H × W × D) mm 550 × 765 × 285 735 × 825 × 300
Packaged Dimensions (H × W × D) mm 612 × 906 × 364 797 × 960 × 390
Weight kg 39 48
Gross Weight kg 45 53
Operation H / SL dBA 48 / 44 48 / 45 48 / 44 48 / 45
Sound
Sound Power H dBA 63 63 62 62
Drawing No. 3D059725 3D059726

Note: „ The data are based on the conditions shown in the table below.
Conversion Formulae
Cooling Heating Piping Length
kcal/h = kW × 860
Indoor ; 27°CDB / 19°CWB Indoor ; 20°CDB Btu/h = kW × 3412
Outdoor ; 35°CDB / 24°CWB Outdoor ; 7°CDB / 6°CWB 5m
cfm = m³/min × 35.3

Specifications 12
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Specifications SiENBE04-808_A

50 Hz, 220 - 230 - 240 V

Indoor Units ATXS20G2V1B ATXS25G2V1B
Models ARXS20G2V1B ARXS25G2V1B
Outdoor Units
Cooling Heating Cooling Heating
kW 2.0 (1.3 ~ 2.8) 2.7 (1.3 ~ 4.3) 2.5 (1.3 ~ 3.2) 3.4 (1.3 ~ 4.7)
Capacity
Btu/h 6,800 (4,400 ~ 9,600) 9,200 (4,400 ~ 14,700) 8,500 (4,400 ~ 10,900) 11,600 (4,400 ~ 16,000)
Rated (Min. ~ Max.)
kcal/h 1,720 (1,120 ~ 2,410) 2,320 (1,120 ~ 3,700) 2,150 (1,120 ~ 2,750) 2,920 (1,120 ~ 4,040)
Moisture Removal L/h 0.9 — 1.2 —
Running Current (Rated) A 2.8 - 2.7 - 2.5 3.6 - 3.5 - 3.3 3.2 - 3.0 - 2.9 4.3 - 4.1 - 3.9
Power Consumption
Rated (Min. ~ Max.) W 470 (320 ~ 910) 630 (310 ~ 1,360) 550 (320 ~ 810) 750 (310 ~ 1,290)
Power Factor % 76.3 - 75.7 - 78.3 79.5 - 78.3 - 79.5 78.1 - 79.7 - 79.0 79.3 - 79.5 - 80.1
COP (Rated) W/W 4.26 (4.06 ~ 3.08) 4.29 (4.19 ~ 3.16) 4.55 (4.06 ~ 3.95) 4.53 (4.19 ~ 3.64)
Liquid mm φ 6.4 φ 6.4
Piping
Connections Gas mm φ 9.5 φ 9.5
Drain mm φ 18.0 φ 18.0
Heat Insulation Both Liquid and Gas Pipes Both Liquid and Gas Pipes
Max. lnterunit Piping Length m 20 20
Max. lnterunit Height Difference m 15 15
Chargeless m 10 10
Amount of Additional Charge of
g/m 20 20
Refrigerant
Indoor Units ATXS20G2V1B ATXS25G2V1B
Front Panel Color White White
H 9.4 (332) 9.9 (350) 9.1 (321) 9.8 (346)
m³/min M 7.4 (262) 8.2 (290) 7.1 (252) 7.9 (280)
Airflow Rate (cfm) L 5.5 (193) 6.5 (228) 5.2 (182) 6.2 (217)
SL 4.0 (141) 5.5 (193) 3.7 (130) 5.2 (183)
Type Cross Flow Fan Cross Flow Fan
Fan Motor Output W 23 23
Speed Steps 5 Steps, Quiet, Auto 5 Steps, Quiet, Auto
Air Direction Control Right, Left, Horizontal, Downward Right, Left, Horizontal, Downward
Air Filter Removable / Washable / Mildew Proof Removable / Washable / Mildew Proof
Running Current (Rated) A 0.09 - 0.08 - 0.08 0.10 - 0.10 - 0.09 0.09 - 0.08 - 0.08 0.10 - 0.10 - 0.09
Power Consumption (Rated) W 18 - 18 - 18 21 - 21 - 21 18 - 18 - 18 21 - 21 - 21
Power Factor % 90.9 - 97.8 - 93.8 95.5 - 91.3 - 97.2 90.9 - 97.8 - 93.8 95.5 - 91.3 - 97.2
Temperature Control Microcomputer Control Microcomputer Control
Dimensions (H × W × D) mm 295 × 800 × 215 295 × 800 × 215
Packaged Dimensions (H × W × D) mm 274 × 870 × 366 274 × 870 × 366
Weight kg 9 9
Gross Weight kg 13 13
Operation H / M / L / SL dBA 38 / 32 / 25 / 22 38 / 33 / 28 / 25 38 / 32 / 25 / 22 39 / 34 / 28 / 25
Sound
Sound Power dBA 54 54 54 55
Outdoor Units ARXS20G2V1B ARXS25G2V1B
Casing Color Ivory White Ivory White
Type Hermetically Sealed Swing Type Hermetically Sealed Swing Type
Compressor Model 1YC23AFXD 1YC23AFXD
Motor Output W 600 600
Refrigerant Type FVC50K FVC50K
Oil Charge L 0.375 0.375
Type R-410A R-410A
Refrigerant
Charge kg 0.80 1.00
m³/min H 36.2 (1,278) 32.6 (1,151) 33.5 (1,183) 30.2 (1,066)
Airflow Rate
(cfm) SL 34.0 (1,201) 24.6 (869) 31.4 (1,109) 22.6 (798)
Type Propeller Propeller
Fan
Motor Output W 50 50
Running Current (Rated) A 2.67 - 2.55 - 2.45 3.50 - 3.35 - 3.21 3.06 - 2.93 - 2.81 4.14 - 3.96 - 3.80
Power Consumption (Rated) W 452 - 452 - 452 609 - 609 - 609 532 - 532 - 532 729 - 729 - 729
Power Factor % 76.9 - 77.1 - 76.9 79.1 - 79.0 - 79.0 79.0 - 78.9 - 78.9 80.0 - 80.0 - 79.9
Starting Current A 3.6 4.3
Dimensions (H × W × D) mm 550 × 765 × 285 550 × 765 × 285
Packaged Dimensions (H × W × D) mm 612 × 906 × 364 612 × 906 × 364
Weight kg 32 34
Gross Weight kg 37 40
Operation
H / SL dBA 46 / 43 47 / 44 46 / 43 47 / 44
Sound
Sound Power H dBA 61 62 61 62
Drawing No. 3D059732 3D059733

Note: „ The data are based on the conditions shown in the table below.
Conversion Formulae
Cooling Heating Piping Length
kcal/h = kW × 860
Indoor ; 27°CDB / 19°CWB Indoor ; 20°CDB Btu/h = kW × 3412
Outdoor ; 35°CDB / 24°CWB Outdoor ; 7°CDB / 6°CWB 5m
cfm = m³/min × 35.3

13 Specifications
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Specifications

50 Hz, 220 - 230 - 240 V

Indoor Units ATXS35G2V1B ATXS20G2V1B
Models ARXS35G2V1B ARXS20G3V1B
Outdoor Units
Cooling Heating Cooling Heating
kW 3.5 (1.4 ~ 4.0) 4.0 (1.4 ~ 5.2) 2.0 (1.3 ~ 2.8) 2.7 (1.3 ~ 4.3)
Capacity
Btu/h 11,900 (4,800 ~ 13,600) 13,600 (4,800 ~ 17,700) 6,800 (4,400 ~ 9,600) 9,200 (4,400 ~ 14,700)
Rated (Min. ~ Max.)
kcal/h 3,010 (1,200 ~ 3,440) 3,440 (1,200 ~ 4,470) 1,720 (1,120 ~ 2,410) 2,320 (1,120 ~ 3,700)
Moisture Removal L/h 1.9 — 0.9 —
Running Current (Rated) A 4.4 - 4.2 - 4.0 4.8 - 4.6 - 4.4 2.8 - 2.7 - 2.5 3.6 - 3.5 - 3.3
Power Consumption
Rated (Min. ~ Max.) W 870 (350 ~ 1,190) 960 (340 ~ 1,460) 470 (320 ~ 910) 630 (310 ~ 1,360)
Power Factor % 89.9 - 90.1 - 90.6 90.9 - 90.7 - 90.9 76.3 - 75.7 - 78.3 79.5 - 78.3 - 79.5
COP (Rated) W/W 4.02 (4.00 ~ 3.36) 4.17 (4.12 ~ 3.56) 4.26 (4.06 ~ 3.08) 4.29 (4.19 ~ 3.16)
Liquid mm φ 6.4 φ 6.4
Piping
Connections Gas mm φ 9.5 φ 9.5
Drain mm φ 18.0 φ 18.0
Heat Insulation Both Liquid and Gas Pipes Both Liquid and Gas Pipes
Max. lnterunit Piping Length m 20 20
Max. lnterunit Height Difference m 15 15
Chargeless m 10 10
Amount of Additional Charge of
g/m 20 20
Refrigerant
Indoor Units ATXS35G2V1B ATXS20G2V1B
Front Panel Color White White
H 10.4 (367) 10.6 (374) 9.4 (332) 9.9 (350)
m³/min M 7.7 (270) 8.5 (302) 7.4 (262) 8.2 (290)
Airflow Rate (cfm) L 4.8 (170) 6.4 (226) 5.5 (193) 6.5 (228)
SL 3.5 (125) 5.4 (191) 4.0 (141) 5.5 (193)
Type Cross Flow Fan Cross Flow Fan
Fan Motor Output W 23 23
Speed Steps 5 Steps, Quiet, Auto 5 Steps, Quiet, Auto
Air Direction Control Right, Left, Horizontal, Downward Right, Left, Horizontal, Downward
Air Filter Removable / Washable / Mildew Proof Removable / Washable / Mildew Proof
Running Current (Rated) A 0.12 - 0.12 - 0.11 0.13 - 0.13 - 0.12 0.09 - 0.08 - 0.08 0.10 - 0.10 - 0.09
Power Consumption (Rated) W 26 - 26 - 26 28 - 28 - 28 18 - 18 - 18 21 - 21 - 21
Power Factor % 98.5 - 94.2 - 98.5 97.9 - 93.6 - 97.2 90.9 - 97.8 - 93.8 95.5 - 91.3 - 97.2
Temperature Control Microcomputer Control Microcomputer Control
Dimensions (H × W × D) mm 295 × 800 × 215 295 × 800 × 215
Packaged Dimensions (H × W × D) mm 274 × 870 × 366 274 × 870 × 366
Weight kg 10 9
Gross Weight kg 13 13
Operation H / M / L / SL dBA 42 / 34 / 26 / 23 42 / 36 / 29 / 26 38 / 32 / 25 / 22 38 / 33 / 28 / 25
Sound
Sound Power dBA 58 58 54 54
Outdoor Units ARXS35G2V1B ARXS20G3V1B
Casing Color Ivory White Ivory White
Type Hermetically Sealed Swing Type Hermetically Sealed Swing Type
Compressor Model 1YC23AFXD 1YC23AEXD
Motor Output W 600 600
Refrigerant Type FVC50K FVC50K
Oil Charge L 0.375 0.375
Type R-410A R-410A
Refrigerant
Charge kg 1.20 0.80
m³/min H 36.0 (1,272) 30.2 (1,066) 36.2 (1,278) 30.6 (1,080)
Airflow Rate
(cfm) SL 31.4 (1,109) 22.6 (798) 32.7 (1,153) 28.5 (1,005)
Type Propeller Propeller
Fan
Motor Output W 50 23
Running Current (Rated) A 4.26 - 4.08 - 3.91 4.71 - 4.50 - 4.31 2.67 - 2.55 - 2.45 3.50 - 3.35 - 3.21
Power Consumption (Rated) W 844 - 844 - 844 932 - 932 - 932 452 - 452 - 452 609 - 609 - 609
Power Factor % 90.1 - 89.9 - 89.9 89.9 - 90.0 - 90.1 76.9 - 77.1 - 76.9 79.1 - 79.0 - 79.0
Starting Current A 4.8 3.6
Dimensions (H × W × D) mm 550 × 765 × 285 550 × 765 × 285
Packaged Dimensions (H × W × D) mm 612 × 906 × 364 612 × 906 × 364
Weight kg 34 32
Gross Weight kg 40 35
Operation
H / SL dBA 48 / 44 48 / 45 46 / 43 47 / 44
Sound
Sound Power H dBA 63 63 61 62
Drawing No. 3D059734 3D066475

Note: „ The data are based on the conditions shown in the table below.
Conversion Formulae
Cooling Heating Piping Length
kcal/h = kW × 860
Indoor ; 27°CDB / 19°CWB Indoor ; 20°CDB Btu/h = kW × 3412
Outdoor ; 35°CDB / 24°CWB Outdoor ; 7°CDB / 6°CWB 5m
cfm = m³/min × 35.3

Specifications 14
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Specifications SiENBE04-808_A

50 Hz, 220 - 230 - 240 V

Indoor Units ATXS25G2V1B ATXS35G2V1B
Models ARXS25G3V1B ARXS35G3V1B
Outdoor Units
Cooling Heating Cooling Heating
kW 2.5 (1.3 ~ 3.2) 3.4 (1.3 ~ 4.7) 3.5 (1.4 ~ 4.0) 4.0 (1.4 ~ 5.2)
Capacity
Btu/h 8,500 (4,400 ~ 10,900) 11,600 (4,400 ~ 16,000) 11,900 (4,800 ~ 13,600) 13,600 (4,800 ~ 17,700)
Rated (Min. ~ Max.)
kcal/h 2,150 (1,120 ~ 2,750) 2,920 (1,120 ~ 4,040) 3,010 (1,200 ~ 3,440) 3,440 (1,200 ~ 4,470)
Moisture Removal L/h 1.2 — 1.9 —
Running Current (Rated) A 3.2 - 3.0 - 2.9 4.3 - 4.1 - 3.9 4.4 - 4.2 - 4.0 4.8 - 4.6 - 4.4
Power Consumption
Rated (Min. ~ Max.) W 550 (320 ~ 810) 750 (310 ~ 1,290) 870 (350 ~ 1,190) 960 (340 ~ 1,460)
Power Factor % 78.1 - 79.7 - 79.0 79.3 - 79.5 - 80.1 89.9 - 90.1 - 90.6 90.9 - 90.7 - 90.9
COP (Rated) W/W 4.55 (4.06 ~ 3.95) 4.53 (4.19 ~ 3.64) 4.02 (4.00 ~ 3.36) 4.17 (4.12 ~ 3.56)
Liquid mm φ 6.4 φ 6.4
Piping
Connections Gas mm φ 9.5 φ 9.5
Drain mm φ 18.0 φ 18.0
Heat Insulation Both Liquid and Gas Pipes Both Liquid and Gas Pipes
Max. lnterunit Piping Length m 20 20
Max. lnterunit Height Difference m 15 15
Chargeless m 10 10
Amount of Additional Charge of
g/m 20 20
Refrigerant
Indoor Units ATXS25G2V1B ATXS35G2V1B
Front Panel Color White White
H 9.1 (321) 9.8 (346) 10.4 (367) 10.6 (374)
m³/min M 7.1 (252) 7.9 (280) 7.7 (270) 8.5 (302)
Airflow Rate (cfm) L 5.2 (182) 6.2 (217) 4.8 (170) 6.4 (226)
SL 3.7 (130) 5.2 (183) 3.5 (125) 5.4 (191)
Type Cross Flow Fan Cross Flow Fan
Fan Motor Output W 23 23
Speed Steps 5 Steps, Quiet, Auto 5 Steps, Quiet, Auto
Air Direction Control Right, Left, Horizontal, Downward Right, Left, Horizontal, Downward
Air Filter Removable / Washable / Mildew Proof Removable / Washable / Mildew Proof
Running Current (Rated) A 0.09 - 0.08 - 0.08 0.10 - 0.10 - 0.09 0.12 - 0.12 - 0.11 0.13 - 0.13 - 0.12
Power Consumption (Rated) W 18 - 18 - 18 21 - 21 - 21 26 - 26 - 26 28 - 28 - 28
Power Factor % 90.9 - 97.8 - 93.8 95.5 - 91.3 - 97.2 98.5 - 94.2 - 98.5 97.9 - 93.6 - 97.2
Temperature Control Microcomputer Control Microcomputer Control
Dimensions (H × W × D) mm 295 × 800 × 215 295 × 800 × 215
Packaged Dimensions (H × W × D) mm 274 × 870 × 366 274 × 870 × 366
Weight kg 9 10
Gross Weight kg 13 13
Operation H / M / L / SL dBA 38 / 32 / 25 / 22 39 / 34 / 28 / 25 42 / 34 / 26 / 23 42 / 36 / 29 / 26
Sound
Sound Power dBA 54 55 58 58
Outdoor Units ARXS25G3V1B ARXS35G3V1B
Casing Color Ivory White Ivory White
Type Hermetically Sealed Swing Type Hermetically Sealed Swing Type
Compressor Model 1YC23AEXD 1YC23AEXD
Motor Output W 600 600
Refrigerant Type FVC50K FVC50K
Oil Charge L 0.375 0.375
Type R-410A R-410A
Refrigerant
Charge kg 1.00 1.20
m³/min H 33.5 (1,183) 28.3 (999) 36.0 (1,272) 28.3 (999)
Airflow Rate
(cfm) SL 30.1 (1,064) 25.6 (905) 30.1 (1,064) 25.6 (905)
Type Propeller Propeller
Fan
Motor Output W 23 23
Running Current (Rated) A 3.06 - 2.93 - 2.81 4.14 - 3.96 - 3.80 4.26 - 4.08 - 3.91 4.71 - 4.50 - 4.31
Power Consumption (Rated) W 532 - 532 - 532 729 - 729 - 729 844 - 844 - 844 932 - 932 - 932
Power Factor % 79.0 - 78.9 - 78.9 80.0 - 80.0 - 79.9 90.1 - 89.9 - 89.9 89.9 - 90.0 - 90.1
Starting Current A 4.3 4.8
Dimensions (H × W × D) mm 550 × 765 × 285 550 × 765 × 285
Packaged Dimensions (H × W × D) mm 612 × 906 × 364 612 × 906 × 364
Weight kg 34 34
Gross Weight kg 38 38
Operation
H / SL dBA 46 / 43 47 / 44 48 / 44 48 / 45
Sound
Sound Power H dBA 61 62 63 63
Drawing No. 3D066476 3D066477

Note: „ The data are based on the conditions shown in the table below.
Conversion Formulae
Cooling Heating Piping Length
kcal/h = kW × 860
Indoor ; 27°CDB / 19°CWB Indoor ; 20°CDB Btu/h = kW × 3412
Outdoor ; 35°CDB / 24°CWB Outdoor ; 7°CDB / 6°CWB 5m
cfm = m³/min × 35.3

15 Specifications
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Specifications

50 Hz, 220 - 230 - 240 V

Indoor Units ATXS42G2V1B ATXS50G2V1B
Model ARXS42G2V1B ARXS50G2V1B
Outdoor Units
Cooling Heating Cooling Heating
kW 4.2 (1.7 ~ 5.0) 5.4 (1.7 ~ 6.0) 5.0 (1.7 ~ 5.3) 5.8 (1.7 ~ 6.5)
Capacity
Btu/h 14,300 (5,800 ~ 17,100) 18,400 (5,800 ~ 20,500) 17,100 (5,800 ~ 18,100) 19,800 (5,800 ~ 22,200)
Rated (Min. ~ Max.)
kcal/h 3,610 (1,460 ~ 4,300) 4,640 (1,460 ~ 5,160) 4,300 (1,460 ~ 4,560) 4,990 (1,460 ~ 5,590)
Moisture Removal L/h 2.3 — 2.8 —
Running Current
A 6.2 - 5.9 - 5.6 7.4 - 7.1 - 6.8 7.1 - 6.7 - 6.5 7.3 - 7.0 - 6.7
Rated
Power Consumption
W 1,220 (440 ~ 2,230) 1,470 (400 ~ 1,980) 1,520 (440 ~ 1,810) 1,570 (400 ~ 2,000)
Rated (Min. ~ Max.)
Power Factor % 89.4 - 89.9 - 90.8 90.3 - 90.0 - 90.1 97.3 - 98.6 - 97.4 97.8 - 97.5 - 97.6
COP
W/W 3.44 (3.86 ~ 2.24) 3.67 (4.25 ~ 3.03) 3.29 (3.86 ~ 2.93) 3.69 (4.25 ~ 3.25)
Rated (Min. ~ Max.)
Liquid mm φ 6.4 φ 6.4
Piping
Connections Gas mm φ 9.5 φ 12.7
Drain mm φ 18.0 φ 18.0
Heat Insulation Both Liquid and Gas Pipes Both Liquid and Gas Pipes
Max. Interunit Piping Length m 20 30
Max. Interunit Height Difference m 15 20
Chargeless m 10 10
Amount of Additional Charge of
Refrigerant g/m 20 20
Indoor Unit ATXS42G2V1B ATXS50G2V1B
Front Panel Color White White
H 9.1 (321) 11.2 (395) 10.2 (360) 11.0 (388)
m³/min M 7.7 (273) 9.4 (333) 8.6 (305) 9.3 (330)
Airflow Rate
(cfm) L 6.3 (221) 7.7 (271) 7.0 (246) 7.6 (267)
SL 5.4 (190) 6.8 (240) 6.0 (212) 6.7 (236)
Type Cross Flow Fan Cross Flow Fan
Fan Motor Output W 23 23
Speed Steps 5 Steps, Quiet, Auto 5 Steps, Quiet, Auto
Air Direction Control Right, Left, Horizontal, Downward Right, Left, Horizontal, Downward
Air Filter Removable / Washable / Mildew Proof Removable / Washable / Mildew Proof
Running Current (Rated) A 0.11 - 0.11 - 0.10 0.14 - 0.14 - 0.13 0.12 - 0.12 - 0.11 0.15 - 0.14 - 0.14
Power Consumption (Rated) W 24 - 24 - 24 30 - 30 - 30 26 - 26 - 26 32 - 32 - 32
Power Factor % 99.2 - 94.9 - 100.0 97.4 - 93.2 - 96.2 98.5 - 94.2 - 98.5 97.0 - 99.4 - 95.2
Temperature Control Microcomputer Control Microcomputer Control
Dimensions (H × W × D) mm 295 × 800 × 215 295 × 800 × 215
Packaged Dimensions (H × W × D) mm 274 × 870 × 366 274 × 870 × 366
Weight kg 10 10
Gross Weight kg 13 13
Operation
Sound H / M / L / SL dBA 42 / 38 / 33 / 30 42 / 38 / 33 / 30 43 / 39 / 34 / 31 44 / 39 / 34 / 31
Sound Power dBA 58 58 59 60
Outdoor Unit ARXS42G2V1B ARXS50G2V1B
Casing Color Ivory White Ivory White
Type Hermetically Sealed Swing Type Hermetically Sealed Swing Type
Compressor Model 2YC36BXD 2YC36BXD
Motor Output W 1,100 1,100
Refrigerant Model FVC50K FVC50K
Oil Charge L 0.65 0.65
Model R-410A R-410A
Refrigerant
Charge kg 1.30 1.70
HH 37.3 (1,317) 31.3 (1,107) 50.9 (1,797) 45.0 (1,589)
Airflow Rate m³/min (cfm)
SL 30.6 (1,079) 27.2 (959) 48.9 (1,727) 43.1 (1,522)
Type Propeller Propeller
Fan
Motor Output W 50 53
Running Current (Rated) A 6.04 - 5.78 - 5.54 7.27 - 6.96 - 6.67 6.93 - 6.63 - 6.35 7.13 - 6.82 - 6.54
Power Consumption (Rated) W 1,196 - 1,196 - 1,196 1,440 - 1,440 - 1,440 1,494 - 1,494 - 1,494 1,538 - 1,538 - 1,538
Power Factor (Rated) % 90.0 - 90.0 - 90.0 90.0 - 90.0 - 90.0 98.0 - 98.0 - 98.0 98.0 - 98.0 - 98.0
Starting Current A 7.4 7.3
Dimensions (H × W × D) mm 550 × 765 × 285 735 × 825 × 300
Packaged Dimensions (H × W × D) mm 612 × 906 × 364 797 × 960 × 390
Weight kg 39 48
Gross Weight kg 45 53
Operation H / SL dBA 48 / 44 48 / 45 48 / 44 48 / 45
Sound
Sound Power H dBA 63 63 62 62
Drawing No. 3D059735 3D059736

Note: „ The data are based on the conditions shown in the table below.
Conversion Formulae
Cooling Heating Piping Length
kcal/h = kW × 860
Indoor ; 27°CDB / 19°CWB Indoor ; 20°CDB Btu/h = kW × 3412
Outdoor ; 35°CDB / 24°CWB Outdoor ; 7°CDB / 6°CWB 5m
cfm = m³/min × 35.3

Specifications 16
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A

Part 3
Printed Circuit Board
Connector Wiring Diagram
1. Printed Circuit Board Connector Wiring Diagram..................................18
1.1 Indoor Unit..............................................................................................18
1.2 Outdoor Unit ...........................................................................................21

17 Printed Circuit Board Connector Wiring Diagram

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Printed Circuit Board Connector Wiring Diagram

1. Printed Circuit Board Connector Wiring Diagram

1.1 Indoor Unit
Connectors and PCB (1): Control PCB
Other Parts 1) S1 Connector for DC fan motor
2) S21 Connector for centralized control (HA)
3) S25 Connector for INTELLIGENT EYE sensor PCB
4) S32 Connector for indoor heat exchanger thermistor
5) S41 Connector for swing motors
6) S46 Connector for display PCB
7) S47 Connector for signal receiver PCB
8) H1, H2, H3, Connector for terminal board
FG
9) JA Address setting jumper
∗ Refer to page 289 for detail.
JB Fan speed setting when compressor stops for thermostat OFF
JC Power failure recovery function (auto-restart)
∗ Refer to page 292 for detail.
10) LED A LED for service monitor (green)
11) FU1 (F1U) Fuse (3.15 A, 250 V)
12) V1 Varistor

PCB (2): Signal Receiver PCB

1) S48 Connector for control PCB

PCB (3): Display PCB

1) S49 Connector for control PCB
2) SW1 (S1W) Forced operation ON / OFF button
3) LED1 (H1P) LED for operation (green)
4) LED2 (H2P) LED for timer (yellow)
5) LED3 (H3P) LED for INTELLIGENT EYE (green)
6) RTH1 (R1T) Room temperature thermistor

PCB (4): INTELLIGENT EYE Sensor PCB

1) S26 Connector for control PCB

Printed Circuit Board Connector Wiring Diagram 18

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Printed Circuit Board Connector Wiring Diagram SiENBE04-808_A

PCB Detail PCB (1): Control PCB

V1

H1

FU1

H2

FG

H3

LED A
S32

S1

S21
JB
JA
S41 JC

S47

S46 S25
2P206687-1

19 Printed Circuit Board Connector Wiring Diagram

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Printed Circuit Board Connector Wiring Diagram

PCB (2): Signal Receiver PCB PCB (3): Display PCB

RTH1 SW1

LED3 LED2 LED1

S48
3P210728-1

S49 3P210728-1

PCB (4): INTELLIGENT EYE Sensor PCB

S26

3EB86013-1

Printed Circuit Board Connector Wiring Diagram 20

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Printed Circuit Board Connector Wiring Diagram SiENBE04-808_A

1.2 Outdoor Unit

1.2.1 RK(X)S20-35G2V1B, ARXS20-35G2V1B
Connectors and PCB (1): Filter PCB
Other Parts 1) S11 Connector for main PCB
2) HL1, HN1, S Connector for terminal board
3) E1 Terminal for earth
4) E2 Connector for terminal board (earth)
5) HL2, HN2 Connector for main PCB
6) HR1 Connector for reactor
7) FU3 Fuse (20 A, 250 V)
8) V2, V3 Varistor

PCB (2): Main PCB

1) S10 Connector for filter PCB
2) S20 Connector for electronic expansion valve coil
3) S30 Connector for compressor
4) S40 Connector for overload protector
5) S50 Connector for magnetic relay
6) S70 Connector for fan motor
7) S80 Connector for four way valve coil
8) S90 Connector for thermistors
(outdoor temperature, outdoor heat exchanger, discharge pipe)
9) HL3, HN3 Connector for filter PCB
10)HR2 Connector for reactor
11)FU1, FU2 Fuse (3.15 A, 250 V)
12)LED A LED for service monitor (green)
13)V1 Varistor
14)J5 Jumper for improvement of defrost performance
∗ Refer to page 292 for detail.
15)J8 Jumper for facility setting
∗ Refer to page 291 for detail.

21 Printed Circuit Board Connector Wiring Diagram

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Printed Circuit Board Connector Wiring Diagram

PCB Detail PCB (1): Filter PCB

E1
E2

HR1 V3 HL1 HN1 S

V2

HN2
FU3

S11

HL2
S50
(on main PCB) 3P203203-1

PCB (2): Main PCB

J5 S10 J8 S90 S40 S50

S30
LED A

S70
FU1

HN3 FU2

HR2
HL3 S80 V1 S20
2P203198-1

Printed Circuit Board Connector Wiring Diagram 22

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Printed Circuit Board Connector Wiring Diagram SiENBE04-808_A

1.2.2 RK(X)S20-35G2V1B9, ARXS20-35G3V1B

Connectors and PCB (1): Filter PCB
Other Parts 1) S11 Connector for main PCB
2) AC1, AC2, S Connector for terminal board
3) E1, E2 Terminal for earth
4) HL2, HN2 Connector for main PCB
5) HR1 Connector for reactor
6) FU1 Fuse (3.15 A, 250 V)
7) FU3 Fuse (20 A, 250 V)
8) V2, V3 Varistor

PCB (2): Main PCB

1) S10 Connector for filter PCB
2) S20 Connector for electronic expansion valve coil
3) S40 Connector for overload protector
4) S50 Connector for magnetic relay
5) S70 Connector for fan motor
6) S80 Connector for four way valve coil
7) S90 Connector for thermistors
(outdoor temperature, outdoor heat exchanger, discharge pipe)
8) S100 Connector for forced operation button PCB
9) HL3, HN3 Connector for filter PCB
10)HR2 Connector for reactor
11)U, V, W Connector for compressor
12)FU2 Fuse (3.15 A, 250 V)
13)LED A LED for service monitor (green)
14)V1 Varistor
15)J4 Jumper for facility setting
∗ Refer to page 291 for detail.
16)J5 Jumper for improvement of defrost performance
∗ Refer to page 292 for detail.

PCB (3): Forced Operation Button PCB

1) S110 Connector for main PCB
2) SW1 Forced operation ON/OFF button

23 Printed Circuit Board Connector Wiring Diagram

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Printed Circuit Board Connector Wiring Diagram

PCB Detail PCB (1): Filter PCB

HR1 E1, E2
HN2
AC2
V2 V3 AC1
S11

FU3

HL2 FU1
S50
(on main PCB) 3P254234-1

PCB (2): Main PCB

U VW

S10 J5 J4 S90 LED A

S70

S40

HR2

S20

S80

HL3
V1

HN3

FU2 S100 S50 2P254206-1

PCB (3): Forced Operation Button PCB

SW1 S110

3P255755-1

Printed Circuit Board Connector Wiring Diagram 24

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Printed Circuit Board Connector Wiring Diagram SiENBE04-808_A

1.2.3 RK(X)S42G2V1B, ARXS42G2V1B

Connectors and PCB (1): Control PCB
Other Parts 1) S20 Connector for electronic expansion valve coil
2) S40 Connector for overload protector
3) S70 Connector for fan motor
4) S80 Connector for four way valve coil
5) S90 Connector for thermistors
(outdoor temperature, outdoor heat exchanger, discharge pipe)
6) U, V, W Connector for compressor
7) HL1, HN1, S Connector for terminal board
8) E (E2) Connector for earth
9) HR1, HR2 Connector for reactor
10) LED A LED for service monitor (green)
11) FU1, FU2 Fuse (3.15 A, 250 V)
12) FU3 Fuse (30 A, 250 V)
13) J4 Jumper for facility setting
∗ Refer to page 291 for detail.
14) J5 Jumper for improvement of defrost performance
∗ Refer to page 292 for detail.
15) V1, V3, V4 Varistor

25 Printed Circuit Board Connector Wiring Diagram

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Printed Circuit Board Connector Wiring Diagram

PCB Detail PCB (1): Control PCB

E (E2)

HN1 HL1

HR1
FU3 V4 V3 HR2
FU2

V1

FU1

LED A

S80 S20 S90 S40 S70 J5 J4

U, V, W

2P208173-1

Printed Circuit Board Connector Wiring Diagram 26

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Printed Circuit Board Connector Wiring Diagram SiENBE04-808_A

1.2.4 RK(X)S50G2V1B, ARXS50G2V1B

Connectors and PCB (1): Main PCB
Other Parts 1) S10 Connector for terminal board (indoor-outdoor transmission)
2) S20 Connector for electronic expansion valve coil
3) S40 Connector for overload protector
4) S51, S101 Connector for service monitor PCB
5) S70 Connector for fan motor
6) S80 Connector for four way valve coil
7) S90 Connector for thermistors
(outdoor temperature, outdoor heat exchanger, discharge pipe)
8) AC1, AC2 Connector for terminal board (power supply)
9) E1, E2 Connector for earth
10) HR1, HR2 Connector for reactor
11) U, V, W Connector for compressor
12)FU1 Fuse (30 A, 250 V)
13)FU2, FU3 Fuse (3.15 A, 250 V)
14)V2, V3, V5 Varistor
V6, V11

PCB (2): Service Monitor PCB

1) S52, S102 Connector for main PCB
2) LED A LED for service monitor (green)
3) SW1 Forced operation ON/OFF switch
4) SW4-B Switch for facility setting
∗ Refer to page 291 for detail
SW4-C Switch for improvement of defrost performance
∗ Refer to page 292 for detail.

27 Printed Circuit Board Connector Wiring Diagram

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Printed Circuit Board Connector Wiring Diagram

PCB Detail PCB (1): Main PCB

AC1 E1 E2 FU2 V3 V11

FU1

V2 HR1
V6
HR2
AC2

S10
S101
V5

S80

S90 S20 S40 S70 S51 FU3 W V U 2P169046-5

PCB (2): Service Monitor PCB

LED A S52

SW1 SW4-B SW4-C S102

3P169059-1

Printed Circuit Board Connector Wiring Diagram 28

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A

Part 4
Function and Control
1. Main Functions......................................................................................30
1.1 Frequency Principle................................................................................30
1.2 Airflow Direction Control.........................................................................32
1.3 Fan Speed Control for Indoor Units........................................................33
1.4 Program Dry Operation ..........................................................................34
1.5 Automatic Operation...............................................................................35
1.6 Thermostat Control.................................................................................36
1.7 NIGHT SET Mode ..................................................................................37
1.8 ECONO Operation .................................................................................38
1.9 2-Area INTELLIGENT EYE Operation ...................................................39
1.10 INTELLIGENT EYE Operation ...............................................................41
1.11 Inverter POWERFUL Operation .............................................................42
1.12 Other Functions......................................................................................43
2. Function of Thermistor ..........................................................................44
3. Control Specification .............................................................................45
3.1 Mode Hierarchy ......................................................................................45
3.2 Frequency Control..................................................................................46
3.3 Controls at Mode Changing / Start-up....................................................48
3.4 Discharge Pipe Temperature Control.....................................................50
3.5 Input Current Control..............................................................................51
3.6 Freeze-up Protection Control .................................................................53
3.7 Heating Peak-cut Control .......................................................................53
3.8 Outdoor Fan Control...............................................................................54
3.9 Liquid Compression Protection Function................................................54
3.10 Defrost Control .......................................................................................55
3.11 Electronic Expansion Valve Control .......................................................56
3.12 Malfunctions ...........................................................................................59
3.13 Forced Operation Mode .........................................................................60
3.14 Standby Electricity Saving......................................................................60

29 Function and Control

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Main Functions

1. Main Functions
Note: The definitions of temperatures are classified as following.

Š Room temperature: temperature of the lower part of the room

Š Set temperature: temperature set by remote control
Š Room thermistor temperature: temperature detected by room temperature thermistor
Š Target temperature: temperature determined by microcomputer

Target temperature

Room thermistor temperature

Set temperature
Room temperature

(R12321)

1.1 Frequency Principle

Main Control The compressor is frequency-controlled during normal operation. The target frequency is set by
Parameters the following 2 parameters coming from the operating indoor unit:
„ The load condition of the operating indoor unit
„ The difference between the room thermistor temperature and the target temperature

Additional The target frequency is adapted by additional parameters in the following cases:
Control „ Frequency restrictions
Parameters „ Initial settings
„ Forced cooling operation

Inverter Principle To regulate the capacity, a frequency control is needed. The inverter makes it possible to vary
the rotation speed of the compressor. The following table explains the conversion principle:
Phase Description
1 The supplied AC power source is converted into the DC power source for the present.
2 The DC power source is reconverted into the three phase AC power source with variable
frequency.
„ When the frequency increases, the rotation speed of the compressor increases resulting
in an increased refrigerant circulation. This leads to a higher amount of the heat
exchange per unit.
„ When the frequency decreases, the rotation speed of the compressor decreases
resulting in a decreased refrigerant circulation. This leads to a lower amount of the heat
exchange per unit.

Function and Control 30

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Main Functions SiENBE04-808_A

Drawing of The following drawing shows a schematic view of the inverter principle:
Inverter
Refrigerant circulation rate (high)

high speed
Amount of heat Amount of heat
exchanged air (large) high f exchanged air (large)

power

power
DC
AC
low f
Amount of heat Amount of heat
exchanged air (small) exchanged air (small)
low speed

freq= 50 Hz capacity=
constant 60 Hz freq=variable variable

Refrigerant circulation rate (low) (R2812)

Inverter Features The inverter provides the following features:

„ The regulating capacity can be changed according to the changes in the outdoor
temperature and cooling / heating load.
„ Quick heating and quick cooling
The compressor rotational speed is increased when starting the heating (or cooling). This
enables to reach the set temperature quickly.
„ Even during extreme cold weather, the high capacity is achieved. It is maintained even when
the outdoor temperature is 2°C.
„ Comfortable air conditioning
A fine adjustment is integrated to keep the room temperature constant.
„ Energy saving heating and cooling
Once the set temperature is reached, the energy saving operation enables to maintain the
room temperature at low power.

Frequency Limits The following functions regulate the minimum and maximum frequency:
Frequency Functions
Low „ Four way valve operation compensation. Refer to page 49.
High „ Compressor protection function. Refer to page 49.
„ Discharge pipe temperature control. Refer to page 50.
„ Input current control. Refer to page 51.
„ Freeze-up protection control. Refer to page 53.
„ Heating peak-cut control. Refer to page 53.
„ Defrost control. Refer to page 55.

Forced Cooling Refer to “Forced operation mode” on page 60 for detail.

Operation

31 Function and Control

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Main Functions

1.2 Airflow Direction Control

Power-Airflow The large flaps send a large volume of air downwards to the floor and provide an optimum
Dual Flaps control in cooling, dry, and heating mode.

Cooling / Dry Mode

During cooling or dry mode, the flap retracts into the indoor unit. Then, cool air can be blown far
and pervaded all over the room.

Heating Mode
During heating mode, the large flap directs airflow downwards to spread the warm air to the
entire room.

Wide-Angle The louvers, made of elastic synthetic resin, provide a wide range of airflow that guarantees a
Louvers comfortable air distribution.

Auto-Swing The following table explains the auto swing process for cooling, dry, heating, and fan :
Vertical Swing (up and down) Horizontal Swing
Cooling / Dry Heating Fan (right and left)

5°
15°
30° 30° 45 °
55°
30° 30° ° 45
50° 65° 65°
70° 80° (R11404)
(R12182) (R11402) (R11403)

3-D Airflow Alternative repetition of vertical and horizontal swing motions enables uniform air-conditioning of
the entire room. This function is effective for starting the air conditioner.

When the horizontal swing and vertical swing are both set to auto mode, the airflow becomes 3-
D airflow and the horizontal swing and vertical swing motions are alternated. The order of swing
motion is such that it turns counterclockwise, starting from the right upper point as viewed from
the front side of the indoor unit.
2 1

3 4
(R1024)

COMFORT The vertical swing flap is controlled not to blow the air directly on the person in the room.
AIRFLOW Cooling Heating
Operation
5°

(R11665)
80°
(R12181)

Function and Control 32

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Main Functions SiENBE04-808_A

1.3 Fan Speed Control for Indoor Units

Outline Phase control and fan speed control contains 9 steps: LLL, LL, SL, L, ML, M, MH, H, and HH.
The airflow rate can be automatically controlled depending on the difference between the room
thermistor temperature and the target temperature. This is done through phase control and Hall
IC control.

For more information about Hall IC, refer to the troubleshooting for fan motor on page 107.

Automatic Fan In automatic fan speed operation, the step “SL” is not available.
Speed Control Step Cooling Heating
LLL
LL
L
ML
M
MH
H
(R6834)
HH (POWERFUL) (R6833)

= The airflow rate is automatically controlled within this range when the FAN setting
button is set to automatic.

<Cooling>
The following drawing explains the principle of fan speed control for cooling.

MH*
fan speed +3°C
+2.5°C M
+2°C Difference between the room
+1.5°C ML thermistor temperature and
+1°C the target temperature
+0.5°C L

(R12317)

*In automatic fan speed operation, upper limit is at M tap in 30 minutes from the operation start.

<Heating>
On heating mode, the fan speed is regulated according to the indoor heat exchanger
temperature and the difference between the room thermistor temperature and the target
temperature.

Note: 1. During POWERFUL operation, fan rotates at H tap + 50 rpm.

2. Fan stops during defrost operation.
3. In time of thermostat OFF, the fan rotates at the following speed.
Cooling: The fan keeps rotating at the set tap.
Heating: The fan stops.

COMFORT „ The fan speed is controlled automatically within the following steps.
AIRFLOW Cooling: L tap – MH tap (same as AUTOMATIC)
Operation Heating: ML tap – Equivalent to ML tap – MH tap
„ The latest command has the priority between POWERFUL and COMFORT AIRFLOW.

33 Function and Control

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Main Functions

1.4 Program Dry Operation

Outline Program dry operation removes humidity while preventing the room temperature from lowering.
Since the microcomputer controls both the temperature and airflow rate, the temperature
adjustment and fan adjustment buttons are inoperable in this mode.

Detail The microcomputer automatically sets the temperature and airflow rate. The difference between
the room thermistor temperature at start-up and the target temperature is divided into two
zones. Then, the unit operates in the dry mode with an appropriate capacity for each zone to
maintain the temperature and humidity at a comfortable level.
Room thermistor Target temperature Thermostat OFF point Thermostat ON point
temperature at start-up X Y Z
X – 0.5ºC
24ºC or more X – 2.5ºC or
Y + 0.5ºC (zone B)
Room thermistor continues for 10 min.
23.5ºC temperature at start-up X – 0.5ºC
or
X – 2.0ºC
~

Y + 0.5ºC (zone B)
18ºC continues for 10 min.
X – 0.5ºC = 17.5ºC
17.5ºC or
18ºC X – 2.0ºC Y + 0.5ºC (zone B)
~

continues for 10 min.

Zone C = Thermostat ON Z

Zone B
Zone B

Y
+0.5ºC

Zone A = Thermostat OFF

(R11581)

Function and Control 34

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Main Functions SiENBE04-808_A

1.5 Automatic Operation

Outline Automatic Cooling / Heating Function
When the AUTO mode is selected with the remote control, the microcomputer automatically
determines the operation mode as cooling or heating according to the room temperature and
the set temperature at start-up, and automatically operates in that mode.
The unit automatically switches the operation mode to maintain the room temperature at the set
temperature.

Detail Ts: set temperature (set by remote control)

Tt: target temperature (determined by microcomputer)
Tr: room thermistor temperature (detected by room temperature thermistor)
C: correction value

1. The set temperature (Ts) determines the target temperature (Tt).

(Ts = 18 ~ 30°C).
2. The target temperature (Tt) is calculated as;
Tt = Ts + C
where C is the correction value.
C = 0°C
3. Thermostat ON/OFF point and mode switching point are as follows.
Tr means the room thermistor temperature.
1 Heating → Cooling switching point:
Tr ≥ Tt + 2.5°C
2 Cooling → Heating switching point:
Tr < Tt – 2.5°C
3 Thermostat ON/OFF point is the same as the ON/OFF point of cooling or heating
operation.
4. During initial operation
Tr ≥ Ts: Cooling operation
Tr < Ts: Heating operation

Cooling Operation
Target temperature + 2.5°C

Target temperature – 2.0°C Target temperature + 1.5°C

= Thermostat OFF = Thermostat OFF

Target temperature – 2.5°C

Heating Operation (R11893)

Ex: When the target temperature is 25°C

Cooling → 23°C: Thermostat OFF → 22°C: Switch to heating
Heating → 26.5°C: Thermostat OFF → 27.5°C: Switch to cooling

35 Function and Control

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Main Functions

1.6 Thermostat Control

Thermostat control is based on the difference between the room thermistor temperature and the
target temperature.

Thermostat OFF Condition

Š The temperature difference is in the zone A.

Thermostat ON Condition
Š The temperature difference returns to the zone C after being in the zone A.
Š The system resumes from defrost control in any zones except A.
Š The operation turns on in any zones except A.
Š The monitoring time has passed while the temperature difference is in the zone B.
(Cooling / Dry : 10 minutes, Heating : 10 seconds)

Cooling / Dry

Room thermistor temperature – target temperature

ON
Cooling : –0.5°C
C Dry : –0.5°C
–1.5°C
B
Cooling : –2.0°C
A Dry : –2.5 ~ –2.0°C

OFF
(R12319)

Heating

OFF Room thermistor temperature – target temperature

A
1.5°C
B
1.0°C
C
0°C

ON (R12320)

Function and Control 36

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Main Functions SiENBE04-808_A

1.7 NIGHT SET Mode

Outline When the OFF timer is set, the NIGHT SET Mode is automatically activated. The NIGHT SET
Mode keeps the airflow rate setting.

Detail The NIGHT SET Mode continues operation at the target temperature for the first one hour, then
automatically raises the target temperature slightly in the case of cooling, or lowers it slightly in
the case of heating. This prevents excessive cooling in summer and excessive heating in winter
to ensure comfortable sleeping conditions, and also conserves electricity.

Cooling

0.5°C
Target temperature
Operation stops
1 hour at the set hours
TIMER operation +0.5°C
NIGHT SET Mode ON temperature shift
(R10870)

Heating

Target temperature
2°C

TIMER operation 1 hour later

NIGHT SET Mode ON (R11813)

37 Function and Control

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Main Functions

1.8 ECONO Operation

Outline The "ECONO operation" reduces the maximum operating current and the power consumption.
This operation is particularly convenient for energy-saving-oriented users. It is also a major
bonus for those whose breaker capacities do not allow the use of multiple electrical devices and
air conditioners.
It is easily activated from the infrared remote control by pushing the ECONO button.

„ When this function is activated, the maximum capacity also decreases.

„ The remote control can send the ECONO command when the unit is in COOL, HEAT, DRY,
or AUTO operation. This function can only be set when the unit is running. Pressing the ON/
OFF button on the remote control cancels the function.
„ This function and POWERFUL operation cannot be used at the same time. The latest
command has the priority.

Maximum during normal operation

Power
consumption
and current Normal
Maximum during ECONO operation

ECONO Operation

Time
(R9288)

Detail „ When the ECONO command is valid, the input current has upper limit.
(Refer to "Input current control" on page 51.)

Function and Control 38

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Main Functions SiENBE04-808_A

1.9 2-Area INTELLIGENT EYE Operation

Outline For FTK(X)S Model
The following functions can be performed by a motion sensor (INTELLIGENT EYE).
1. Reduction of the capacity when there is nobody in the room in order to save electricity
(energy saving operation)
2. Dividing the room into plural areas and detecting existence of humans in each area.
Moving the airflow direction to the area with no human automatically to avoid direct airflow
on humans.

Detail 1. Detection method of INTELLIGENT EYE

If the sensor detects the outputs 10 times/sec.
sampling (20 msec) or more, it judges humans exist.
1 sec

High
Sensor output
Low
(Condition of 10 times or more output)

Detection signal ON
from the sensor OFF
(Continue 3 sec.)
(Human motion) If the detection signal (ON) continues 3 sec. or more,
it judges humans exist.
Human detection ON
signal OFF (R2821)

„ This sensor detects human motion by receiving infrared rays and displays the pulse wave
output.
„ The microcomputer in the indoor unit carries out a sampling every 20 msec. and if it detects
10 cycles of the wave in one second in total (corresponding to 20 msec.× 10 = 200 msec.),
and when the ON signal continues 3 sec., it judges human is in the room as the motion
signal is ON
„ 2-area INTELLIGENT EYE sensor is divided into 2 areas and detects humans in each area.

„ Image of 2-area INTELLIGENT EYE

Wall

Top view
Indoor unit

Area B Area A

· A microcomputer judges human existence by

the sensor signal from each area A and B.
(R12276)

39 Function and Control

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Main Functions

2. Motions (for example: in cooling)

within 20
minutes 20 min. 20 min.

Human detection ON
signal OFF
RESET.
(From area A or B)

Target temperature

INTELLIGENT EYE ON
lamp OFF

Remote control ON
INTELLIGENT EYE
button OFF

Operation ON
OFF

Set speed Set speed

Fan speed (H1)

OFF
(R12183)

„ When the microcomputer does not have a signal from the sensor in 20 minutes, it judges
that nobody is in the room and operates the unit in temperature shifted from the target
temperature. (Cooling / Dry : 2°C higher, Heating : 2°C lower, Auto : according to the
operation mode at that time.)
H1 In case of FAN mode, the fan speed reduces by 60 rpm.

3. Airflow direction in 2-area INTELLIGENT EYE operation

„ Detection method: The opposite area of detected area is set as the target direction.

Wall

Top view
Indoor unit

Left Right

Human

Area B Area A
(R3853)

1. Detection signal ON in both area A and B: Shift the airflow direction to area B (left side)
2. Detection signal ON in area A: Shift the airflow direction to area B (left side)
3. Detection signal ON in area B: Shift the airflow direction to area A (right side)
4. Detection signal OFF in both area A and B: No change

* When the detection signal is OFF for 20 minutes in both area A and B, the unit starts energy
saving operation.

Others „ For dry operation, you cannot set the temperature with remote control, but internally the
target temperature is shifted by 2°C.

Function and Control 40

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Main Functions SiENBE04-808_A

1.10 INTELLIGENT EYE Operation

Outline For ATXS Model
This is the function that detects existence of humans in the room by a motion sensor
(INTELLIGENT EYE) and reduces the capacity when there is nobody in the room in order to
save electricity.

Detail 1. Detection method by INTELLIGENT EYE

If the sensor detects the outputs
10 times/sec. or more, it judges
humans exist.
sampling (20 msec.)
1 sec.

High
Sensor output
Low

(Human motion)

Human detection ON
signal OFF (R2821)

„ This sensor detects human motion by receiving infrared rays and displays the pulse wave
output.
„ The microcomputer in the indoor unit carries out a sampling every 20 msec. and if it detects
10 cycles of the wave in one second in total (corresponding to 20 msec. × 10 = 200 msec.), it
judges human is in the room as the motion signal is ON.

2. Motions (for example: in cooling)

within 20
minutes. 20 min. 20 min.

Human detection ON
signal OFF
RESET.

Target temperature

Remote control ON
INTELLIGENT OFF
EYE button
Operation ON
OFF
Set speed Set speed
Set speed – 60 rpm
Fan speed (H1)
OFF
(R11814)

„ When the microcomputer does not have a signal from the sensor in 20 minutes, it judges
that nobody is in the room and operates the unit in the temperature shifted from the target
temperature. (Cooling / Dry : 2°C higher, Heating : 2°C lower, Auto : according to the
operation mode at that time.)
H1 In case of FAN mode, the fan speed reduces by 60 rpm.

Others „ For dry operation, you cannot set the temperature with remote control, but internally the
target temperature is shifted by 2°C.

41 Function and Control

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Main Functions

1.11 Inverter POWERFUL Operation

Outline In order to exploit the cooling and heating capacity to full extent, operate the air conditioner by
increasing the indoor fan rotating speed and the compressor frequency.

Detail When POWERFUL button is pressed, the fan speed and target temperature are converted to
the following states for 20 minutes.
Operation mode Fan speed Target temperature
COOL H tap + 50 rpm 18°C
DRY Dry rotating speed + 50 rpm Lowered by 2.5°C
HEAT H tap + 50 rpm 31°C
FAN H tap + 50 rpm —
AUTO Same as cooling / heating in The target temperature is
POWERFUL operation kept unchanged.

Ex.) : POWERFUL operation in cooling mode.

Target temp.
It should be the lower limit of
cooling temperature.

18°C

POWERFUL It counts 20 minutes. also

ON in the remote control.
POWERFUL
OFF
Fan Ending condition: "or" in 1 to 3
50 rpm 1. After the lapse of 20 minutes.
H tap 2. Operation OFF
20 minutes 3. POWERFUL operation is OFF.
Set tap

(R7096)

Function and Control 42

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Main Functions SiENBE04-808_A

1.12 Other Functions

1.12.1 Hot-Start Function
In order to prevent the cold air blast that normally comes when heating operation is started, the
temperature of the indoor heat exchanger is detected, and either the airflow is stopped or is
made very weak thereby carrying out comfortable heating of the room.
*The cold air blast is also prevented using a similar control when the defrosting operation is
started or when the thermostat is turned ON.

1.12.2 Signal Receiving Sign

When the indoor unit receives a signal from the remote control, the unit emits a signal receiving
sound.

1.12.3 Indoor Unit ON/OFF Button

An ON/OFF button is provided on the display of the unit.
„ Press this button once to start operation. Press once again to stop it.
„ This button is useful when the remote control is missing or the battery has run out.
„ The operation mode refers to the following table.
Mode Temperature setting Airflow rate
Cooling Only COOL 22ºC Automatic
Heat Pump AUTO 25ºC Automatic

ON/OFF button

(R8302)

<Forced operation mode>

Forced operation mode can be started by pressing the ON/OFF button for 5 to 9 seconds while
the unit is not operating.
Refer to "Forced operation mode" on page 60 for detail.

Note: When the ON/OFF button is pressed for 10 seconds or more, the forced operation is stopped.

1.12.4 Titanium Apatite Photocatalytic Air-Purifying Filter

This filter combines the Air-Purifying Filter and Titanium Apatite Photocatalytic Deodorizing
Filter as a single highly effective filter. The filter traps microscopic particles, decompose odors
and even deactivates bacteria and viruses. It lasts for 3 years without replacement if washed
about once every 6 months.

1.12.5 Auto-restart Function

Even if a power failure (including one for just a moment) occurs during the operation, the
operation restarts automatically when the power is restored in the same condition as before the
power failure.

Note: It takes 3 minutes to restart the operation because the 3-minute standby function is activated.

1.12.6 WEEKLY TIMER Operation

Up to 4 timer settings can be saved for each day of the week (up to 28 settings in total).
Those 3 items of “ON/OFF”, “temperature” and “time” can be set.

Refer to “WEEKLY TIMER Operation” on page 76 for detail.

43 Function and Control

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Function of Thermistor

2. Function of Thermistor
A

Four way valve

B Compressor (R11582)

A Outdoor Heat 1. The outdoor heat exchanger thermistor is used for controlling target discharge pipe
Exchanger temperature. The system sets the target discharge pipe temperature according to the
Thermistor outdoor and indoor heat exchanger temperature, and controls the electronic expansion valve
opening so that the target discharge pipe temperature can be obtained.
2. In cooling operation, the outdoor heat exchanger thermistor is used for detecting
disconnection of the discharge pipe thermistor. When the discharge pipe temperature
becomes lower than the outdoor heat exchanger temperature, the discharge pipe thermistor
is judged as disconnected.
3. In cooling operation, the outdoor heat exchanger thermistor is used for high pressure
protection.

B Discharge 1. The discharge pipe thermistor is used for controlling discharge pipe temperature. If the
Pipe Thermistor discharge pipe temperature (used in place of the inner temperature of the compressor) rises
abnormally, the operating frequency becomes lower or the operation halts.
2. The discharge pipe thermistor is used for detecting disconnection of the discharge pipe
thermistor.

C Indoor Heat 1. The indoor heat exchanger thermistor is used for controlling target discharge pipe
Exchanger temperature. The system sets the target discharge pipe temperature according to the
Thermistor outdoor and indoor heat exchanger temperature, and controls the electronic expansion valve
opening so that the target discharge pipe temperature can be obtained.
2. In cooling operation, the indoor heat exchanger thermistor is used for freeze-up protection
control. If the indoor heat exchanger temperature drops abnormally, the operating frequency
becomes lower or the operation halts.
3. In heating operation, the indoor heat exchanger thermistor is used for detecting
disconnection of the discharge pipe thermistor. When the discharge pipe temperature
becomes lower than the indoor heat exchanger temperature, the discharge pipe thermistor
is judged as disconnected.

Function and Control 44

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Control Specification SiENBE04-808_A

3. Control Specification
3.1 Mode Hierarchy
Outline There are two modes; the one is the normal operation mode and the other is the forced
operation mode for installation and providing service.

Detail For Cooling Only Model

There are following modes; stop and cooling (including drying).
Air conditioner control mode
Forced operating mode
Forced cooling (for Pump Down Operation)
Normal operating mode
Cooling
Stop mode (except for cooling modes by indoor command)
Preheating operation
During C (capacitor) is discharging
Stop
(R2830)

For Heat Pump Model

There are following modes; stop, cooling (includes drying), heating (include defrosting)
Air conditioner control mode
Forced operating mode
Forced cooling (for Pump Down Operation)
Normal operating mode
Cooling
Heating
Defrosting
Stop mode (except for cooling/heating modes by indoor command)
Preheating operation
During C (capacitor) is discharging
Stop
(R2829)

Note: Unless specified otherwise, an indoor dry operation command is regarded as cooling operation.

45 Function and Control

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Control Specification

3.2 Frequency Control

Outline Frequency is determined according to the difference between the room thermistor temperature
and the target temperature.
The function is explained as follows.
1. How to determine frequency
2. Frequency command from the indoor unit (Difference between the room thermistor
temperature and the target temperature)
3. Frequency initial setting
4. PI control
When the shift of the frequency is less than zero (ΔF<0) by PI control,
the target frequency is used as the command frequency.

Drooping function
Input current control, etc.

Upper limit frequency Upper limit function

FMAX Compressor protection function

Command frequency Limit frequency Skip control Target frequency

Lower limit frequency Lower limit function

Initial frequency
PI control Defrost FMIN Four way valve operating compensation (∗), etc.
control (∗)
(∗): only for heat pump model
(R11592)

Detail How to Determine Frequency

The compressor’s frequency is determined by taking the following steps.

For Cooling Only Model

1. Determine command frequency
Š Command frequency is determined in the following order of priority.
1. Forced cooling
2. Indoor frequency command

2. Determine upper limit frequency

Š The minimum value is set as an upper limit frequency among the frequency upper limits of
the following functions:
Compressor protection, input current, discharge pipe temperature, freeze-up protection.

3. Determine lower limit frequency

Š The maximum value is set as an lower limit frequency among the frequency lower limits of
the following function:
Pressure difference upkeep.

4. Determine prohibited frequency

Š There is a certain prohibited frequency such as a power supply frequency.

For Heat Pump Model

1. Determine command frequency
Š Command frequency is determined in the following order of priority.
1. Limiting defrost control time
2. Forced cooling
3. Indoor frequency command

Function and Control 46

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Control Specification SiENBE04-808_A

2. Determine upper limit frequency

Š The minimum value is set as an upper limit frequency among the frequency upper limits of
the following functions:
Compressor protection, input current, discharge pipe temperature, heating peak-cut, freeze-
up protection, defrost.

3. Determine lower limit frequency

Š The maximum value is set as an lower limit frequency among the frequency lower limits of
the following functions:
Four way valve operation compensation, draft prevention, pressure difference upkeep.

4. Determine prohibited frequency

Š There is a certain prohibited frequency such as a power supply frequency.

Indoor Frequency Command (ΔD signal)

The difference between the room thermistor temperature and the target temperature is taken as
the “ΔD signal” and is used for frequency command.
Temperature ΔD Temperature ΔD Temperature ΔD Temperature ΔD
difference signal difference signal difference signal difference signal
–2.0 ∗Th 0 4 2.0 8 4.0 C
OFF
–1.5 1 0.5 5 2.5 9 4.5 D
–1.0 2 1.0 6 3.0 A 5.0 E
–0.5 3 1.5 7 3.5 B 5.5 F
∗Th OFF = Thermostat OFF

Frequency Initial Setting

<Outline>
When starting the compressor, the frequency is initialized according to the ΔD value and the Q
value of the indoor unit.
Q value: Indoor unit output determined from indoor unit volume, airflow rate and other factors.

PI Control (Determine Frequency Up / Down by ΔD Signal)

1. P control
The ΔD value is calculated in each sampling time (15 ~ 20 seconds), and the frequency is
adjusted according to its difference from the frequency previously calculated.

2. I control
If the operating frequency does not change for more than a certain fixed time, the frequency
is adjusted according to the ΔD value.
When the ΔD value is small, the frequency is lowered.
When the ΔD value is large, the frequency is increased.

3. Frequency management when other controls are functioning

Š When frequency is drooping;
Frequency management is carried out only when the frequency droops.
Š For limiting lower limit
Frequency management is carried out only when the frequency rises.

4. Upper and lower limit of frequency by PI control

The frequency upper and lower limits are set according to the command on indoor unit.
When the indoor or outdoor unit quiet operation command comes from the indoor unit, the
upper limit frequency is lowered than the usual setting.

47 Function and Control

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Control Specification

3.3 Controls at Mode Changing / Start-up

3.3.1 Preheating Operation
Outline The inverter operation in open phase starts with the conditions of the preheating command from
the indoor unit, the outdoor temperature, and the discharge pipe temperature.

Detail „ RK(X)S20-42G2V1B, ARXS20-42G2V1B

ON Condition
Š When the discharge pipe temperature is below 10ºC, the inverter operation in open phase
starts.
OFF Condition
Š When the discharge pipe temperature is higher than 12ºC, the inverter operation in open
phase stops.

„ RK(X)S20-35G2V1B9, ARXS20-35G3V1B
Outdoor temperature ≥ 7°C → Control A
Outdoor temperature < 7°C → Control B

Control A
Š ON condition
Discharge pipe temperature < 10°C
Š OFF condition
Discharge pipe temperature > 12°C
Radiation fin temperature ≥ 90°C

Control B
Š ON condition
Discharge pipe temperature < 20°C
Š OFF condition
Discharge pipe temperature > 22°C
Radiation fin temperature ≥ 90°C

„ RK(X)S50G2V1B, ARXS50G2V1B
Outdoor temperature ≥ 10°C → Control A
Outdoor temperature < 10°C → Control B

Control A
Š ON condition
Discharge pipe temperature < 6°C
Š OFF condition
Discharge pipe temperature > 8°C
Radiation fin temperature ≥ 90°C

Control B
Š ON condition
Discharge pipe temperature < 10.5°C
Š OFF condition
Discharge pipe temperature > 12°C
Radiation fin temperature ≥ 90°C

Function and Control 48

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Control Specification SiENBE04-808_A

3.3.2 Four Way Valve Switching

Outline In heating operation, current is conducted, and in cooling and defrosting, current is not
conducted. In order to eliminate the switching sound when the heating is stopped, as the four
way valve coil switches from ON to OFF, the OFF delay switch of the four way valve is carried
out after the operation stopped.

Detail OFF delay switch of four way valve:

The four way valve coil is energized for 150 ~ 160 seconds after the operation is stopped.

3.3.3 Four Way Valve Operation Compensation

Outline At the beginning of the operation as the four way valve is switched, the differential pressure to
activate the four way valve is acquired by having output frequency which is more than a certain
fixed frequency, for a certain fixed time.

Detail Starting Conditions

1. When starting compressor for heating.
2. When the operation mode changes to cooling from heating.
3. When starting compressor for defrosting or resetting.
4. When starting compressor for the first time after the reset with the power is ON.
5. When starting compressor for heating next to the suspension of defrosting.
6. When starting compressor next to the fault of switching over cooling / heating.
Set the lower limit frequency Hz for seconds with any conditions 1 through 6 above.

20/25/35 class 42 class 50 class

Cooling Heating Cooling Heating Cooling Heating
(Hz) 68 66 48 54 48 48
(seconds) 45 60 70

3.3.4 3-minute Standby

Turning on the compressor is prohibited for 3 minutes after turning it off.
(Except when defrosting.)

3.3.5 Compressor Protection Function

When turning the compressor from OFF to ON, the upper limit of frequency is set as follows.
(The function is not activated when defrosting.)
(Hz)
Frequency

FCG3
FCG2
FCG1
(sec.)
TCG1 TCG2 TCG3 Time
(R10540)

20/25/35 class 42 class 50 class Unit

FCG 1 48 55 55
FCG 2 64 70 70 Hz
FCG 3 88 85 85
TCG 1 240 150 120
TCG 2 360 180 200 seconds
TCG 3 180 300 470

49 Function and Control

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Control Specification

3.4 Discharge Pipe Temperature Control

Outline The discharge pipe temperature is used as the internal temperature of the compressor. If the
discharge pipe temperature rises above a certain level, the upper limit of frequency is set to
keep this temperature from going up further.

Detail

Stop zone
°C

°C
Drooping zone
°C
Keep zone
°C
Up zone
°C
Reset zone
Discharge pipe (R4270)
temperature

Zone Control
Stop zone When the temperature reaches the stop zone, the compressor stops.
Drooping zone The timer starts, and the frequency is drooping.
Keep zone The upper limit of frequency is kept.
Up zone The upper limit of frequency is increased.
Reset zone The upper limit of frequency is canceled.

20/25/35 class 42 class 50 class

(ºC) 110 110 110
(ºC) 105 103 103
(ºC) 101 102 101.5
(ºC) 99 100 100
(ºC) 97 95 95

Function and Control 50

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Control Specification SiENBE04-808_A

3.5 Input Current Control

Outline The microcomputer calculates the input current during the compressor is running, and sets the
frequency upper limit from the input current.
In case of heat pump model, this control which is the upper limit control of the frequency takes
priority to the lower limit of control of four way valve operation compensation.

Detail
Compressor Stop

Stop Zone

Drooping Zone

Keep Zone

Reset Zone

(R4304)

Frequency control in each zone

Stop zone
Š After 2.5 seconds in this zone, the compressor is stopped.
Drooping zone
Š The upper limit of the compressor frequency is defined as operation frequency – 2 Hz.
Š After this, the output frequency is pulled down by 2 Hz every second until it reaches the keep
zone.
Keep zone
Š The present maximum frequency goes on.
Reset zone
Š Limit of the frequency is canceled.

„ RK(X)S20-50G2V1B, ARXS20-50G2V1B
20 class 25 class 35 class
Cooling Heating Cooling Heating Cooling Heating
(A) 9.25 9.25 9.25
(A) Normal mode 6.0 7.5 6.5 7.5 7.25 8.25
ECONO mode 3.25 3.25 3.25
(A) Normal mode 5.25 6.75 5.75 6.75 6.5 7.5
ECONO mode 2.5 2.5 2.5

42 class 50 class
Cooling Heating Cooling Heating
(A) 14.25 20.0
(A) Normal mode 10.0 10.5 10.0 15.0
ECONO mode 4.5 7.0 10.5
(A) Normal mode 9.0 9.5 9.0 14.0
ECONO mode 3.5 6.0 9.5

51 Function and Control

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Control Specification

„ RK(X)S20-35G2V1B9, ARXS20-35G3V1B
20 class 25 class 35 class
Cooling Heating Cooling Heating Cooling Heating
(A) 9.25 9.25 9.25
(A) Normal mode 6.0 7.5 6.25 7.5 8.25
ECONO mode 3.25 3.25 3.25
(A) Normal mode 5.25 6.75 5.5 6.75 7.5
ECONO mode 2.5 2.5 2.5

Limitation of current drooping and stop value according to the outdoor temperature
Š The current droops when outdoor temperature becomes higher than a certain level
(depending on the model).

Function and Control 52

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Control Specification SiENBE04-808_A

3.6 Freeze-up Protection Control

Outline During cooling operation, the signal sent from the indoor unit controls the operating frequency
limitation and prevents freezing of the indoor heat exchanger. (The signal from the indoor unit is
divided into zones.)

Detail The operating frequency limitation is judged with the indoor heat exchanger temperature.

(Reference) Indoor heat exchanger

thermistor temperature

13°C

Reset zone
9.5°C
Up zone
7.5°C

Keep zone
5.5°C
Drooping zone
0°C
Stop zone
(R4561)

3.7 Heating Peak-cut Control

Outline During heating operation, the indoor heat exchanger temperature determines the frequency
upper limit to prevent abnormal high pressure.

Detail

Stop zone
°C

°C
Drooping zone
°C
Keep zone
°C
Up zone
°C
Indoor heat exchanger Reset zone
thermistor temperature (R11819)

Zone Control
Stop zone When the temperature reaches the stop zone, the compressor stops.
Drooping zone The timer starts, and the frequency is drooping.
Keep zone The upper limit of frequency is kept.
Up zone The upper limit of frequency is increased.
Reset zone The upper limit of frequency is canceled.

20/25/35 class 42 class 50 class

(°C) 65 65 65
(°C) 56 55 56
(°C) 53 54 55
(°C) 51 52 53
(°C) 46 50 51

53 Function and Control

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Control Specification

3.8 Outdoor Fan Control

1. Fan OFF delay when stopped
The outdoor fan is turned OFF 60 seconds after the compressor stops.

2. Fan ON control to cool down the electrical box

The outdoor fan is turned ON when the electrical box temperature is high while the compressor
is OFF.

3. Fan OFF control while defrosting

The outdoor fan is turned OFF while defrosting.

4. Fan ON/OFF control when operation starts / stops

The outdoor fan is turned ON when the operation starts. The outdoor fan is turned OFF when
the operation stops.

5. Fan control while forced operation

The outdoor fan is controlled as well as normal operation while the forced operation.

6. Fan speed control while indoor / outdoor quiet operation

The rotation speed of the outdoor fan is reduced by the command of the indoor/outdoor quiet
operation.

7. Fan control for POWERFUL operation

The rotation speed of the outdoor fan is increased while the POWERFUL operation.

8. Fan speed control for pressure difference upkeep

The rotation speed of the outdoor fan is controlled for keeping the pressure difference while
cooling with low outdoor temperature.
♦ When the pressure difference is small, the rotation speed of the outdoor fan is reduced.
♦ When the pressure difference is large, the rotation speed of the outdoor fan is increased.

3.9 Liquid Compression Protection Function

Outline In order to obtain the dependability of the compressor, the compressor is stopped according to
the outdoor temperature and temperature of the outdoor heat exchanger.

Detail „ Operation stops depending on the outdoor temperature

Compressor turns off under the conditions that the system is in cooling operation and outdoor
temperature is below –12°C.

Function and Control 54

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Control Specification SiENBE04-808_A

3.10 Defrost Control

Outline Defrosting is carried out by the cooling cycle (reverse cycle). The defrosting time or outdoor
heat exchanger temperature must be more than a certain value to finish.

Detail Conditions for Starting Defrost

„ The starting conditions is determined with the outdoor temperature and the outdoor heat
exchanger temperature.
„ The system is in heating operation.
„ The compressor operates for 6 minutes.
„ More than minutes of accumulated time pass since the start of the operation, or ending
the previous defrosting.

Conditions for Canceling Defrost

The judgment is made with outdoor heat exchanger temperature. (4°C ~ 18°C)

Hz
Hz
PI control
Frequency
0Hz
sec.
sec. sec. sec.

ON
Compressor OFF

ON
Four way valve OFF

5 sec. 5 sec.
ON
Fan OFF

pulse pulse
Electronic expansion
pulse
valve opening
Initial opening
(R12211)

20 class 25/35 class 42 class 50 class

(minutes) 28 28 30 44
(Hz) 76 76 48 55
(Hz) 86 86 70 90
(seconds) 50 50 60 60
(seconds) 60 60 120 120
(seconds) 600 600 650 460
(seconds) 50 60 30 30
(pulse) 450 450 450 450
(pulse) 350 350 350 450
(pulse) 450 450 450 450

55 Function and Control

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Control Specification

3.11 Electronic Expansion Valve Control

Outline The following items are included in the electronic expansion valve control.
Electronic expansion valve is fully closed
1. Electronic expansion valve is fully closed when turning on the power.
2. Pressure equalizing control
Open Control
1. Electronic expansion valve control when starting operation
2. Electronic expansion valve control when frequency changed
3. Electronic expansion valve control for defrosting
4. Electronic expansion valve control when the discharge pipe temperature is abnormally high
5. Electronic expansion valve control when the discharge pipe thermistor is disconnected
Feedback Control
1. Discharge pipe temperature control

Detail The followings are the examples of control which function in each mode by the electronic
expansion valve control.

Control for abnormally high discharge

Control when frequency changed

pipe temperature
Operation pattern
 : function
X : not function
When power is turned ON

Fully closed when power is turned ON X X

Cooling operation
Open control when starting X 

(Control of target discharge pipe  

temperature)

Stop
Pressure equalizing control X X

Heating operation
Open control when starting X 

(Control of target discharge pipe  

temperature)

Pressure equalizing control X X

Stop
Open control when starting X X

Heating operation
Continue X 

Control of discharge pipe

thermistor disconnection X X

Stop Pressure equalizing control X X

(R2833)

Function and Control 56

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Control Specification SiENBE04-808_A

3.11.1 Fully Closing with Power ON

The electronic expansion valve is initialized when turning on the power. The opening position is
set and the pressure equalization is developed.

3.11.2 Pressure Equalization Control

When the compressor is stopped, the pressure equalization control is activated. The electronic
expansion valve opens, and develops the pressure equalization.

3.11.3 Opening Limit

Outline A maximum and minimum opening of the electronic expansion valve are limited.

Detail 20/25/35 class 42 class 50 class

Maximum opening (pulse) 480 450 480
Minimum opening (pulse) 52 60 54

The electronic expansion valve is fully closed when cooling operation stops, and is opened at
fixed degree during defrosting.

3.11.4 Starting Operation Control

The electronic expansion valve opening is controlled when the operation starts, and prevents
the superheating or liquid compression.

3.11.5 High Discharge Pipe Temperature

When the compressor is operating, if the discharge pipe temperature exceeds a certain value,
the electronic expansion valve opens and the refrigerant runs to the low pressure side. This
procedure lowers the discharge pipe temperature.

3.11.6 Disconnection of the Discharge Pipe Thermistor

Outline The disconnection of the discharge pipe thermistor is detected by comparing the discharge pipe
temperature with the condensation temperature. If the discharge pipe thermistor is
disconnected, the electronic expansion valve opens according to the outdoor temperature and
the operation frequency, and operates for a specified time, and then stops.
After 3 minutes of waiting, the operation restarts and checks if the discharge pipe thermistor is
disconnected. If the discharge pipe thermistor is disconnected, the system stops after operating
for a specified time.
If the disconnection is detected 4 ~ 5 times (depending on the model) in succession, then the
system is shut down. When the compressor runs for 60 minutes without any error, the error
counter is reset.

57 Function and Control

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Control Specification

Detail When the starting control (cooling : seconds, heating : seconds) finishes, the detection
timer for disconnection of the discharge pipe thermistor ( seconds) starts. When the timer is
over, the following adjustment is made.
1. When the operation mode is cooling
When the following condition is fulfilled, the discharge pipe thermistor disconnection is
ascertained.
Discharge pipe temperature + 6°C < outdoor heat exchanger temperature
2. When the operation mode is heating
When the following condition is fulfilled, the discharge pipe thermistor disconnection is
ascertained.
Discharge pipe temperature + 6°C < indoor heat exchanger temperature
20/25/35 class 42 class 50 class
(seconds) 10 10 10
(seconds) 120 30 30
(seconds) 810 630 630

Adjustment when the thermistor is disconnected

When the disconnection is ascertained, the compressor continues operation for 9 minutes and
then stops.
When the compressor stops repeatedly, the system is shut down.

3.11.7 Control when frequency is changed

When the target discharge pipe temperature control is active, if the target frequency is changed
for a specified value in a certain time period, the target discharge pipe temperature control is
canceled and the target opening of the electronic expansion valve is changed according to the
shift.

3.11.8 Target Discharge Pipe Temperature Control

The target discharge pipe temperature is obtained from the indoor and outdoor heat exchanger
temperature, and the electronic expansion valve opening is adjusted so that the actual
discharge pipe temperature becomes close to the target discharge pipe temperature. (Indirect
SH (superheating) control using the discharge pipe temperature)

SC The target discharge pipe

(Supercool) temperature is set as to become the
aiming SH.

The inclination does not change

depending on the operating condition.
SH
(Superheat) (R10626)

The electronic expansion valve opening and the target discharge pipe temperature are adjusted
every 20 seconds. The target discharge pipe temperature is controlled by indoor heat
exchanger temperature and outdoor heat exchanger temperature. The opening degree of the
electronic expansion valve is controlled by followings.
♦ Target discharge pipe temperature
♦ Actual discharge pipe temperature
♦ Previous discharge pipe temperature

Function and Control 58

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Control Specification SiENBE04-808_A

3.12 Malfunctions
3.12.1 Sensor Malfunction Detection
Sensor malfunction may occur in the thermistor.
Relating to Thermistor Malfunction
1. Outdoor heat exchanger thermistor
2. Discharge pipe thermistor
3. Radiation fin thermistor
4. Outdoor temperature thermistor

3.12.2 Detection of Overcurrent and Overload

Outline An excessive output current is detected and, the OL temperature is observed to protect the
compressor.

Detail „ If the OL (compressor head) temperature exceeds 120 ~ 130°C (depending on the model),
the system shuts down the compressor.
„ If the inverter current exceeds 9.25 ~ 20 A (depending on the model), the system shuts down
the compressor.

3.12.3 Refrigerant Shortage Control

Outline I Detecting by power consumption
If the power consumption is below the specified value and the frequency is higher than the
specified frequency, it is regarded as refrigerant shortage.
The power consumption is small comparing with that in the normal operation when refrigerant is
insufficient, and refrigerant shortage is detected by checking a power consumption.

Refrigerant shortage zone

Power consumption

48 ~ 55 Hz Frequency
(depending on
the model) (R12184)

II Detecting by discharge pipe temperature

If the discharge pipe temperature is higher than the target discharge pipe temperature, and the
electronic expansion valve is fully open for more than the specified time, it is regarded as
refrigerant shortage.
Target discharge
pipe temperature

Refrigerant shortage
zone
(R1391)

III Detecting by the difference of temperature

If the difference between suction and discharge temperature is smaller than the specified value,
it is regarded as refrigerant shortage.

Refer to “Refrigerant shortage” on page 140 for detail.

59 Function and Control

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Control Specification

3.13 Forced Operation Mode

Outline Forced operation mode includes only forced cooling.

Detail
Item Forced Cooling
Conditions 1) The outdoor unit is not abnormal and not in the 3-minute standby mode.
2) The outdoor unit is not operating.
The forced operation is allowed when the above both conditions are met.
Start 1) Press the forced operation ON/OFF button (SW1) on the indoor unit for 5
seconds.
2) Press the forced operation ON/OFF button (SW1) on the outdoor unit.
Command RK(X)S20-35G2V1B, ARXS20-35G2V1B: 68 Hz
frequency RK(X)S20-35G2V1B9, ARXS20-35G3V1B: 58 Hz
RK(X)S42G2V1B, ARXS42G2V1B: 47 Hz
RK(X)S50G2V1B, ARXS50G2V1B: 66 Hz
End 1) The operation ends automatically after 15 minutes.
2) Press the forced operation ON/OFF button (SW1) on the indoor unit again.
3) Press the ON/OFF button on the remote control.
4) Press the forced operation ON/OFF button (SW1) on the outdoor unit.
Others The protection functions are prior to all others in the forced operation.

3.14 Standby Electricity Saving

20-42 Class Only
This function turns power supply OFF to the outdoor unit and sets the indoor unit into energy-
saving mode, thus reducing the power consumption of the air conditioner.

For 20/25/35 class models, field setting is required for turning ON the function.

Refer to “Standby Electricity Saving” on page 290 for detail.

Function and Control 60

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A

Part 5
Operation Manual
1. System Configuration............................................................................62
2. FTXS20/25/35/42/50G2V1B .................................................................63
2.1 remote control ........................................................................................63
2.2 AUTO · DRY · COOL · HEAT · FAN Operation .....................................64
2.3 Adjusting the Airflow Direction................................................................66
2.4 COMFORT AIRFLOW and INTELLIGENT EYE Operation....................68
2.5 POWERFUL Operation ..........................................................................71
2.6 OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET Operation.......................................................72
2.7 ECONO Operation .................................................................................73
2.8 TIMER Operation ...................................................................................74
2.9 WEEKLY TIMER Operation ...................................................................76
3. ATXS20/25/35/42/50G2V1B .................................................................81
3.1 remote control ........................................................................................81
3.2 AUTO · DRY · COOL · HEAT · FAN Operation .....................................82
3.3 Adjusting the Airflow Direction................................................................84
3.4 COMFORT AIRFLOW Operation ...........................................................86
3.5 INTELLIGENT EYE Operation ...............................................................87
3.6 POWERFUL Operation ..........................................................................89
3.7 OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET Operation.......................................................90
3.8 ECONO Operation .................................................................................91
3.9 TIMER Operation ...................................................................................92

61 Operation Manual
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A System Configuration

1. System Configuration
After the installation and test operation of the room air conditioner have been completed, it
should be operated and handled as described below. Every user would like to know the correct
method of operation of the room air conditioner, to check if it is capable of cooling (or heating)
well, and to know a clever method of using it.
In order to meet this expectation of the users, giving sufficient explanations taking enough time
can be said to reduce about 80% of the requests for servicing. However good the installation
work is and however good the functions are, the customer may blame either the room air
conditioner or its installation work because of improper handling. The installation work and
handing over of the unit can only be considered to have been completed when its handling has
been explained to the user without using technical terms but giving full knowledge of the
equipment.

System Configuration 62
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 FTXS20/25/35/42/50G2V1B SiENBE04-808_A

2. FTXS20/25/35/42/50G2V1B
2.1 Remote Control
„ Remote Control

2 <Open the front cover>

9 10
7 11
5
3 8
12
6 13
4
14
16
15
18
17

<ARC452A3>

1. Signal transmitter: 9. ECONO button:

• It sends signals to the indoor unit. ECONO operation
2. Display: 10. SWING button:
• It displays the current settings. • Horizontal blades (flaps)
(In this illustration, each section is 11. SWING button:
shown with its displays ON for the • Vertical blades (louvers)
purpose of explanation.) 12. COMFORT/SENSOR button:
3. FAN setting button: • COMFORT AIRFLOW and
• It selects the airflow rate setting. INTELLIGENT EYE operation
4. POWERFUL button: 13. WEEKLY/PROGRAM/COPY/BACK/
POWERFUL operation NEXT button:
5. ON/OFF button: • WEEKLY TIMER operation
• Press this button once to start 14. SELECT button:
operation. • It changes the ON/OFF TIMER and
Press once again to stop it. WEEKLY TIMER settings.
6. TEMPERATURE adjustment buttons: 15. OFF TIMER button
• It changes the temperature setting. 16. ON TIMER button
7. MODE selector button 17. TIMER CANCEL button:
• It selects the operation mode. • It cancels the timer setting.
(AUTO/DRY/COOL/HEAT/FAN) • It cannot be used for the WEEKLY
8. QUIET button: TIMER operation
OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET operation 18. CLOCK button

63 System Configuration
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A FTXS20/25/35/42/50G2V1B

2.2 Auto Dry Cool Heat Fan Operation

The air conditioner operates with the operation mode of your choice.
From the next time on, the air conditioner will operate with the same
operation mode.
„ To start operation
1. Press “MODE selector button” and
select a operation mode.
• • Each pressing of the button advances
the mode setting in sequence.
: AUTO
: DRY
: COOL
: HEAT
: FAN 5
Cooling only model 4

Heat pump model

2, 3
1

2. Press “ON/OFF button” .

• The OPERATION lamp lights up.

„ To stop operation
3. Press “ON/OFF button” again.
• Then OPERATION lamp goes off.
„ To change the temperature setting
4. Press “TEMPERATURE adjustment
button”.
DRY or FAN mode AUTO or COOL or HEAT mode
The temperature setting is not variable. Press “ ” to raise the temperature and press
“ ” to lower the temperature.
Set to the temperature you like

System Configuration 64
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 FTXS20/25/35/42/50G2V1B SiENBE04-808_A

„ To change the air flow rate setting

5. Press “FAN setting button”.
DRY mode AUTO or COOL or HEAT or FAN mode
5 levels of air flow rate setting from “ “ to “ ”
The airflow rate setting is not variable. plus “ ”“ ” are available.

• Indoor unit quiet operation

When the air flow is set to “ ”, the noise from the indoor unit will become quieter.
Use this when making the noise quieter.

NOTE
„ Note on HEAT operation
• Since this air conditioner heats the room by taking heat from outdoor air to indoors, the heating capacity
becomes smaller in lower outdoor temperatures. If the heating effect is insufficient, it is recommended to use
another heating appliance in combination with the air conditioner.
• The heat pump system heats the room by circulating hot air around all parts of the room. After the start of
HEATING operation, it takes some time before the room gets warmer.
• In heating operation, frost may occur on the outdoor unit and lower the heating capacity. In that case, the
system switches into defrosting operation to take away the frost.
• During defrosting operation, hot air does not flow out of indoor unit.
• A pinging sound may be heard during defrosting operation, which, however does not mean that the air
conditioner has failures.
„ Note on COOL operation
• This air conditioner cools the room by blowing the hot air in the room outside, so if the outside temperature is
high, the performance of the air conditioner drops.
„ Note on DRY operation
• The computer chip works to rid the room of humidity while maintaining the temperature as much as possible. It
automatically controls temperature and airflow rate, so manual adjustment of these functions is unavailable.
„ Note on AUTO operation
• In AUTO operation, the system selects a temperature setting and an appropriate operation mode (COOL or
HEAT) based on the room temperature at the start of the operation.
• The system automatically reselects setting at a regular interval to bring the room temperature to user-setting
level.
• If you do not like AUTO operation, manually change the set temperature.
„ Note on air flow rate setting
• At smaller air flow rates, the cooling (heating) effect is also smaller.

65 System Configuration
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A FTXS20/25/35/42/50G2V1B

2.3 Adjusting the Airflow Direction

You can adjust the airflow direction to increase your comfort.
„ To adjust the horizontal blades (flaps)
1. Press “SWING button ”.
• “ ” is displayed on the LCD and
the flaps will begin to swing.

2. When the flaps have reached the

desired position, press “SWING
button ” once more.
• The flaps will stop moving.
• “ ” disappears from the LCD

„ To adjust the vertical blades (louvers)

3. Press “SWING button ”.
• “ ” is displayed on the LCD.

4. When the louvers have reached the 1, 2

desired position, press the “SWING 3, 4
button ” once more.
• The louvers will stop moving.
• “ ” disappears from the LCD.

System Configuration 66
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 FTXS20/25/35/42/50G2V1B SiENBE04-808_A

„ To start 3-D Airflow

1. 3. Press the “SWING button ” and the “SWING button ”: the “ ” and
“ ” display will light up and the flap and louvers will move in turn.

„ To cancel 3-D Airflow

2. 4. Press either the “SWING button ” or the “SWING button ”.

„ COMFORT AIRFLOW operation

• Chack COMFORT AIRFLOW operation in the section of “COMFORT AIRFLOW Operation”
and “INTELLIGENT EYE Operation”.

Notes on flaps and louvers angles

• When “SWING button” is selected, the flaps swinging range
depends on the operation mode. (See the figure.) In DRY mode or
COOL mode
Three-Dimensional (3-D) Airflow
• Using three-dimensional airflow circulates cold air, which tends COMFORT AIRFLOW 5°
15°
to collected at the bottom of the room, and hot air, which tends Upper limit 50°
to collect near the ceiling, throughout the room, preventing Lower limit
Stop operation
areas of cold and hot developing.
In HEAT mode

„ ATTENTION Stop operation

• Always use a remote control to adjust the angles of the flaps 30°
and louvers. If you attempt to move it forcibly with hand when it Upper limit 70°
is swinging, the mechanism may be broken. Lower limit
80°
COMFORT AIRFLOW
• Always use a remote control to adjust the louvers angles. In
In FAN mode
side the air outlet, a fan is rotating at a high speed.

5°
Upper limit
80°
Lower limit Stop operation

67 System Configuration
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A FTXS20/25/35/42/50G2V1B

2.4 COMFORT AIRFLOW and INTELLIGENT EYE Operation

The INTELLIGENT EYE incorporates infrared sensors to detect the
presence of people in the conditioned room.
When these sensors detect people, the louvers will adjust the airflow
direction to an area where people are not present. When there are no
people in the sensing areas, the air conditioner will go into energy-
saving mode.
„ To start operation
1. Press “COMFORT/SENSOR button”
and select an operation mode.
• Choose the desired operation mode out
of the following sequence.
• Each time the “COMFORT/SENSOR
button” is pressed a different setting
option is displayed on the LCD.
Blank

„ To cancel operation
2. Press “COMFORT/SENSOR button”.
1, 2
• Press the button to select “Blank”.

Display Operation mode Explanation

The flaps will adjust the airflow direction upward
COMFORT AIRFLOW while cooling, and adjust the airflow direction
downward while heating.
The sensors will detect the movement of people
in the sensing areas and the louvers will adjust
INTELLIGENT EYE the airflow direction to an area where people are
not present. When there are no people in the
sensing areas, the air conditioner will go into
energy-saving mode.
The air conditioner will be in COMFORT
COMFORT AIRFLOW and
AIRFLOW operation combined with
INTELLIGENT EYE
INTELLIGENT EYE operation.
Blank No function –

System Configuration 68
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 FTXS20/25/35/42/50G2V1B SiENBE04-808_A

Notes on “COMFORT AIRFLOW Operation”

• The flap position will change, preventing air from blowing directly on the occupants of the room.
• POWERFUL operation and COMFORT AIRFLOW operation cannot be used at the same time.
• The volume of air will be set to AUTO. If the upward and downward airflow direction is selected, the COMFORT
AIRFLOW function will be canceled.
• Priority is given to the function of whichever button is pressed last.
• The COMFORT AIRFLOW function makes the following airflow direction adjustments.
The flaps will move upward while cooling so that the airflow will be directed upward.
The flaps will move downward while heating so that the airflow will be directed downward.

Cooling operation Heating operation

Notes on “INTELLIGENT EYE Operation”

• The INTELLIGENT EYE sensor according to the following situations.

Vertical angle 90°

(Side View)

5m 90°
Area 1 Area 2 Area 1 Area 2
A person is detected in A person is detected in
Horizontal angle 110° area 1. area 2.
(Top View)

55° 55°
5m

Area 1 Area 2 The air conditioner will go into

energy-saving mode after 20 minutes.

People are detected in No people are detected in

both areas. the areas.
(Use the INTELLIGENT EYE * The wind direction may differ from the
Operation in combination with the illustrated direction depending on the actions
COMFORT AIRFLOW Operation.) and movements of the people in the areas.

69 System Configuration
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A FTXS20/25/35/42/50G2V1B

Notes on “INTELLIGENT EYE Operation”

• While the air conditioner is in INTELLIGENT EYE operation, the louvers will adjust the airflow direction if there are
people in the sensing areas of the INTELLIGENT EYE so that the leftward or rightward airflow will not be directed to the
people.
If no people are detected in either area 1 or 2 in 20 minutes, the air conditioner will go into energy-saving mode with the
set temperature shifted by 2°C.
The air conditioner may go into energy-saving operation even if there are people in the areas. This may occur
depending on the clothes the people are wearing if there are no movements of the people in the areas.
• The airflow direction from the louvers will be leftward if there are people in both areas 1 and 2 or if there is a person right
in front of the sensors because the sensors on the both sides will detect the person.
• Due to the position of the sensor, people might be exposed to the airflow of the indoor unit if they are close to the front
side of the indoor unit.
If there are people close to the front side of the indoor unit or in both areas, it is recommended to use the COMFORT
AIRFLOW and INTELLIGENT EYE functions simultaneously. When both of them are in use, the air conditioner will not
direct the airflow towards the people.
• Sensor may not detect moving objects further than 5m away. (Check the application range)
• Sensor detection sensitivity changes according to indoor unit location, the speed of passersby, temperature range, etc.
• The sensor also mistakenly detects pets, sunlight, fluttering curtains and light reflected off of mirrors as passersby.
• NIGHT SET MODE will not go on during use of INTELLIGENT EYE operation.

“INTELLIGENT EYE” is useful for Energy Saving

„ Energy saving operation
• Change the temperature –2°C in heating / +2°C in cooling / +2°C in dry mode from set temperature.
• Decrease the airflow rate slightly in FAN mode only. If no presence detected in the room during 20 minutes.

„ To combine “COMFORT AIRFLOW Operation” and “INTELLIGENT EYE

Operation”
• The air conditioner can go into operation with the COMFORT AIRFLOW and INTELLIGENT EYE functions combined.
The flaps adjust the airflow direction upward (while in cooling operation) and downward (while in heating operation),
during which the sensors of the INTELLIGENT EYE are working to detect the movement of people. When the sensors
detect people, the louvers will direct the airflow in such way that it will not be blown directly on them. If there are no
people, the air conditioner will go into energy-saving operation after 20 minutes.

CAUTION
• Do not place large objects near the sensor.
Also keep heating units or humidifiers outside the sensor’s detection area. This sensor can detect undesirable objects.
• Do not hit or violently push the INTELLIGENT EYE sensor. This can lead to damage and malfunction.

System Configuration 70
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 FTXS20/25/35/42/50G2V1B SiENBE04-808_A

2.5 POWERFUL Operation

POWERFUL operation quickly maximizes the cooling (heating) effect
in any operation mode.
You can get the maximum capacity.
„ To start POWERFUL operation
1. Press “POWERFUL button”.
• POWERFUL operation ends in
20minutes. Then the system
automatically operates again with the
previous settings which were used
before POWERFUL operation.
• “ ” is displayed on the LCD.
• When using POWERFUL operation,
there are some functions which are
not available.
1, 2
„ To cancel POWERFUL operation
2. Press “POWERFUL button” again.
• “ ” disappears from the LCD.

NOTE
„ Notes on COMFORT AIRFLOW operation
• POWERFUL Operation cannot be used together with ECONO, QUIET, or COMFORT Operation.
Priority is given to the function of whichever button is pressed last.
• POWERFUL Operation can only be set when the unit is running. Pressing the operation stop button causes the settings
to be canceled, and the “ ” disappears from the LCD.
• POWERFUL operation will not increase the capacity of the air conditioner if the air conditioner is already in operation
with its maximum capacity demonstrated.
• In COOL and HEAT mode
To maximize the cooling (heating) effect, the capacity of outdoor unit must be increased and the airflow rate be fixed to
the maximum setting.
The temperature and airflow settings are not variable.
• In DRY mode
The temperature setting is lowered by 2.5°C and the airflow rate is slightly increased.
• In FAN mode
The airflow rate is fixed to the maximum setting.

71 System Configuration
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A FTXS20/25/35/42/50G2V1B

2.6 OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET Operation

OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET operation lowers the noise level of the
outdoor unit by changing the frequency and fan speed on the outdoor
unit.
This function is convenient during night.
„ To start OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET
operation
1. Press “QUIET button”.
• “ ” is displayed on the LCD.

„ To cancel OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET

operation
2. Press “QUIET button” again.
• “ ” disappears from the LCD.

1, 2

NOTE
„ Notes on OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET operation
• This function is available in COOL, HEAT, and AUTO modes.
(This is not available in FAN and DRY mode.)
• POWERFUL operation and OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET operation cannot be used at the same time.
Priority is given to the function of whichever button is pressed last.
• OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET operation will drop neither the frequency nor fan speed if the frequency and fan speed have
been already dropped low enough.

System Configuration 72
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 FTXS20/25/35/42/50G2V1B SiENBE04-808_A

2.7 ECONO Operation

ECONO operation is a function which enables efficient operation by
limiting the maximum power consumption value.
This function is useful for cases in which attention should be paid to
ensure a circuit breaker will not trip when the product runs alongside
other appliances.
„ To start ECONO operation
1. Press “ECONO button”.
• “ ” is displayed on the LCD..

„ To cancel ECONO operation

2. Press “ECONO button” again.
• “ ” disappears from the LCD.

Running current and

power consumption
Maximum during
Normal normal operation 1, 2
operation
Maximum during
ECONO Mode

ECONO
Mode

Time
From start up until set
temperature is reached

• This diagram is a representation for

illustrative purposes only.
* The maximum running current and
power consumption of the air
conditioner in ECONO mode vary with
the connecting outdoor unit.

NOTE
„ Notes on ECONO operation
• ECONO Operation can only be set when the unit is running. Pressing the OFF button causes the setting to be canceled,
and the “ ” disappears from the LCD.
• ECONO operation is a function which enables efficient operation by limiting the power consumption of the outdoor unit
(operating frequency).
• ECONO operation functions in AUTO, COOL, DRY and HEAT modes.
• POWERFUL and ECONO operation cannot be used at the same time.
Priority is given to the function of whichever button is pressed last.
• Power consumption may not drop even if ECONO operation is used of the level of power consumption is already low.

73 System Configuration
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A FTXS20/25/35/42/50G2V1B

2.8 TIMER Operation

Timer functions are useful for automatically switching the air conditioner on or off at
night or in the morning. You can also use OFF TIMER and ON TIMER in combination.
„ To use OFF TIMER operation
• Check that the clock is correct.
If not, set the clock to the present time.
1. Press “OFF TIMER button”.
• “0:00” is displayed on the LCD.
• “OFF” blinks.

2. Press “SELECT button” until the time setting

reaches the point you like.
• Every pressing of either button increases or
decreases the time setting by 10 minutes.
Holding down either button changes the
setting rapidly.

3. Press “OFF TIMER button” again.

• The TIMER lamp lights up..

1, 3
„ To cancel the OFF TIMER operation 2
4. Press “CANCEL button”. 4
• The TIMER lamp goes off

NOTE
• When TIMER is set, the present time is not displayed.
• Once you set ON, OFF TIMER, the time setting is kept in the memory. (The memory is canceled when remote control
batteries are replaced.)
• When operating the unit via the ON/OFF Timer, the actual length of operation may vary from the time entered by the
user. (Maximum approx. 10 minutes)
„ NIGHT SET mode
When the OFF TIMER is set, the air conditioner automatically adjusts the temperature setting (0.5°C up in COOL, 2.0°C
down in HEAT) to prevent excessive cooling (heating) for your pleasant sleep.

System Configuration 74
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 FTXS20/25/35/42/50G2V1B SiENBE04-808_A

„ To use ON TIMER operation

• Check that the clock is correct.
If not, set the clock to the present time.

1. Press “ON TIMER button”.

• “6:00” is displayed on the LCD.
• “ON” blinks.
2. Press “SELECT button” until the time setting
reaches the point you like.
• Every pressing of either button increases or
decreases the time setting by 10 minutes.
Holding down either button changes the
setting rapidly.
3. Press “ON TIMER button” again.
• The TIMER lamp lights up.

„ To cancel the ON TIMER operation

• Press “CANCEL button”.
The timer lamp goes off.
2

1, 3

„ To combine ON TIMER and OFF TIMER

• A sample setting for combining the two timers is shown below.

(Example)
Present time: 23:00
(The unit operating)
OFF TIMER at 0:00 Display

ON TIMER at 14:00 Combined

ATTENTION
„ In the following cases, set the timer again.
• After a breaker has turned off.
• After a power failure.
• After replacing batteries in the remote control.

75 System Configuration
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A FTXS20/25/35/42/50G2V1B

2.9 WEEKLY TIMER Operation

Up to 4 timer settings can be saved for each day of the week. It is convenient if the WEEKLY TIMER is set according to the family’s life style.
„ Using in these cases of WEEKLY TIMER
An example of WEEKLY TIMER settings is shown below.
Example: The same timer settings are made for the week from Monday through Friday while different timer settings
are made for the weekend.

[Monday] Make timer settings up to programs 1-4. (see page 23.)

Program 1 Program 2 Program 3 Program 4
ON OFF ON OFF

25°C 27°C
6:00 8:30 17:30 22:00

25°C 27°C

ON OFF ON OFF

[Tuesday] Use the copy mode to make settings for Tuesday to Friday, because these
to settings are the same as those for Monday. (see page 25.)
[Friday] Program 1 Program 2 Program 3 Program 4
ON OFF ON OFF

25°C 27°C
6:00 8:30 17:30 22:00

[Saturday] No timer settings

[Sunday] Make timer settings up to programs 1-4. (see page 23.)
Program 1 Program 2 Program 3 Program 4
ON OFF OFF ON

25°C 27°C 27°C

8:00 10:00 19:00 21:00

25°C 27°C

ON OFF OFF ON

• Up to 4 reservations per day and 28 reservations per week can be set in the WEEKLY TIMER. The effective use
of the copy mode ensures ease of making reservations.
• The use of ON-ON-ON-ON settings, for example, makes it possible to schedule operating mode and set
temperature changes. Furthermore, by using OFF-OFF-OFF-OFF settings, only the turn-OFF time of each day
can be set. This will turn OFF the air conditioner automatically if the user forgets to turn it OFF.

System Configuration 76
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 FTXS20/25/35/42/50G2V1B SiENBE04-808_A

„ To use WEEKLY TIMER

operation
Setting mode
• Make sure the day of the week and time
are set. If not, set the day of the week and
time.

Program 1 Program 2 Program 3 Program 4

ON OFF ON OFF

[Monday] 25°C 27°C

6:00 8:30 17:30 22:00

1. Press “ button”.
• The day of the week and the reservation
number of the current day will be displayed.
• 1 to 4 settings can be made per day.
2. Press the “SELECT button” to select the
desired day of the week and reservation
number.
• Pressing the “SELECT button” changes
the reservation number and the day of the
1
week.
3. Press “NEXT button”.
• The day of the week and reservation number 3, 5, 7
will be set.
• “ ” and “ON” blink. 2, 4, 6
4. Press “SELECT button” to select the desired
mode.
• Pressing the “SELECT button” changes
“ON” or “OFF” setting in sequence.
ON OFF Blank
ON TIMER OFF TIMER blank

• In case the reservation has already been

set, selecting “blank” deletes the
reservation.
• Go to STEP 9 if “blank” is selected.
5. Press “NEXT button”.
• The ON/OFF TIMER mode will be set.
• “ ” and the time blink.
6. Press “SELECT button” to select the desired
time.
• The time can be set between 0:00 and
23:50 in 10 minute intervals.
• To return to the ON/OFF TIMER mode
setting, press “BACK button”.
• Go to STEP 9 when setting the OFF
TIMER.
7. Press “NEXT button”.
• The time will be set.
• “ ” and the temperature blink.

Setting Displays

Day and number settings ON/OFF settings Time settings Temperature settings

77 System Configuration
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A FTXS20/25/35/42/50G2V1B

8. Press “SELECT button” to select the

desired temperature.
• The temperature can be set between
10°C and 32°C.
Cooling: The unit operates at 18°C even
if it is set at 10 to 17°C.
Heating: The unit operates at 30°C even
if it is set at 31 to 32°C.
• To return to the time setting, press
“BACK button”.
• The set temperature is only displayed
when the mode setting is on.
9. Press “NEXT button”.
• The temperature will be set and go to
the next reservation setting.
• To continue further settings, repeat
the procedure from STEP 4.
10. Press “ button” to complete the
setting.
• Be sure to direct the remote control
toward the indoor unit and check for a 10
receiving tone and flashing the operation
lamp.
9
• “ ” is displayed on the LCD and
WEEKLY TIMER operation is activated.
• The TIMER lamp lights up. 8
• A reservation made once can be easily
copied and the same settings used for
another day of the week. Refer to Copy
mode.

NOTE
„ Notes on WEEKLY TIMER operation
• Do not forget to set the clock on the remote control first.
• The day of the week, ON/OFF TIMER mode, time and set temperature (only for ON TIMER mode) can be set
with WEEKLY TIMER. Other settings for ON TIMER are based on the settings just before the operation.
• Both WEEKLY TIMER and ON/OFF TIMER operation cannot be used at the same time. The ON/OFF TIMER
operation has priority if it is set while WEEKLY TIMER is still active. The WEEKLY TIMER will go into standby
state, and “ ” will disappear from the LCD. When ON/OFF TIMER is up, the WEEKLY TIMER will
automatically become active.
• Only the time and set temperature set with the weekly timer are sent with the “ button”. Set the weekly
timer only after setting the operation mode, the fan strength, and the fan direction ahead of time.
• Shutting the breaker off, power failure, and other similar events will render operation of the indoor unit’s internal
clock inaccurate. Reset the clock.
• The “BACK button” can be used only for the time and temperature settings. It cannot be used to go back to the
reservation number.

System Configuration 78
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 FTXS20/25/35/42/50G2V1B SiENBE04-808_A

Copy mode
• A reservation made once can be copied
another day of the week. The whole
reservation of the selected day of the
week will be copied.

Program 1 Program 2 Program 3 Program 4

ON OFF ON OFF

[Monday] 25°C 27°C

6:00 8:30 17:30 22:00

COPY
Program 1 Program 2 Program 3 Program 4
ON OFF ON OFF
[Tuesday]
to 25°C 27°C
[Friday] 6:00 8:30 17:30 22:00

1. Press “ button”. 1, 6
2. Press “SELECT button” to confirm the
day of the week to be copied.
3. Press “COPY button” to activate copy
mode. 3, 5
• The whole reservation of the selected
day of the week will be copied.
4. Press “SELECT button” to select the
destination day of the week. 2, 4
5. Press “COPY button”.
• The reservation will be copied to the
selected day of the week. The whole
reservation of the selected day of the
week will be copied.
• To continue copying the settings to other days of the week, repeat STEP 4 and STEP 5.
6. Press “ button” to complete the setting.
• “ ” is displayed on the LCD and WEEKLY TIMER operation is activated.

Setting Displays

Confirmation display Copy display Paste display Normal display

NOTE
„ COPY MODE
• The entire reservation of the source day of the week is copied in the copy mode. In the case of making a
reservation change for any day of the week individually after copying the content of weekly reservations, press
“ button” and change the settings in the steps of Setting mode.

79 System Configuration
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A FTXS20/25/35/42/50G2V1B

„ Confirming a reservation
• The reservation can be confirmed.
1. Press “ button”.
• The day of the week and the
reservation number of the current day
will be displayed.
2. Press “SELECT button” to select the day
of the week and the reservation number
to be confirmed.
• Pressing the “SELECT button” displays
the reservation details.
• To change the confirmed reserved
settings, select the reservation number
and press “NEXT button”. The mode is
switched to setting mode. Go to Setting
mode STEP 4.
3. Press “ button” to exit
confirming mode.
• “ ” is displayed on the LCD
and WEEKLY TIMER operation is
activated. 1, 3, 5
• The TIMER lamp lights up.
4, 7, 8
Setting Displays

2, 6
Normal display Confirmation display

„ To deactivate WEEKLY TIMER operation

4. Press “WEEKLY button” while “ ” is displayed on the LCD.
• The “ ” will disappear from the LCD.
• The TIMER lamp goes off.
• To reactivate the WEEKLY TIMER operation, press the “WEEKLY button” again.
• If a reservation deactivated with “WEEKLY button” is activated once again, the last
reservation mode will be used.

„ To delete reservations
The individual reservation
• Refer to Setting mode.
• When selecting desired mode at STEP 4 in setting mode, select “blank”. The reservation will
be deleted.

The reservations for each day of the week

• This function can be used for deleting reservations for each day of the week.
5. Press “ button”
6. Select the day of the week to be canceled with the “SELECT button”.
7. Hold the “WEEKLY button” for 5 seconds.
• The reservation of the selected day of the week will be deleted.

All reservations
8. Hold “WEEKLY button” for 5 seconds while normal display.
• Be sure to direct the remote control toward the main unit and check for a receiving tone.
• This operation is not effective while WEEKLY TIMER is being set.
• All reservations will be deleted.

System Configuration 80
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 ATXS20/25/35/42/50G2V1B SiENBE04-808_A

3. ATXS20/25/35/42/50G2V1B
3.1 Remote Control
„ Remote Control
1

5
3
6
4
9
7 10
8 11
13 12
16
18
15 17

14

<ARC433A85>

1. Signal transmitter: 9. FAN setting button:

• It sends signals to the indoor unit. • It selects the airflow rate setting.
2. Display: 10. SWING button:
• It displays the current settings. • Ajusting the Airflow Direction.
(In this illustration, each section is 11. SWING button:
shown with all its displays ON for the • Louvers (vertical blades)
purpose of explanation.) 12. COMFORT/SENSOR button:
3. ECONO button: COMFORT AIRFLOW and INTELLIGENT
ECONO operation EYE operation
4. POWERFUL button: 13. ON TIMER button:
POWERFUL operation 14. OFF TIMER button:
5. TEMPERATURE adjustment buttons: 15. TIMER Setting button:
• It changes the temperature setting. • It changes the time setting.
6. ON/OFF button: 16. TIMER CANCEL button:
• Press this button once to start • It cancels the timer setting.
operation. 17. CLOCK button
Press once again to stop it. 18. RESET button:
7. MODE selector button: • Restart the unit if it freezes.
• It selects the operation mode. (AUTO/ • Use a thin object to push.
DRY/COOL/HEAT/FAN)
8. QUIET button:
OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET operation

81 System Configuration
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A ATXS20/25/35/42/50G2V1B

3.2 Auto Dry Cool Heat Fan Operation

The air conditioner operates with the operation mode of your choice.
From the next time on, the air conditioner will operate with the same
R
operation mode.
„ To start operation
1. Press “MODE selector button” and
select a operation mode.
• Each pressing of the button advances the
mode setting in sequence.
: AUTO
: DRY 4
: COOL
: HEAT
2, 3
: FAN
1

2. Press “ON/OFF button” .

• The OPERATION lamp lights up.
5

„ To stop operation
3. Press “ON/OFF button” again.
• Then OPERATION lamp goes off.
„ To change the temperature setting
4. Press “TEMPERATURE adjustment button”.

DRY or FAN mode AUTO or COOL or HEAT mode

Press “ ” to raise the temperature and press

“ ” to lower the temperature.
The temperature setting is not variable. Set to the temperature you like.

System Configuration 82
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 ATXS20/25/35/42/50G2V1B SiENBE04-808_A

„ To change the air flow rate setting

5. Press “FAN setting button”.
DRY mode AUTO or COOL or HEAT or FAN mode
Five levels of air flow rate setting from “ “ to “ ”
The airflow rate setting is not variable. plus “ ”“ ” are available.

• Indoor unit quiet operation

When the air flow is set to “ ”, the noise from the indoor unit will become quieter.
Use this when making the noise quieter.

NOTE
„ Note on heat operation
• Since this air conditioner heats the room by taking heat from outdoor air to indoors, the heating capacity
becomes smaller in lower outdoor temperatures. If the heating effect is insufficient, it is recommended to use
another heating appliance in combination with the air conditioner.
• The heat pump system heats the room by circulating hot air around all parts of the room. After the start of
HEATING operation, it takes some time before the room gets warmer.
• In heating operation, frost may occur on the outdoor unit and lower the heating capacity. In that case, the
system switches into defrosting operation to take away the frost.
• During defrosting operation, hot air does not flow out of indoor unit.
• A pinging sound may be heard during defrosting operation, which, however does not mean that the air
conditioner has failures.
„ Note on COOL operation
• This air conditioner cools the room by blowing the hot air in the room outside, so if the outside temperature is
high, the performance of the air conditioner drops.
„ Note on DRY operation
• The computer chip works to rid the room of humidity while maintaining the temperature as much as possible. It
automatically controls temperature and airflow rate, so manual adjustment of these functions is unavailable.
„ Note on AUTO operation
• In AUTO operation, the system selects a temperature setting and an appropriate operation mode (COOL or
HEAT) based on the room temperature at the start of the operation.
• The system automatically reselects setting at a regular interval to bring the room temperature to user-setting
level.
• If you do not like AUTO operation, manually change the set temperature.
„ Note on air flow rate setting
• At smaller air flow rates, the cooling (heating) effect is also smaller.

83 System Configuration
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A ATXS20/25/35/42/50G2V1B

3.3 Adjusting the Airflow Direction

You can adjust the airflow direction to increase your comfort.
„ To adjust the horizontal blades (flaps) R

1. Press “SWING button”.

• “ ” is displayed on the LCD and
the flaps will begin to swing.

2. When the flaps have reached the

desired position, press “SWING
button” once more.
• The flaps will stop moving.
• “ ” disappears from the LCD

1, 2
3, 4

„ To adjust the vertical blades (louvers)

3. Press “SWING button ”.
• “ ” is displayed on the LCD.
4. When the louvers have reached the desired position, press the “SWING button ”
once more.
• The louvers will stop moving.
• “ ” disappears from the LCD.

System Configuration 84
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 ATXS20/25/35/42/50G2V1B SiENBE04-808_A

„ To start 3-D Airflow

1. 3. Press the “SWING button ” and the “SWING button ”: the “ ” and
“ ” display will light up and the flap and louvers will move in turn.

„ To cancel 3-D Airflow

2. 4. Press either the “SWING button ” or the “SWING button ”.

Notes on flaps and louvers angles

• When “SWING button” is selected, the flaps swinging range

In DRY mode or
depends on the operation mode. (See the figure.) COOL mode

Three-Dimensional (3-D) Airflow COMFORT AIRFLOW 5°

15°
• Using three-dimensional airflow circulates cold air, which tends Upper limit 50°
to collected at the bottom of the room, and hot air, which tends Lower limit
Stop operation
to collect near the ceiling, throughout the room, preventing
In HEAT mode
areas of cold and hot developing.
Stop operation

„ ATTENTION 30°
• Always use a remote control to adjust the angles of the flaps Upper limit 70°
Lower limit
and louvers. If you attempt to move it forcibly with hand when it 80°
COMFORT AIRFLOW
is swinging, the mechanism may be broken.
In FAN mode
• Always use a remote control to adjust the louvers angles. In
side the air outlet, a fan is rotating at a high speed.
5°
Upper limit
80°
Lower limit Stop operation

85 System Configuration
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A ATXS20/25/35/42/50G2V1B

3.4 COMFORT AIRFLOW Operation

The flow of air will be in the upward direction while in cooling mode
and in the downward direction while in heating mode, which will
provide a comfortable wind that will not come in direct contact with
people.
„ To start COMFORT AIRFLOW operation
1. Press “COMFORT/SENSOR button”
and select “ ” on the LCD.
• Each time the “COMFORT/SENSOR
button” is pressed a different setting
option is displayed on the LCD.
• By selecting “ ” from the following
icons, the air conditioner will be in
COMFORT AIRFLOW operation
combined with INTELLIGENT EYE
operation.
Blank

„ To cancel COMFORT AIRFLOW

1, 2
operation
2. Press “COMFORT/SENSOR button”.
• Press the button to select “Blank”.

Notes on “COMFORT AIRFLOW Operation”

„ Note on the angles of the flaps
• The flap position will change, preventing air from blowing directly on the occupants of the room.
• POWERFUL operation and COMFORT AIRFLOW operation cannot be used at the same time.
• The volume of air will be set to AUTO. If the upward and downward airflow direction is selected, the COMFORT
AIRFLOW function will be canceled.
• Priority is given to the function of whichever button is pressed last.
• The COMFORT AIRFLOW function makes the following airflow direction adjustments.
The flaps will move upward while cooling so that the airflow will be directed upward.
The flaps will move downward while heating so that the airflow will be directed downward.

Cooling operation Heating operation

System Configuration 86
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 ATXS20/25/35/42/50G2V1B SiENBE04-808_A

3.5 INTELLIGENT EYE Operation

“INTELLIGENT EYE” is the infrared sensor which detects the human
movement.
„ To start INTELLIGENT EYE operation
1. Press “COMFORT/SENSOR button”
and select “ ” on the LCD.
• Each time the “COMFORT/SENSOR
button” is pressed a different setting
option is displayed on the LCD.
• By selecting “ ” from the following
icons, the air conditioner will be in
COMFORT AIRFLOW operation
combined with INTELLIGENT EYE
operation.
Blank

„ To cancel the INTELLIGENT EYE 1, 2

operation
2. Press “COMFORT/SENSOR button”.
• Press the button to select “Blank”.

[EX.]
When somebody in the room
• Normal operation
The air conditioner is in normal
operation while the sensor is
detecting the movement of people.

When nobody in the room

• 20 min. after, start energy
saving operation.
The set temperature is shifted in
±2ºC steps.

Somebody back in the room

• Back to normal operation.
The air conditioner will return to
normal operation when the sensor
detects the movement of people
again.

87 System Configuration
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A ATXS20/25/35/42/50G2V1B

“INTELLIGENT EYE” is useful for Energy Saving

„ Energy saving operation
• Change the temperature –2°C in heating / +2°C in cooling / +2°C in dry mode from set temperature.
• Decrease the airflow rate slightly in FAN mode only. If no presence detected in the room for 20 minutes.

Notes on “INTELLIGENT EYE”

• Application range is as follows.
Vertical angle 90° Horizontal angle 110°
(Side View) (Top View)

55° 55°

7m
7m 90°

• Sensor may not detect moving objects further than 7m away. (Check the application range)
• Sensor detection sensitivity changes according to indoor unit location, the speed of passersby, temperature range, etc.
• The sensor also mistakenly detects pets, sunlight, fluttering curtains and light reflected off of mirrors as passersby.
• INTELLIGENT EYE operatipon will not go on during powerful operation.
• NIGHT SET MODE will not go on during use of INTELLIGENT EYE operation.

„ To combine “COMFORT AIRFLOW Operation” and “INTELLIGENT EYE

Operation”
1. Press “COMFORT/SENSOR button” and select “ ” on the LCD.
• Each time the “COMFORT/SENSOR button” is pressed a different setting option is
displayed on the LCD.
Blank

2. Press “COMFORT/SENSOR button”.

• Press the button to select “Blank”.
• The air conditioner can go into operation with the COMFORT AIRFLOW and INTELLIGENT EYE functions combined.
• The volume of air will be set to AUTO. If the upward and downward airflow direction is selected, the CONFORT
AIRFLOW operation will be canceled.
Priority is given to the function of whichever button is pressed last.

CAUTION
• Do not place large objects near the sensor.
Also keep heating units or humidifiers outside the sensor’s detection area. This sensor can detect undesirable objects.
• Do not hit or violently push the INTELLIGENT EYE sensor. This can lead to damage and malfunction.

System Configuration 88
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 ATXS20/25/35/42/50G2V1B SiENBE04-808_A

3.6 POWERFUL Operation

POWERFUL operation quickly maximizes the cooling (heating) effect
in any operation mode.
You can get the maximum capacity.
„ To start POWERFUL operation
1. Press “POWERFUL button”.
• POWERFUL operation ends in
20minutes. Then the system
automatically operates again with the
previous settings which were used
before POWERFUL operation.
• “ ” is displayed on the LCD.
• When using POWERFUL operation,
there are some functions which are
not available. 1, 2

„ To cancel POWERFUL operation

2. Press “POWERFUL button” again.
• “ ” disappears from the LCD.

NOTE
„ Notes on COMFORT AIRFLOW operation
• POWERFUL Operation cannot be used together with ECONO, QUIET, or COMFORT Operation.
Priority is given to the function of whichever button is pressed last.
• POWERFUL Operation can only be set when the unit is running. Pressing the operation stop button causes the settings
to be canceled, and the “ ” disappears from the LCD.
• POWERFUL operation will not increase the capacity of the air conditioner if the air conditioner is already in operation
with its maximum capacity demonstrated.
• In COOL and HEAT mode
To maximize the cooling (heating) effect, the capacity of outdoor unit must be increased and the airflow rate be fixed to
the maximum setting.
• In DRY mode
The temperature setting is lowered by 2.5°C and the airflow rate is slightly increased.
• In FAN mode
The airflow rate is fixed to the maximum setting.

89 System Configuration
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A ATXS20/25/35/42/50G2V1B

3.7 OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET Operation

OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET operation lowers the noise level of the
outdoor unit by changing the frequency and fan speed on the outdoor
unit.
This function is convenient during night.
„ To start OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET
operation
1. Press “QUIET button”.
• “ ” is displayed on the LCD.
„ To cancel OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET 1, 2
operation
2. Press “QUIET button” again.
• “ ” disappears from the LCD.

NOTE
„ Note on OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET operation
• This function is available in COOL, HEAT and AUTO modes.
(This function is not available in FAN and DRY mode.)
• POWERFUL operation and OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET operation cannot be used at the same time.
Priority is given to the function wichever button is pressed last.
• OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET operation will drop neither the frequency nor fan speed if the frequency and fan speed
have been already dropped low enough.

System Configuration 90
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 ATXS20/25/35/42/50G2V1B SiENBE04-808_A

3.8 ECONO Operation

ECONO operation is a function which enables efficient operation by
limiting the maximum power consumption value.
„ To start ECONO operation
1. Press “ECONO button”.
• “ ” is displayed on the LCD..

„ To cancel ECONO operation

2. Press “ECONO button” again.
• “ ” disappears from the LCD.

Running current and

power consumption
Maximum during
Normal normal operation
operation
Maximum during
ECONO Mode

ECONO 1, 2
Mode

Time
From start up until set
temperature is reached

• This diagram is a representation for

illustrative purposes only.
* The maximum running current and
power consumption of the air
conditioner in ECONO mode vary with
the connecting outdoor unit.

NOTE
• ECONO Operation can only be set when the unit is running. Pressing the OFF button causes the setting to be canceled,
and the “ ” disappears from the LCD.
• ECONO operation is a function which enables efficient operation by limiting the power consumption of the outdoor unit
(operating frequency).
• ECONO operation functions in AUTO, COOL, DRY and HEAT modes.
• POWERFUL and ECONO operation cannot be used at the same time.
Priority is given to the function of whichever button is pressed last.
• Power consumption may not drop even if ECONO operation is used of the level of power consumption is already low.

91 System Configuration
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A ATXS20/25/35/42/50G2V1B

3.9 TIMER Operation

Timer functions are useful for automatically switching the air conditioner on or off at
night or in the morning. You can also use OFF TIMER and ON TIMER in combination.
„ To use OFF TIMER operation
• Check that the clock is correct.
If not, set the clock to the present time.
1. Press “OFF TIMER button”.
• “0:00” is displayed on the LCD.
• “ ” blinks.

2. Press “TIMER Setting button” until the time

setting reaches the point you like.
• Every pressing of either button increases or
decreases the time setting by 10 minutes.
Holding down either button changes the
setting rapidly.

3. Press “OFF TIMER button” again. 2

• The TIMER lamp lights up.. 4

1, 3

„ To cancel the OFF TIMER operation

4. Press “CANCEL button”.
• The TIMER lamp goes off

NOTE
• When TIMER is set, the present time is not displayed.
• Once you set ON, OFF TIMER, the time setting is kept in the memory. (The memory is canceled when remote control
batteries are replaced.)
• When operating the unit via the ON/OFF Timer, the actual length of operation may vary from the time entered by the
user.
„ NIGHT SET mode
When the OFF TIMER is set, the air conditioner automatically adjusts the temperature setting (0.5°C up in COOL, 2.0°C
down in HEAT) to prevent excessive cooling (heating) for your pleasant sleep.

System Configuration 92
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 ATXS20/25/35/42/50G2V1B SiENBE04-808_A

„ To use ON TIMER operation

• Check that the clock is correct.
If not, set the clock to the present time.

1. Press “ON TIMER button”.

• “6:00” is displayed on the LCD.
• “ ” blinks.
2. Press “TIMER Setting button” until the time
setting reaches the point you like.
• Every pressing of either button increases or
decreases the time setting by 10 minutes.
Holding down either button changes the
setting rapidly.
3. Press “ON TIMER button” again.
• The TIMER lamp lights up.

1, 3
4

2
„ To cancel the ON TIMER operation
4. Press “CANCEL button”.
• The timer lamp goes off.

„ To combine ON TIMER and OFF TIMER

• A sample setting for combining the two timers is shown below.

(Example)
Present time: 11:00 p.m.
(The unit operating)
OFF TIMER at 0:00 a.m.
ON TIMER at 7:00 a.m. Combined

ATTENTION
„ In the following cases, set the timer again.
• After a breaker has turned off.
• After a power failure.
• After replacing batteries in the remote control.

93 System Configuration
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A

Part 6
Service Diagnosis
1. Caution for Diagnosis............................................................................95
1.1 Troubleshooting with LED ......................................................................95
2. Problem Symptoms and Measures .......................................................96
3. Service Check Function ........................................................................97
3.1 ARC452 Series.......................................................................................97
3.2 ARC433 Series.....................................................................................100
4. Troubleshooting ..................................................................................103
4.1 Error Codes and Description ................................................................103
4.2 Indoor Unit PCB Abnormality ...............................................................104
4.3 Freeze-up Protection Control or Heating Peak-cut Control..................105
4.4 Fan Motor (DC Motor) or Related Abnormality.....................................107
4.5 Thermistor or Related Abnormality (Indoor Unit)..................................109
4.6 Signal Transmission Error
(between Indoor Unit and Outdoor Unit) ..............................................110
4.7 Unspecified Voltage (between Indoor Unit and Outdoor Unit) .............111
4.8 Outdoor Unit PCB Abnormality.............................................................112
4.9 OL Activation (Compressor Overload) .................................................114
4.10 Compressor Lock .................................................................................115
4.11 DC Fan Lock ........................................................................................116
4.12 Input Overcurrent Detection .................................................................117
4.13 Four Way Valve Abnormality................................................................118
4.14 Discharge Pipe Temperature Control...................................................120
4.15 High Pressure Control in Cooling .........................................................122
4.16 Compressor System Sensor Abnormality ............................................124
4.17 Position Sensor Abnormality ................................................................126
4.18 DC Voltage / Current Sensor Abnormality (20/25/35/42 Class) ...........129
4.19 CT or Related Abnormality (50 Class)..................................................130
4.20 Thermistor or Related Abnormality (Outdoor Unit)...............................132
4.21 Electrical Box Temperature Rise..........................................................134
4.22 Radiation Fin Temperature Rise ..........................................................136
4.23 Output Overcurrent Detection ..............................................................138
4.24 Refrigerant Shortage ............................................................................140
4.25 Low-voltage Detection or Over-voltage Detection................................143
4.26 Signal Transmission Error on Outdoor Unit PCB (50 Class Only) .......145
5. Check ..................................................................................................146
5.1 How to Check .......................................................................................146

Service Diagnosis 94
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Caution for Diagnosis SiENBE04-808_A

1. Caution for Diagnosis

1.1 Troubleshooting with LED
Indoor Unit The operation lamp blinks when any of the following errors is detected.
1. When a protection device of the indoor or outdoor unit is activated, or when the thermistor
malfunctions.
2. When a signal transmission error occurs between the indoor and outdoor units.
In either case, conduct the diagnostic procedure described in the following pages.

Operation lamp (green)

(R12187)

Outdoor Unit The outdoor unit has one green LED (LED A) on the PCB. When the LED A blinks, the
microcomputer works in order.

95 Service Diagnosis
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Problem Symptoms and Measures

2. Problem Symptoms and Measures

Symptom Check Item Details of Measure Reference
Page
The units does not operate. Check the power supply. Check to make sure that the rated voltage is —
supplied.
Check the type of the indoor units. Check to make sure that the indoor unit type is —
compatible with the outdoor unit.
Check the outdoor temperature. Heating operation cannot be used when the —
outdoor temperature is 20°C or higher, and
cooling operation cannot be used when the
outdoor temperature is below –10°C.
Diagnose with remote control — 103
indication.
Check the remote control addresses. Check to make sure that address settings for —
the remote control and indoor unit are correct.
Operation sometimes Check the power supply. A power failure of 2 to 10 cycles stops air —
stops. conditioner operation. (Operation lamp OFF)
Check the outdoor temperature. Heating operation cannot be used when the —
outdoor temperature is 20°C or higher, and
cooling operation cannot be used when the
outdoor temperature is below –10°C.
Diagnose with remote control — 103
indication.
The unit operates but does Check for wiring and piping errors in Conduct the wiring/piping error check described —
not cool, or does not heat. the connection between the indoor on the product diagnosis label.
and outdoor units.
Check for thermistor detection errors. Check to make sure that the thermistor is —
mounted securely.
Check for faulty operation of the Set the units to cooling operation, and check —
electronic expansion valve. the temperature of the liquid pipe to see the
electronic expansion valve works.
Diagnose with remote control — 103
indication.
Diagnose by service port pressure Check for refrigerant shortage. 140
and operating current.
Large operating noise and Check the output voltage of the — 151
vibrations power module.
Check the power module. — —
Check the installation condition. Check to make sure that the required spaces —
for installation (specified in the installation
manual, etc.) are provided.

Service Diagnosis 96
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Service Check Function SiENBE04-808_A

3. Service Check Function

3.1 ARC452 Series
Check Method 1 1. When the timer cancel button is held down for 5 seconds, “00” indication appears on the
temperature display section.

TIMER CANCEL button

< ARC452 Series >

2. Press the timer cancel button repeatedly until a long beep sounds.
„ The code indication changes in the sequence shown below.
No. Code No. Code No. Code
1 00 13 C7 25 UA
2 U4 14 A3 26 UH
3 L5 15 H8 27 P4
4 E6 16 H9 28 L3
5 H6 17 C9 29 L4
6 H0 18 C4 30 H7
7 A6 19 C5 31 U2
8 E7 20 J3 32 EA
9 U0 21 J6 33 AH
10 F3 22 E5 34 FA
11 A5 23 A1
12 F6 24 E1

Note: 1. A short beep “pi” and two consecutive beeps “pi pi” indicate non-corresponding codes.
2. To return to the normal mode, hold the timer cancel button down for 5 seconds. When the
remote control is left untouched for 60 seconds, it also returns to the normal mode.

97 Service Diagnosis
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Service Check Function

Check Method 2
1. Press the 3 buttons (TEMPs, TEMPt, MODE) at the same time.

(R8381)

The figure of the ten’s place blinks.

(R8382)

2. Press the TEMPs or t button and change the figure until you hear the sound of “beep” or “pi
pi”.

(R8383)

3. Diagnose by the sound.

H“pi” : The figure of the ten’s place does not accord with the error code.
H“pi pi” : The figure of the ten’s place accords with the error code but the one’s not.
H“beep” : The both figures of the ten’s and one’s place accord with the error code.
(→ See 7.)

4. Press the MODE button.

(R8384)

The figure of the one’s place blinks.

(R8385)

Service Diagnosis 98
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Service Check Function SiENBE04-808_A

5. Press the TEMPs or t button and change the figure until you hear the sound of “beep”.

(R8383)

6. Diagnose by the sound.

H“pi” : The figure of the ten’s place does not accord with the error code.
H“pi pi” : The figure of the ten’s place accords with the error code but the one’s not.
H“beep” : The both figures of the ten’s and one’s place accord with the error code.

7. Determine the error code.

The figures indicated when you hear the “beep” sound are error code.
(Error codes and description → Refer to page 103.)

8. Press the MODE button to exit from the diagnosis mode.

(R8384)

The display “ ” means the trial operation mode.

(Refer to page 287 for trial operation.)

(R9659)

9. Press the ON/OFF button twice to return to the normal mode.

(R9660)

Note: When the remote control is left untouched for 60 seconds, it returns to the normal mode.

99 Service Diagnosis
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Service Check Function

3.2 ARC433 Series

Check Method 1 1. When the timer cancel button is held down for 5 seconds, “00” indication appears on the
temperature display section.

TIMER CANCEL button

< ARC433 Series >

(R11949)

2. Press the timer cancel button repeatedly until a long beep sounds.
„ The code indication changes in the sequence shown below.
No. Code No. Code No. Code
1 00 12 F6 23 A1
2 U4 13 C7 24 E1
3 L5 14 A3 25 UA
4 E6 15 H8 26 UH
5 H6 16 H9 27 P4
6 H0 17 C9 28 L3
7 A6 18 C4 29 L4
8 E7 19 C5 30 H7
9 U0 20 J3 31 U2
10 F3 21 J6 32 EA
11 A5 22 E5 33 AH

Note: 1. A short beep “pi” and two consecutive beeps “pi pi” indicate non-corresponding codes.
2. To return to the normal mode, hold the timer cancel button down for 5 seconds. When the
remote control is left untouched for 60 seconds, it also returns to the normal mode.

Service Diagnosis 100

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Service Check Function SiENBE04-808_A

Check Method 2
1. Press the center of the TEMP button and the MODE button at the same time.

(R4272)

The figure of the ten’s place blinks.

(R4273)

2. Press the TEMPs or t button and change the figure until you hear the sound of “beep” or
“pi pi”.

(R4274)

3. Diagnose by the sound.

H“pi” : The figure of the ten’s place does not accord with the error code.
H“pi pi” : The figure of the ten’s place accords with the error code but the one’s not.
H“beep” : The both figures of the ten’s and one’s place accord with the error code.
(→ See 7.)

4. Press the MODE button.

(R4275)

The figure of the one’s place blinks.

(R4276)

101 Service Diagnosis

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Service Check Function

5. Press the TEMPs or t button and change the figure until you hear the sound of “beep”.

(R4277)

6. Diagnose by the sound.

H“pi” : The figure of the ten’s place does not accord with the error code.
H“pi pi” : The figure of the ten’s place accords with the error code but the one’s not.
H“beep” : The both figures of the ten’s and one’s place accord with the error code.

7. Determine the error code.

The figures indicated when you hear the “beep” sound are error code.
(Error codes and description → Refer to page 103.)

8. Press the MODE button to exit from the diagnosis mode.

(R4278)

The display “ ” means the trial operation mode.

(Refer to page 287 for trial operation.)

(R9669)

9. Press the ON/OFF button twice to return to the normal mode.

(R9670)

Note: When the remote control is left untouched for 60 seconds, it returns to the normal mode.

Service Diagnosis 102

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Troubleshooting SiENBE04-808_A

4. Troubleshooting
4.1 Error Codes and Description
Reference
Error Codes Description
Page
System 00 Normal —
U0H Refrigerant shortage 140
U2 Low-voltage detection or over-voltage detection 143
U4 Signal transmission error (between indoor unit and outdoor unit) 110
UA Unspecified voltage (between indoor unit and outdoor unit) 111
Indoor A1 Indoor unit PCB abnormality 104
Unit
A5 Freeze-up protection control or heating peak-cut control 105
A6 Fan motor (DC motor) or related abnormality 107
C4 Indoor heat exchanger thermistor or related abnormality 109
C9 Room temperature thermistor or related abnormality 109
Outdoor E1 Outdoor unit PCB abnormality 112
Unit
E5H OL activation (compressor overload) 114
E6H Compressor lock 115
E7 DC fan lock 116
E8 Input overcurrent detection 117
EA Four way valve abnormality 118
F3 Discharge pipe temperature control 120
F6 High pressure control in cooling 122
H0 Compressor system sensor abnormality 124
H6 Position sensor abnormality 126
DC voltage / current sensor abnormality (20/25/35/42 class) 129
H8
CT or related abnormality (50 class) 130
H9 Outdoor temperature thermistor or related abnormality 132
J3 Discharge pipe thermistor or related abnormality 132
J6 Outdoor heat exchanger thermistor or related abnormality 132
L3 Electrical box temperature rise 134
L4 Radiation fin temperature rise 136
L5 Output overcurrent detection 138
P4 Radiation fin thermistor or related abnormality 132
U7 Signal transmission error on outdoor unit PCB (50 class only) 145
H: Displayed only when system-down occurs.

103 Service Diagnosis

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Troubleshooting

4.2 Indoor Unit PCB Abnormality

Remote Control A1
Display

Method of Evaluation of zero-cross detection of power supply by the indoor unit PCB.
Malfunction
Detection

Malfunction There is no zero-cross detection in approximately 10 seconds.

Decision
Conditions

Supposed „ Wrong models interconnected

Causes „ Defective indoor unit PCB
„ Disconnection of connector

Troubleshooting
Be sure to turn off the power switch before connecting or disconnecting
Caution connectors, or parts may be damaged.

Check the combination of the

indoor and outdoor unit.

NO
OK? Match the compatible
models.

YES
* To secure the connection,
Check the connection of once disconnect the connector
connectors (See Note.). and then reconnect it.

YES
OK? Replace the indoor unit
PCB (1).

NO

Correct the connection.

YES
Error repeats? Replace the indoor unit
PCB (1).

NO
Completed.
(R11704)

Note: Check the following connector.

Model Type Connector
Wall Mounted Type Terminal board ~ Control PCB

Service Diagnosis 104

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Troubleshooting SiENBE04-808_A

4.3 Freeze-up Protection Control or Heating Peak-cut

Control
Remote Control A5
Display

Method of „ Freeze-up protection control

Malfunction During cooling operation, the freeze-up protection control (operation halt) is activated
Detection according to the temperature detected by the indoor heat exchanger thermistor.
„ Heating peak-cut control
During heating operation, the temperature detected by the indoor heat exchanger thermistor
is used for the heating peak-cut control (operation halt, outdoor fan stop, etc.)

Malfunction „ Freeze-up protection control

Decision During cooling operation, the indoor heat exchanger temperature is below 0°C.
Conditions „ Heating peak-cut control
During heating operation, the indoor heat exchanger temperature is above 65°C

Supposed „ Short-circuited air

Causes „ Clogged air filter of the indoor unit
„ Dust accumulation on the indoor heat exchanger
„ Defective indoor heat exchanger thermistor
„ Defective indoor unit PCB

105 Service Diagnosis

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting
Be sure to turn off the power switch before connecting or disconnecting
Caution connectors, or parts may be damaged.
Check No.06
Refer to P.148 Check the air passage.

YES
Is there any short circuit? Provide sufficient air passage.

NO

Check the air filter.

Is it very dirty? YES

Clean the air filter.

NO
Check the dust accumulation on
the indoor heat exchanger.

Is it very dirty? YES

Clean the indoor heat
exchanger.
NO
Check No. 06
Check the indoor heat exchanger
thermistor.

Does it
conform to the NO
thermistor characteristic Replace the thermistor.
chart?

YES
Replace the indoor unit PCB.

(R7131)

Service Diagnosis 106

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Troubleshooting SiENBE04-808_A

4.4 Fan Motor (DC Motor) or Related Abnormality

Remote Control A6
Display

Method of The rotation speed detected by the Hall IC during fan motor operation is used to determine
Malfunction abnormal fan motor operation.
Detection

Malfunction The detected rotation speed does not reach the demanded rotation speed of the target tap, and
Decision is less than 50% of the maximum fan motor rotation speed.
Conditions

Supposed „ Layer short inside the fan motor winding

Causes „ Breaking of wire inside the fan motor
„ Breaking of the fan motor lead wires
„ Defective capacitor of the fan motor
„ Defective indoor unit PCB

107 Service Diagnosis

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting
Be sure to turn off the power switch before connecting or disconnecting
Caution connectors, or parts may be damaged.
Check No.01 Turn off the power supply
Refer to P.146 and rotate the fan by hand.

Does the fan NO

rotate smoothly? Replace the indoor
fan motor.
YES
Turn the power on and
start operation.

Turn off the power supply Note : The motor may break when the
Does the NO and disconnect the fan motor connector is disconnected
fan rotate? motor connector, then while remaining power supply.
turn the power on. (Turn off the power supply before
connecting the connector also.)
YES
Check No.01
Check the output of the
fan motor connector

Is the motor
power supply NO
Replace the indoor
voltage 310 ~ 340 VDC unit PCB.
generated?

YES

Is the
motor control NO
voltage 15 VDC Replace the indoor
generated? unit PCB.

YES

Is
the rotation
command YES
voltage 1 ~ 6 VDC Replace the indoor
generated? fan motor.
Stop the fan motor.

NO
Check No.01
Check the output of the
fan motor connector
Is the rotation NO
pulse generated? Replace the indoor
fan motor and the
indoor unit PCB.
YES
Replace the indoor
Is the rotation unit PCB.
NO
pulse generated? Replace the indoor
fan motor.

YES
Replace the indoor
unit PCB.
(R12033)

Service Diagnosis 108

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Troubleshooting SiENBE04-808_A

4.5 Thermistor or Related Abnormality (Indoor Unit)

Remote Control C4C9
Display

Method of The temperatures detected by the thermistors determine thermistor errors.

Malfunction
Detection

Malfunction The thermistor input is more than 4.96 V or less than 0.04 V during compressor operation.
Decision
Conditions

Supposed „ Disconnection of connector

Causes „ Defective thermistor
„ Defective indoor unit PCB

Troubleshooting
Be sure to turn off the power switch before connecting or disconnecting
Caution connectors, or parts may be damaged.
Check No.06
Check the connection of
Refer to P.148 connectors.

Is it normal? NO
Correct the connection.

YES
Check No. 06
Check the thermistor resistance
value.

Is it normal? NO
Replace the thermistor.

YES
Replace the indoor unit PCB.

(R7134)

C4 : Indoor heat exchanger thermistor

C9 : Room temperature thermistor

109 Service Diagnosis

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Troubleshooting

4.6 Signal Transmission Error (between Indoor Unit and

Outdoor Unit)
Remote Control U4
Display

Method of The data received from the outdoor unit in indoor unit-outdoor unit signal transmission is
Malfunction checked whether it is normal.
Detection

Malfunction The data sent from the outdoor unit cannot be received normally, or the content of the data is
Decision abnormal.
Conditions

Supposed „ Wiring error

Causes „ Breaking of the connection wires between the indoor and outdoor units (wire No. 3)
„ Defective outdoor unit PCB
„ Defective indoor unit PCB
„ Disturbed power supply waveform

Troubleshooting
Be sure to turn off the power switch before connecting or disconnecting
Caution connectors, or parts may be damaged.
Check No.10 Check the indoor unit-outdoor unit
Refer to P.150 connection wires.

Is there any wiring YES

error? Correct the indoor unit-outdoor
unit connection wires.
NO
Check the voltage of the
connection wires on the indoor
terminal board between No. 1
and No. 3, and between No. 2
and No. 3.

Properly YES
insulated? Replace the connection wires
between the indoor and
∗ Before you check the LED A, outdoor units.
NO cancel the standby electricity
Check the LED A on the outdoor saving function by operating
unit PCB. fan operation with the remote
control.
∗ Wait at least for 7 sec. after
turning on the power.
NO
Is LED A blinking? Diagnose the outdoor unit
PCB.
YES
Check No.10
Check the power supply
waveform.

Is there any NO
disturbance? Replace the indoor unit PCB.

YES
Locate the cause of the
disturbance of the power supply
waveform, and correct it.

(R12160)

Service Diagnosis 110

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Troubleshooting SiENBE04-808_A

4.7 Unspecified Voltage (between Indoor Unit and Outdoor

Unit)
Remote Control UA
Display

Method of The supply power is detected for its requirements (different from pair type and multi type) by the
Malfunction indoor / outdoor transmission signal.
Detection

Malfunction The pair type and multi type are interconnected.

Decision
Conditions

Supposed „ Wrong models interconnected

Causes „ Wrong wiring of connecting wires
„ Wrong indoor unit PCB or outdoor unit PCB mounted
„ Defective indoor unit PCB
„ Defective outdoor unit PCB

Troubleshooting
Be sure to turn off the power switch before connecting or disconnecting
Caution connectors, or parts may be damaged.
Check the combination of the
indoor and outdoor unit.

NO
OK? Match the compatible models.

YES

Are the
connection wires connected NO
Correct the connection.
property?

YES
Check the code numbers
(2P01234, for example) of the
indoor and outdoor unit PCB with
the Parts List.

Matched NO
compatibly? Change for the correct PCB.

YES
Replace the indoor unit PCB
(or the outdoor unit PCB).

(R11707)

111 Service Diagnosis

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Troubleshooting

4.8 Outdoor Unit PCB Abnormality

Remote Control E1
Display

Method of „ The system follows the microprocessor program as specified.

Malfunction „ The system checks to see if the zero-cross signal comes in properly.
Detection

Malfunction „ The microprocessor program runs out of control.

Decision „ The zero-cross signal is not detected.
Conditions

Supposed „ Defective outdoor unit PCB

Causes „ Broken harness between PCBs
„ Noise
„ Momentary fall of voltage
„ Momentary power failure, etc

Troubleshooting 20/25/35/50 class

Be sure to turn off the power switch before connecting or disconnecting

Caution connectors, or parts may be damaged.
∗ Before you check the LED A,
Turn on the power again. cancel the standby electricity
saving function by operating
fan operation with the remote
control.
∗ Wait at least for 7 sec. after
NO turning on the power.
Is LED A blinking? Replace the outdoor unit
PCB.
YES
Check to see if the outdoor unit is
grounded.

Grounded? NO
Ground the system.

YES

Is the harness YES

broken? Replace the harness.

NO
Zero-cross signal
abnormality.
Replace the outdoor unit
PCB (1).
(R12161)

Service Diagnosis 112

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Troubleshooting SiENBE04-808_A

Troubleshooting 42 class

Be sure to turn off power switch before connect or disconnect connector,

Caution or parts damage may be occurred.

Turn on the power again.

Check the voltage between No.1

and No.2 on the outdoor terminal
board.

Is it normal? NO
Replace the connecting wires
∗ Before you check the LED A, between the indoor and
cancel the standby electricity outdoor units.
YES saving function by operating
fan operation with the remote
control.
∗ Wait at least for 7 sec. after
turning on the power.
NO
Is LED A blinking? Replace the outdoor unit
PCB.
YES
Check to see if the outdoor unit is
grounded.

Grounded? NO
Ground the system.

YES

Is the harness YES

broken? Replace the harness.

NO
Zero-cross signal
abnormality.
Replace the outdoor unit
PCB.
(R12188)

113 Service Diagnosis

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Troubleshooting

4.9 OL Activation (Compressor Overload)

Remote Control E5
Display

Method of A compressor overload is detected through compressor OL.

Malfunction
Detection

Malfunction „ If the error repeats twice, the system is shut down.

Decision „ Reset condition: Continuous run for about 60 minutes without any other error
Conditions ∗ The operating temperature condition is not specified.

Supposed „ Defective discharge pipe thermistor

Causes „ Defective electronic expansion valve or coil
„ Defective four way valve or coil
„ Defective outdoor unit PCB
„ Refrigerant shortage
„ Water mixed in refrigerant
„ Defective stop valve

Troubleshooting
Be sure to turn off the power switch before connecting or disconnecting
Caution connectors, or parts may be damaged.
Check No.04
Refer to P.146
Discharge pipe YES
thermistor disconnected? Insert the thermistor in
position.
Check No.05 NO
Refer to P.147
Check No. 06 NG
Check the thermistors. Replace the discharge pipe
∗ Discharge pipe thermistor thermistor.
Check No.06 OK
Refer to P.148
Check No. 04 NG
Check the electronic Replace the electronic
expansion valve. expansion valve or the coil.
Check No.11
Refer to P.150 OK

Check No. 05 NG
Check the four way valve. Replace the four way valve
or the coil.
Replace the outdoor unit
OK PCB.

Check No. 11 NG
Check the refrigerant line. Refer to the refrigerant line
∗ Refrigerant shortage check procedure.
∗ Water mixed
∗ Stop valve
OK
Replace the outdoor unit
PCB.
(R11999)

Service Diagnosis 114

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Troubleshooting SiENBE04-808_A

4.10 Compressor Lock

Remote Control E6
Display

Method of A compressor lock is detected by checking the compressor running condition through the
Malfunction position detection circuit.
Detection

Malfunction 20/25/35/42 class

Decision „ Operation stops due to overcurrent.
Conditions „ If the error repeats 16 times, the system is shut down.
„ Reset condition: Continuous run for about 11 minutes without any other error

50 class
„ A compressor lock is detected by the current waveform generated when applying high-
frequency voltage to the motor.
„ If the error repeats 16 times, the system is shut down
„ Reset condition: Continuous run for about 5 minutes without any other error

Supposed „ Compressor locked

Causes „ Compressor harness disconnected

Troubleshooting
Be sure to turn off the power switch before connecting or disconnecting
Caution connectors, or parts may be damaged.
(Precaution before turning on the power again)
Make sure the power has been off for at least
30 seconds.
Turn off the power. Disconnect the
harnesses U, V, and W.

Check with the inverter checker (∗). ∗ Inverter checker

Part No.: 1225477

NO
Normal? Correct the power supply or
replace the PM1.
(Replace the outdoor unit
YES PCB.)
Turn off the power and reconnect
the harnesses. Turn on the power
again and restart the system.

Emergency stop YES

without compressor running? Replace the compressor.

NO

System shut NO
down after errors repeated Check the electronic
several times? expansion valve.
Replace it as required.
YES
Replace the compressor.
(R8399)

115 Service Diagnosis

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Troubleshooting

4.11 DC Fan Lock

Remote Control E7
Display

Method of An error is determined with the high-voltage fan motor rotation speed detected by the Hall IC.
Malfunction
Detection

Malfunction „ The fan does not start in 15 ~ 60 seconds (depending on the model) even when the fan
Decision motor is running.
Conditions „ If the error repeats 16 times, the system is shut down.
„ Reset condition: Continuous run for about 11 minutes (50 class: 5 minutes) without any
other error

Supposed „ Disconnection of the fan motor

Causes „ Foreign matters stuck in the fan
„ Defective fan motor
„ Defective outdoor unit PCB

Troubleshooting
Be sure to turn off the power switch before connecting or disconnecting
Caution connectors, or parts may be damaged.
Check No.15
Fan motor YES
Refer to P.152 connector disconnected? Turn off the power and
reconnect the connector.

NO

Foreign matters YES

in or around the fan? Remove them.

NO

Turn on the power.

Rotate the fan.

Fan rotates NO
smoothly? Replace the outdoor fan
motor.

YES
Check No. 15
Check the rotation pulse input on
the outdoor unit PCB.

Pulse signal NO
generated? Replace the outdoor fan
motor.

YES
Replace the outdoor unit
PCB.
(R11708)

Service Diagnosis 116

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Troubleshooting SiENBE04-808_A

4.12 Input Overcurrent Detection

Remote Control E8
Display

Method of An input overcurrent is detected by checking the input current value with the compressor
Malfunction running.
Detection

Malfunction „ The following current with the compressor running continues for 2.5 seconds.
Decision Cooling / Heating: Above 9.25 ~ 20 A (Refer to “Input current control” on page 51 for detail.)
Conditions

Supposed „ Defective compressor

Causes „ Defective power module
„ Defective outdoor unit PCB
„ Short circuit

Troubleshooting
Be sure to turn off the power switch before connecting or disconnecting
Caution connectors, or parts may be damaged.
Check No.07 ∗ An input overcurrent may result from wrong internal wiring. If the wires have been disconnected and
Refer to P.149 reconnected for part replacement, for example, and the system is interrupted by an input overcurrent,
take the following procedure.
Check No. 07
Check the installation condition.
Check No.08
Refer to P.149
Start operation and measure the
input current.

Input current NO
flowing above its stop level? Replace the outdoor unit
PCB.

YES
Turn off the power and disconnect
the harnesses U, V, and W.

∗ Inverter checker
Check with the inverter checker (∗). Part No.: 1225477

Any LED off? YES

Correct the power supply or
replace the PM1.
(Replace the outdoor unit
NO PCB.)
Turn off the power, and reconnect
the harnesses. Turn on the power
again and start operation.

Check No. 08
Check the discharge pressure.
(R11709)

117 Service Diagnosis

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Troubleshooting

4.13 Four Way Valve Abnormality

Remote Control EA
Display

Method of The room temperature thermistor, the indoor heat exchanger thermistor, the outdoor
Malfunction temperature thermistor, and the outdoor heat exchanger thermistor are checked if they function
Detection within their normal ranges in each operation mode.

Malfunction A following condition continues over 1 ~ 10 minutes (depending on the model) after operating
Decision for 5 ~ 10 minutes (depending on the model).
Conditions „ Cooling / Dry
(room thermistor temp. – indoor heat exchanger temp.) < –5°C
„ Heating
(indoor heat exchanger temp. – room thermistor temp.) < –5°C

„ If the error repeats, the system is shut down.

„ Reset condition: Continuous run for about 60 minutes without any other error

Supposed „ Disconnection of four way valve coil

Causes „ Defective four way valve, coil, or harness
„ Defective outdoor unit PCB
„ Defective thermistor
„ Refrigerant shortage
„ Water mixed in refrigerant
„ Defective stop valve

Service Diagnosis 118

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Troubleshooting SiENBE04-808_A

Troubleshooting
Be sure to turn off the power switch before connecting or disconnecting
Caution connectors, or parts may be damaged.

Check No.05 Four way valve YES

Refer to P.147 coil disconnected (loose)? Correct it.

NO
Check No.06
Harness out of YES
Refer to P.148 connector? Reconnect it.

NO
Check No.11 Check the continuity of the four
Refer to P.150 way valve coil and harness.

Disconnect the harness from the

connector.

Resistance
between harnesses NO
about 1000 ~ 2000 Ω? Replace the four way valve
coil.

YES

Check No.
05 NG
Check the four way valve Replace the outdoor unit
switching output. PCB.

OK

Any thermistor YES

disconnected? Reconnect in position.

NO

Check No. 06 NG
Check the thermistors. Replace the defective
thermistor.
OK

Check No. 11 NG
Check the refrigerant line. Refer to the refrigerant line
∗ Refrigerant shortage check procedure.
∗ Water mixed
∗ Stop valve
OK
Replace the four way valve
(defective or dust-clogged).
(R11710)

119 Service Diagnosis

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Troubleshooting

4.14 Discharge Pipe Temperature Control

Remote Control F3
Display

Method of An error is determined with the temperature detected by the discharge pipe thermistor.
Malfunction
Detection

Malfunction „ If the temperature detected by the discharge pipe thermistor rises above °C, the
Decision compressor stops.
Conditions „ The error is cleared when the discharge pipe temperature has dropped below °C.

<20/25/35 class>
Stop temperatures
(°C) (°C)

(1) above 45 Hz (rising), above 40 Hz (dropping) 110 97

(2) 30 ~ 45 Hz (rising), 25 ~ 40 Hz (dropping) 105 92
(3) below 30 Hz (rising), below 25 Hz (dropping) 99 86

<42 class>
Stop temperatures
(°C) (°C)

(1) above 30Hz (rising), above 25Hz (dropping) 110 95

(2) below 30Hz (rising), below 25Hz (dropping) 108 93

<50 class>
(°C) (°C)
110 95

„ If the error repeats, the system is shut down.

„ Reset condition: Continuous run for about 60 minutes without any other error

Supposed „ Defective discharge pipe thermistor

Causes (Defective outdoor heat exchanger thermistor or outdoor temperature thermistor)
„ Defective electronic expansion valve or coil
„ Refrigerant shortage
„ Defective four way valve
„ Water mixed in refrigerant
„ Defective stop valve
„ Defective outdoor unit PCB

Service Diagnosis 120

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Troubleshooting SiENBE04-808_A

Troubleshooting
Be sure to turn off the power switch before connecting or disconnecting
Caution connectors, or parts may be damaged.
Check No.04
Refer to P.146 Check No. 06 NG
Check the thermistors. Replace the defective
• Discharge pipe thermistor thermistor.
• Outdoor heat exchanger thermistor
OK • Outdoor temperature thermistor
Check No.06
Refer to P.148 Check No. 04 NG
Check the electronic Replace the electronic
expansion valve. expansion valve or the coil.

Check No.11 OK
Refer to P.150
Check No. 11 NG
Check the refrigerant line. Refer to the refrigerant line
• Refrigerant shortage check procedure.
• Four way valve
OK • Water mixed
• Stop valve
Replace the outdoor unit
PCB.
(R7141)

121 Service Diagnosis

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Troubleshooting

4.15 High Pressure Control in Cooling

Remote Control F6
Display

Method of High-pressure control (operation halt, frequency drop, etc.) is activated in cooling operation if
Malfunction the temperature sensed by the outdoor heat exchanger thermistor exceeds the limit.
Detection

Malfunction „ The temperature sensed by the outdoor heat exchanger thermistor rises above °C.
Decision „ The error is cleared when the temperature drops below °C.
Conditions
(°C) (°C)
RK(X)S20-35G2V1B, ARXS20-35G2V1B 65 54
RK(X)S20-35G2V1B9, ARXS20-35G3V1B 65 52
RK(X)S42G2V1B, ARXS42G2V1B 65 53
RK(X)S50G2V1B, ARXS50G2V1B 65 51

Supposed „ The installation space is not large enough.

Causes „ Dirty outdoor heat exchanger
„ Defective outdoor fan motor
„ Defective stop valve
„ Defective electronic expansion valve or coil
„ Defective outdoor heat exchanger thermistor
„ Defective outdoor unit PCB

Service Diagnosis 122

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Troubleshooting SiENBE04-808_A

Troubleshooting
Be sure to turn off the power switch before connecting or disconnecting
Caution connectors, or parts may be damaged.
Check No.04
Refer to P.146 Check the installation space.

Check No.06 Check No. 07

Check the installation NG
Change the installation
Refer to P.148 condition. location or direction.
Clean the outdoor heat
OK exchanger.

Check No.07 Check No. 09 NG

Refer to P.149 Check the outdoor fan. Replace the fan motor.
Reconnect the connector or
fan motor lead wires.
OK
Check No.08
Check No. 08 NG
Refer to P.149 Check the discharge Replace the stop valve.
pressure.
OK
Check No.09
Check No. 04
Refer to P.150 Check the electronic NG
Replace the electronic
expansion valve. expansion valve or the coil.
Replace the outdoor unit
OK PCB.

Check No. 06
Check the outdoor heat NG
exchanger thermistor. Replace the outdoor heat
exchanger thermistor.

OK
Replace the outdoor unit
PCB.
(R11897)

123 Service Diagnosis

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Troubleshooting

4.16 Compressor System Sensor Abnormality

4.16.1 20/25/35/42 Class
Remote Control H0
Display

Method of „ The system checks the DC current before the compressor starts.
Malfunction
Detection

Malfunction „ The DC current before compressor start-up is out of the range 0.5 ~ 4.5 V (sensor output
Decision converted to voltage value)
Conditions „ The DC voltage before compressor start-up is below 50 V.

Supposed „ Broken or disconnection of harness

Causes „ Defective outdoor unit PCB

Troubleshooting
Be sure to turn off the power switch before connecting or disconnecting
Caution connectors, or parts may be damaged.

Check the relay harness for the

compressor.

Is the harness YES

broken? Replace the harness.

NO

Turn off the power and turn it on

again.

NO
Restart operation and error No problem.
displayed again? Keep on running.

YES
Replace the outdoor unit
PCB.
(R11712)

Service Diagnosis 124

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Troubleshooting SiENBE04-808_A

4.16.2 50 Class
Remote Control H0
Display

Method of „ The system checks the supply voltage and the DC voltage before the compressor starts.
Malfunction „ The system checks the compressor current right after the compressor starts.
Detection

Malfunction „ The supply voltage and the DC voltage is obviously low or high.
Decision „ The compressor current does not run when the compressor starts.
Conditions

Supposed „ Disconnection of reactor

Causes „ Disconnection of compressor harness
„ Defective outdoor unit PCB
„ Defective compressor

Troubleshooting
Be sure to turn off the power switch before connecting or disconnecting
Caution connectors, or parts may be damaged.

Turn off the power.

Check the connection of the

reactor.

NO
Connection OK? Connect it properly.

YES
Check the connection of the
compressor.

NO
Connection OK? Connect it properly.

YES
Disconnect the reactor from the outdoor
Check the reactor. unit PCB and measure the resistance
value between reactor terminals with
tester.

NO
10 Ω or less? Replace the reactor.

YES
Disconnect the compressor relay harness
Check the compressor. from the outdoor unit PCB and measure
the resistance value between the each 3
terminals of the compressor with tester.

Between all each NO

terminal 10 Ω or less? Replace the compressor or
the compressor relay
harness.
YES
Restart the operation again
and if the error occurs
again, replace the outdoor
unit PCB.
(R7174)

125 Service Diagnosis

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Troubleshooting

4.17 Position Sensor Abnormality

Remote Control H6
Display

Method of A compressor start-up failure is detected by checking the compressor running condition through
Malfunction the position detection circuit.
Detection

Malfunction „ If the error repeats, the system is shut down.

Decision „ Reset condition: Continuous run for about 11 minutes (50 class: 5 minutes) without any
Conditions other error

Supposed „ Disconnection of the compressor relay cable

Causes „ Defective compressor
„ Defective outdoor unit PCB
„ Start-up failure caused by the closed stop valve
„ Input voltage is out of specification

Service Diagnosis 126

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Troubleshooting SiENBE04-808_A

Troubleshooting 20/25/35/42 class

Be sure to turn off the power switch before connecting or disconnecting
Caution connectors, or parts may be damaged.
Check No.29
Refer to P.153 Turn off the power.

Check the power supply voltage.

NO
Voltage as rated? Correct the power supply.

YES
Check No. 29
Check the short circuit of the diode
bridge.

NO
Normal? Replace the outdoor unit
PCB or the outdoor fan.
YES

Check the connection.

Electrical
components or NO
compressor harnesses Reconnect them as
connected as specified.
specified?

YES
Turn on the power.
Check the electrolytic capacitor
voltage.

NO
320 ± 50 VDC? Replace the outdoor unit
PCB.
YES
Turn off the power. Disconnect the
harnesses U, V, and W.

Check with the inverter checker ∗ Inverter checker

(∗). Part No.: 1225477

YES
Any LED OFF? Correct the power supply or
replace the outdoor unit
PCB.
NO
Replace the compressor.
(R11380)

127 Service Diagnosis

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting 50 class
Be sure to turn off the power switch before connecting or disconnecting
Caution connectors, or parts may be damaged.

Turn off the power.

Check the power supply voltage.

NO
Voltage as rated? Correct the power supply.

YES

Check the connection.

Electrical
components or NO
compressor harnesses Reconnect them as
connected as specified.
specified?

YES
Turn on the power.
Check the electrolytic capacitor
voltage.

NO
320 ± 50 VDC? Replace the outdoor unit
PCB.
YES
Turn off the power. Disconnect the
harnesses U, V, and W.

∗ Inverter checker
Check with the inverter checker (∗). Part No.: 1225477

YES
Any LED OFF? Correct the power supply or
replace the outdoor unit
PCB.
NO
Replace the compressor.
(R11471)

Service Diagnosis 128

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Troubleshooting SiENBE04-808_A

4.18 DC Voltage / Current Sensor Abnormality (20/25/35/42

Class)
Remote Control H8
Display

Method of DC voltage or DC current sensor abnormality is identified based on the compressor running
Malfunction frequency and the input current.
Detection

Malfunction „ The compressor running frequency is above 52 Hz.

Decision „ If the error repeats 4 times, the system is shut down.
Conditions „ Reset condition: Continuous run for about 60 minutes without any other error

Supposed „ Defective outdoor unit PCB

Causes

Troubleshooting
Be sure to turn off the power switch before connecting or disconnecting
Caution connectors, or parts may be damaged.

Replace the outdoor unit PCB.

129 Service Diagnosis

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Troubleshooting

4.19 CT or Related Abnormality (50 Class)

Remote Control H8
Display

Method of A CT or related error is detected by checking the compressor running frequency and CT-
Malfunction detected input current.
Detection

Malfunction „ The compressor running frequency is more than 55 Hz, and the CT input current is below
Decision 0.5 A.
Conditions „ If the error repeats 4 times, the system is shut down.
„ Reset condition: Continuous run for about 60 minutes without any other error

Supposed „ Defective power module

Causes „ Breakage of wiring or disconnection
„ Defective reactor
„ Defective outdoor unit PCB

Service Diagnosis 130

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Troubleshooting SiENBE04-808_A

Troubleshooting
Be sure to turn off the power switch before connecting or disconnecting
Caution connectors, or parts may be damaged.
Check No.12
Turn off the power and turn it on
Refer to P.151 again.

Start operation.

∗ Running
current as shown at right YES
with relay cable 1 or 2? Replace the outdoor unit
Current Capacitor charged when PCB.
(guideline) the indoor unit or outdoor
unit main relay turns on
NO
Check No. 12 Rising with increasing
Check the capacitor voltage. frequency

2 sec Time

YES Turn off the power. Disconnect the

320 ± 50 VDC? harnesses U, V, and W.

NO
∗ Inverter checker Part
Check with the inverter checker (∗). No.: 1225477
Measure the rectifier input voltage.

YES
Any LED OFF? Correct the power supply or
replace the PM1.
(Replace the outdoor unit
NO PCB.)
Turn off the power and reconnect
the harnesses. Then turn on the
power again and restart operation.

YES
Compressor running? Replace the outdoor unit
PCB.

NO
Replace the compressor.
Voltage within
the allowable range YES
Replace the outdoor unit
(Supply voltage ± 15%)? PCB.

NO
Check the supply voltage.

(R11134)

131 Service Diagnosis

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Troubleshooting

4.20 Thermistor or Related Abnormality (Outdoor Unit)

Remote Control H9, J3, J6, P4
Display

Method of This fault is identified based on the thermistor input voltage to the microcomputer.
Malfunction A thermistor fault is identified based on the temperature sensed by each thermistor.
Detection

Malfunction „ The thermistor input voltage is above 4.96 V (42 class: 4.98 V) or below 0.04 V (42 class:
Decision 0.02 V) with the power on.
Conditions „ J3 error is judged if the discharge pipe temperature is lower than the heat exchanger
temperature.

Supposed „ Disconnection of the connector for the thermistor

Causes „ Defective thermistor
„ Defective heat exchanger thermistor in the case of J3 error (outdoor heat exchanger
thermistor in cooling operation, or indoor heat exchanger thermistor in heating operation)
„ Defective outdoor unit PCB
„ Defective indoor unit PCB

Troubleshooting In case of “P4”

Be sure to turn off the power switch before connecting or disconnecting

Caution connectors, or parts may be damaged.

Replace the outdoor unit PCB.

P4 : Radiation fin thermistor

Service Diagnosis 132

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Troubleshooting SiENBE04-808_A

Troubleshooting In case of “H9” “J3” “J6”

Be sure to turn off the power switch before connecting or disconnecting

Caution connectors, or parts may be damaged.
Check No.06
Refer to P.148 Turn on the power again.

Error displayed NO
again on remote control? Reconnect the connectors
or thermistors.
YES
Check No. 06
Check the thermistor resistance
value.

NO
Normal? Replace the defective
one(s) of the following
J3 error: the discharge thermistors.
pipe temperature is YES ∗ Outdoor temperature
lower than the heat thermistor
exchanger temperature. ∗ Outdoor heat exchanger
Cooling: Outdoor heat thermistor
exchanger ∗ Discharge pipe thermistor
temperature
Heating: Indoor heat
exchanger
temperature
Check No. 06
Check the indoor heat exchanger
thermistor resistance value in the
heating operation.

Indoor heat NO
exchanger thermistor Replace the indoor heat
functioning? exchanger thermistor.

YES
Replace the outdoor unit
PCB.
(Replace the indoor unit
PCB.)
(R11905)

H9 : Outdoor temperature thermistor

J3 : Discharge pipe thermistor
J6 : Outdoor heat exchanger thermistor

133 Service Diagnosis

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Troubleshooting

4.21 Electrical Box Temperature Rise

Remote Control L3
Display

Method of An electrical box temperature rise is detected by checking the radiation fin thermistor with the
Malfunction compressor off.
Detection

Malfunction „ With the compressor off, the radiation fin temperature is above °C.
Decision „ The error is cleared when the radiation fin temperature drops below °C.
Conditions „ To cool the electrical components, the outdoor fan starts when the radiation fin temperature
rises above °C and stops when it drops below °C.

(°C) (°C) (°C)

RK(X)S20-35G2V1B, ARXS20-35G2V1B 80 70 80
RK(X)S20-35G2V1B9, ARXS20-35G3V1B 98 75 83
RK(X)S42G2V1B, ARXS42G2V1B 80 70 75
RK(X)S50G2V1B, ARXS50G2V1B 95 80 85

Supposed „ Defective outdoor fan motor

Causes „ Short circuit
„ Defective radiation fin thermistor
„ Disconnection of connector
„ Defective outdoor unit PCB

Service Diagnosis 134

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Troubleshooting SiENBE04-808_A

Troubleshooting
Be sure to turn off the power switch before connecting or disconnecting
Caution connectors, or parts may be damaged.
Check No.07 Turn off the power and turn it on WARNING
again.
Refer to P.149 To cool the electrical components,
the outdoor fan starts when the
radiation fin temperature rises
above °C and stops when it
Check No.09 drops below °C.
Refer to P.150 Error again or YES
outdoor fan activated?

NO
Check the radiation fin
temperature.

Above °C? NO
Replace the outdoor unit
PCB.

YES

Check No. 09 NG
Check the outdoor fan or Replace the fan motor.
related. Correct the connectors
and fan motor lead wire.
OK Replace the outdoor unit
PCB.

Too dirty
Radiation fin dirty? Clean up the radiation fin.

Slightly dirty

Check No. 07
Check the installation condition.

(R12000)

(°C) (°C) (°C)

RK(X)S20-35G2V1B, ARXS20-35G2V1B 80 70 80
RK(X)S20-35G2V1B9, ARXS20-35G3V1B 98 75 83
RK(X)S42G2V1B, ARXS42G2V1B 80 70 75
RK(X)S50G2V1B, ARXS50G2V1B 95 80 85

135 Service Diagnosis

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Troubleshooting

4.22 Radiation Fin Temperature Rise

Remote Control L4
Display

Method of A radiation fin temperature rise is detected by checking the radiation fin thermistor with the
Malfunction compressor on.
Detection

Malfunction „ If the radiation fin temperature with the compressor on is above °C.
Decision „ The error is cleared when the radiation fin temperature drops below °C.
Conditions „ If the error repeats, the system is shut down.
„ Reset condition: Continuous run for about 60 minutes without any other error

(°C) (°C)
RK(X)S20-35G2V1B, ARXS20-35G2V1B 90 85
RK(X)S20-35G2V1B9, ARXS20-35G3V1B 98 78
RK(X)S42G2V1B, ARXS42G2V1B 92.5 85
RK(X)S50G2V1B, ARXS50G2V1B 105 99

Supposed „ Defective outdoor fan motor

Causes „ Short circuit
„ Defective radiation fin thermistor
„ Disconnection of connector
„ Defective outdoor unit PCB
„ Silicon grease is not applied properly on the radiation fin after replacing the outdoor unit
PCB.

Service Diagnosis 136

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Troubleshooting SiENBE04-808_A

Troubleshooting
Be sure to turn off the power switch before connecting or disconnecting
Caution connectors, or parts may be damaged.
Check No.07
Turn off the power and turn it on
Refer to P.149 again to start the system.

Check No.09
Refer to P.150

YES YES
Error displayed again? Has PCB been replaced? Check if the silicon grease
applied properly on the
radiation fin. If not, apply it
NO NO (∗). (See Note.)
Check the radiation fin ∗ Silicon grease
temperature. Part No.: 1172698

NO
Above °C? Check the power transistor
and the radiation fin for
looseness. If they are found
YES to be fit tightly, replace the
outdoor unit PCB or the
power transistor.
Check No. 09 NG
Check the outdoor unit fan or Replace the fan motor.
related. Correct the connectors
and fan motor leads.
OK Replace the outdoor unit
PCB.

Too dirty
Radiation fin dirty? Clean up the radiation fin.

Slightly dirty

Check No. 07
Check the installation condition.
(R12001)

(°C)

RK(X)S20-35G2V1B, ARXS20-35G2V1B 90
RK(X)S20-35G2V1B9, ARXS20-35G3V1B 98
RK(X)S42G2V1B, ARXS42G2V1B 92.5
RK(X)S50G2V1B, ARXS50G2V1B 105

Note: Refer to “Application of silicon grease to a power transistor and a diode bridge” on page 293 for
detail.

137 Service Diagnosis

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Troubleshooting

4.23 Output Overcurrent Detection

Remote Control L5
Display

Method of An output overcurrent is detected by checking the current that flows in the inverter DC section.
Malfunction
Detection

Malfunction „ A position signal error occurs while the compressor is running.

Decision „ A speed error occurs while the compressor is running.
Conditions „ An output overcurrent signal is fed from the output overcurrent detection circuit to the
microcomputer.
„ If the error repeats, the system is shut down.
„ Reset condition: Continuous run for about 11 minutes (50 class: 5 minutes) without any
other error

Supposed „ Poor installation condition

Causes „ Closed stop valve
„ Defective power module
„ Wrong internal wiring
„ Abnormal supply voltage
„ Defective outdoor unit PCB
„ Defective compressor

Service Diagnosis 138

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Troubleshooting SiENBE04-808_A

Troubleshooting Be sure to turn off the power switch before connecting or disconnecting
Caution connectors, or parts may be damaged.
∗ An output overcurrent signal may result from wrong internal wiring. If the wires have been
Check No.07 disconnected and reconnected and the system is interrupted by an output overcurrent, take the
Refer to P.149 following procedure.
Check No. 07
Check the installation condition.

Check No.08
Refer to P.149
NO
Stop valve fully open? Fully open the stop valve.

Check No.13
YES
Refer to P.151
Turn off the power and turn it on
again to start the system. See if
the same error occurs.

NO Monitor the supply voltage,

Error again? discharge and suction pressures,
and other factors for a long term.
YES Possible causes
Turn off the power and disconnect ∗ Instantaneous supply voltage
the harnesses U, V, and W. drop Keep on using as it is.
∗ Compressor overloaded
∗ Short circuit Check the connectors and
other components.

Check with the inverter checker (∗). ∗ Inverter checker

Part No.: 1225477

YES
Any LED off? Correct the power supply or
replace the PM1.
(Replace the outdoor unit
NO PCB.)
Check No. 13
Check the power module.

NO
Normal? Replace the PM1.
(Replace the outdoor unit
YES PCB.)
Turn off the power, and reconnect
the harnesses. Turn on the power
again and start operation.

Check the supply voltage.

NO
Voltage as rated? Correct the power supply.

YES

Short circuit
or wire breakage YES
between compressor's coil Replace the compressor.
phases?

NO
Check No. 08
Check the discharge pressure.
(R12016)

139 Service Diagnosis

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Troubleshooting

4.24 Refrigerant Shortage

Remote Control U0
Display

Method of Refrigerant shortage detection I:

Malfunction Refrigerant shortage is detected by checking the input current value and the compressor
Detection running frequency. If the refrigerant is short, the input current is smaller than the normal value.

Refrigerant shortage detection II:

Refrigerant shortage is detected by checking the discharge pipe temperature and the opening of
the electronic expansion valve. If the refrigerant is short, the discharge pipe temperature tends
to rise.

Refrigerant shortage detection III:

Refrigerant shortage is detected by checking the difference between suction and discharge
temperature.

Malfunction Refrigerant shortage detection I:

Decision The following conditions continue for 7 minutes.
Conditions
<20/25/35/42 class>
Š Input current × input voltage ≤ × output frequency +
Š Output frequency >

(–) (W) (Hz)

20/25/35 class 640/256 0 55
42 class 3446/256 –346 48

<50 class>
Š Input current ≤ × output frequency +
Š Output frequency >
(–) (A) (Hz)
50 class 18/1000 0.7 55

Refrigerant shortage detection II :

The following conditions continue for 80 seconds.
Š Opening of the electronic expansion valve ≥
Š Discharge pipe temperature > × target discharge pipe temperature +
(pulse) (–) (°C)
20/25/35 class 480 128/128 30
42 class 450 128/128 40
50 class 480 128/128 cooling: 20, heating: 45

Service Diagnosis 140

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Troubleshooting SiENBE04-808_A

Refrigerant shortage detection III : (20/25/35 class only)

When the difference of the temperature is smaller than °C, it is regarded as refrigerant
shortage.
(°C)
room thermistor temperature – indoor heat exchanger temperature 4.0
Cooling
outdoor heat exchanger temperature – outdoor temperature 4.0
indoor heat exchanger temperature – room thermistor temperature 3.0
Heating
outdoor temperature – outdoor heat exchanger temperature 3.0

„ If the error repeats 4 times, the system is shut down.

„ Reset condition: Continuous run for about 60 minutes without any other error

Supposed „ Disconnection of the discharge pipe thermistor, indoor or outdoor heat exchanger thermistor,
Causes room or outdoor temperature thermistor
„ Closed stop valve
„ Refrigerant shortage (refrigerant leakage)
„ Poor compression performance of compressor
„ Defective electronic expansion valve

141 Service Diagnosis

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting
Be sure to turn off the power switch before connecting or disconnecting
Caution connectors, or parts may be damaged.
Check No.04
Refer to P.146 Any thermistor YES
disconnected? Replace them in position.
∗ Discharge pipe thermistor
∗ Indoor or outdoor heat exchanger thermistor
NO ∗ Room temperature thermistor
Check No.06 ∗ Outdoor temperature thermistor
Refer to P.148 YES
Stop valve closed? Open the stop valve.

NO

Check for refrigerant shortage.

Oil oozing at YES

relay pipe connections? Repair the pipe flare or
replace the union.

NO

Oil oozing at YES

internal piping?

NO Compressor YES Check the power transistor

vibrating too much? harness for looseness.
Correct it as required. Also
replace the cracked pipe.
NO
Check the pipes for
improper contact. Correct
them as required. Also
replace the cracked pipe.
Check No. 04
Electronic expansion valve Replace the electronic
functioning? NO expansion valve.

YES

Change for a specified amount of

fresh refrigerant.

Refrigerant YES
shortage error again?

NO Check No. 06 NG
Check the thermistors. Replace the defective
one(s).

OK

Replace the outdoor unit PCB.

Error again? YES

Replace the compressor.

NO
Completed.

Completed.

(R12015)

Service Diagnosis 142

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Troubleshooting SiENBE04-808_A

4.25 Low-voltage Detection or Over-voltage Detection

Remote Control U2
Display

Method of Low-voltage detection:

Malfunction An abnormal voltage drop is detected by the DC voltage detection circuit.
Detection
Over-voltage detection:
An abnormal voltage rise is detected by the over-voltage detection circuit.

Malfunction Low-voltage detection:

Decision „ The voltage detected by the DC voltage detection circuit is below 150 ~ 180 V (depending on
Conditions the model).

Over-voltage detection:
„ An over-voltage signal is fed from the over-voltage detection circuit to the microcomputer.
(The voltage is over 400 V.)
„ If the error repeats, the system is shut down.
„ Reset condition: Continuous run for about 11 minutes (50 class: 5 minutes) without any
other error

Supposed „ Supply voltage is not as specified.

Causes „ Defective DC voltage detection circuit
„ Defective over-voltage detection circuit
„ Defective PAM control part
„ Layer short inside the fan motor winding

143 Service Diagnosis

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting Be sure to turn off the power switch before connecting or disconnecting
Caution connectors, or parts may be damaged.

Check the supply voltage.

Supply voltage NO
as specified? Correct the power supply.

YES

Rotate the fan by hand.

Does the fan NO

rotate smoothly? Replace the fan motor or
the outdoor unit PCB.

YES

(Precaution before turning on the power again)

Make sure the power has been off for

Turn on the YES Disturbance factors

power again. System ∗ Noise ∗ Power supply distortion Check for such factors for a
restarted? long term.
∗ Try to restart a few times.
NO

Repeat a few
times.
Replace the PM1. (Replace
the outdoor unit PCB.)

(R8402)

Service Diagnosis 144

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Troubleshooting SiENBE04-808_A

4.26 Signal Transmission Error on Outdoor Unit PCB

(50 Class Only)
Remote Control U7
Display

Method of Communication error between microcomputer mounted on the main microcomputer and PM1.
Malfunction
Detection

Malfunction „ The abnormality is determined when the data sent from the PM1 can not be received for 9
Decision seconds.
Conditions „ The error counter is reset when the data from the PM1 can be successfully received.

Supposed „ Defective outdoor unit PCB

Causes

Troubleshooting

Be sure to turn off the power switch before connecting or disconnecting

Caution connectors, or parts may be damaged.

Turn off the power and turn it on

again.

YES
Error again? Replace the outdoor unit
PCB.

NO
The cause can be an
external factor other than
the malfunction.
Observe the operating
condition in long term.

(R7185)

145 Service Diagnosis

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Check

5. Check
5.1 How to Check
5.1.1 Fan Motor Connector Output Check
Check No.01 1. Check the connection of connector.
2. Check the motor power supply voltage output (pins 4 - 7).
3. Check the motor control voltage (pins 4 - 3).
4. Check the rotation command voltage (pins 4 - 2).
5. Check the rotation pulse (pins 4 - 1).
S1
7 Motor power supply voltage (310 ~ 340 VDC)
6 Unused
5 Unused
4 GND
3 Motor control voltage (15 VDC)
2 Rotation command voltage (1 ~ 6 VDC)
1 Rotation pulse
(R12099)

5.1.2 Electronic Expansion Valve Check

Check No.04 Conduct the followings to check the electronic expansion valve (EV).
1. Check to see if the EV connector is correctly connected to the PCB.
2. Turn the power off and on again, and check to see if the EV generate latching sound.
3. If the EV does not generate latching sound in the above step 2, disconnect the connector
and check the continuity using a tester.
4. Check the continuity between the pins 1 - 6 and 3 - 6, and between the pins 2 - 5 and 4 - 5. If
there is no continuity between the pins, the EV coil is faulty.
Harness 6P

5-2
5-4
6P Connector Check
6-1
6-3
1 2 3 4 5 6
(R1082)

5. If the continuity is confirmed in the above step 3, the outdoor unit PCB is faulty.

Note: Please note that the latching sound varies depending on the valve type.

Service Diagnosis 146

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Check SiENBE04-808_A

5.1.3 Four Way Valve Performance Check

Check No.05
Turn off the power and turn it on
again.

∗ Four way valve coil

Start heating operation. Cooling / Dry : No continuity
Heating : Continuity

S80 voltage at NO
220 - 240 VAC with Replace the outdoor unit
compressor on? PCB.
(Fig. 1)
YES
Disconnect the four way valve coil
from the connector and check the
continuity.

Four way valve NO

coil resistance at 1000 ~ Replace the four way valve
2000 Ω? coil.

YES
Replace the four way valve.

(R11903)

(Fig. 1)
Voltage at S80

220 - 240 VAC

Time
Compressor
ON
(R11904)

147 Service Diagnosis

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Check

5.1.4 Thermistor Resistance Check

Check No.06 Disconnect the connectors of the thermistors from the PCB, and measure the resistance of
each thermistor using tester.
The relationship between normal temperature and resistance is shown in the table and the
graph below.

Thermistor R25°C = 20 kΩ, B = 3950

Temperature (°C)
–20 211.0 (kΩ)
–15 150.0
–10 116.5
–5 88.0
0 67.2
5 51.9
10 40.0
15 31.8
20 25.0
25 20.0
30 16.0
35 13.0
40 10.6
45 8.7
50 7.2

(kΩ)
150

100

50

-15 0 15 30 45
(°C) (R11905)

Tester

Resistance range

(R11906)

„ For the models in which the thermistor is directly mounted on the PCB, disconnect the
connector for the PCB and measure.
RTH1

Tester (R3460)

Service Diagnosis 148

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Check SiENBE04-808_A

5.1.5 Installation Condition Check

Check No.07

Installation condition check

Check the
allowable
dimensions of the air Abnormal
suction and discharge area. Change the installation
location or direction.

Normal

Is the
discharged air YES
short-circuited? Change the installation
location or direction.

NO

Is the outdoor YES

heat exchanger very dirty? Clean the outdoor heat
exchanger.

NO

Is the
airflow blocked by
obstacles or winds blowing YES
in the opposite direction? Change the installation
location or direction.

NO
Check the outdoor temperature.
(The outdoor temperature
should be 46°C or lower.)
(R9459)

5.1.6 Discharge Pressure Check

Check No.08

Discharge pressure check

NO
High? Replace the compressor.

YES

NO
Is the stop valve open? Open the stop valve.

YES

Is the connection YES

pipe deformed? Replace the pipe installed at
the site.

NO
Is
the air filter or Dirty
indoor / outdoor heat Clean the dirty one.
exchanger dirty?
Not dirty
Replace the compressor.
(R11718)

149 Service Diagnosis

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Check

5.1.7 Outdoor Fan System Check

Check No.09 DC motor

Check the outdoor fan system.

Outdoor fan NO Fan motor lead YES

running? wire connector disconnected? Reconnect the connector.

YES NO

Outdoor fan system is functioning. Go to Check No. 15.

(R7159)

5.1.8 Power Supply Waveforms Check

Check No.10 Measure the power supply waveform between No. 1 and No. 2 on the terminal board, and check
the waveform disturbance.
„ Check to see if the power supply waveform is a sine wave. (Fig.1)
„ Check to see if there is waveform disturbance near the zero cross. (sections circled in Fig.2)
Fig.1 Fig.2

5.1.9 Inverter Units Refrigerant System Check

Check No.11

Refrigerant system check

Is the
discharge pipe
thermistor disconnected YES
Place the thermistor.
from the holder?

NO
Check for refrigerant leakage.
See the service diagnosis on
refrigerant shortage (U0).

Replace the refrigerant.

(R8259)

Service Diagnosis 150

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Check SiENBE04-808_A

5.1.10 Capacitor Voltage Check

Check No.12 Before this check, be sure to check the main circuit for short circuit.
With the circuit breaker still on, measure the voltage according to the drawing of the model in
question. Be careful never to touch any live parts.
Multimeter
(DC voltage range)
Reactor lead wire

OL lead wire
Thermistor lead wire

Four way valve

lead wire

Compressor lead wire

Fan motor lead wire Electronic expansion valve
lead wire

(R5222)

5.1.11 Power Module Check

Check No.13

Note: Check to make sure that the voltage between (+) and (–) of the diode bridge (DB1) is approx.
0 V before checking.

„ Disconnect the compressor harness connector from the outdoor unit PCB. To disengage the
connector, press the protrusion on the connector.
„ Follow the procedure below to measure resistance between the terminals of the DB1 and
the terminals of the compressor with a multi-tester. Evaluate the measurement results for a
judgment.

Negative (–) terminal of DB1 (+) UVW DB1 (–) UVW

tester (positive terminal
(+) for digital tester)
Positive (+) terminal of UVW DB1 (+) UVW DB1 (–)
tester (negative terminal
(–) for digital tester)
Resistance in OK several kΩ ~ several MΩ
Resistance in NG 0 Ω or ∞

151 Service Diagnosis

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Check

5.1.12 Rotation Pulse Check on the Outdoor Unit PCB

Check No.15 RK(X)S20-50G2V1B, ARXS20-50G2V1B
Make sure that the voltage of 320 ± 30 V is applied.
1. Set operation off and power off. Disconnect the connector S70.
2. Check that the voltage between the pins 4 - 7 is 320 VDC.
3. Check that the control voltage between the pins 3 - 4 is 15 VDC.
4. Check that the rotation command voltage between the pins 2 - 4 is 0 ~ 15 VDC.
5. Keep operation off and power off. Connect the connector S70.
6. Check whether 2 pulses (0 ~ 15 VDC) are output at the pins 1 - 4 when the fan motor is
rotated 1 turn by hand.

When the fuse is melted, check the outdoor fan motor for proper function.
If NG in step 2 → Defective PCB → Replace the outdoor unit PCB.
If NG in step 4 → Defective Hall IC → Replace the outdoor fan motor.
If OK in both steps 2 and 4 → Replace the outdoor unit PCB.

PCB

S70
1 Actual rotation pulse output (0 ~ 15VDC)
2 Rotation command pulse input (0 ~ 15VDC)
3 15 VDC
4
5
6
7 320 VDC

(R10811)

RK(X)S20-35G2V1B9, ARXS20-35G3V1B
1. Check that the voltage between the pins 10 - 11 is 15 VDC.
2. Check if the Hall IC generates the rotation pulse (0 ~ 15 VDC) 4 times between the pins 10 -
12, 10 - 13, when the fan motor is manually rotated once.

S70

13 HV (Hall IC)

12 HU (Hall IC)

11 15 VDC

10

9 Free pin

8 Free pin

7 Phase W

6 Free pin

5 Free pin

4 Phase V

3 Free pin

2 Free pin

1 Phase U

(R11907)

Service Diagnosis 152

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Check SiENBE04-808_A

5.1.13 Main Circuit Short Check

Check No.29

Note: Check to make sure that the voltage between (+) and (–) of the diode bridge (DB1) is approx.
0 V before checking.

„ Measure the resistance between the pins of the DB1 as below.

„ If the resistance is ∞ or less than 1 kΩ, short circuit occurs on the main circuit.
(–) terminal of the tester
(in case of digital, ~ (2, 3) + (4) ~ (2, 3) – (1)
(+) terminal)
(+) terminal of the tester
(in case of digital, + (4) ~ (2, 3) – (1) ~ (2, 3)
(–) terminal)
several kΩ several kΩ
Resistance in OK ∞ ∞
~ several MΩ ~ several MΩ
Resistance in NG 0 Ω or ∞ 0 0 0 Ω or ∞

20/25/35 class

– ~ ~ +
1

– +
Tester
2

(R12035)

42 class
– ~ ~ +

1
– +

Tester
2

(R12266)

153 Service Diagnosis

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A

Part 7
Removal Procedure
1. Indoor Unit...........................................................................................155
1.1 Removal of Air Filter.............................................................................155
1.2 Removal of Front Panel........................................................................157
1.3 Removal of Front Grille ........................................................................159
1.4 Removal of Horizontal Blades / Vertical Blades ...................................162
1.5 Removal of Electrical Box ....................................................................165
1.6 Removal of PCB...................................................................................168
1.7 Removal of Indoor Heat Exchanger .....................................................173
1.8 Removal of Swing Motors ....................................................................176
1.9 Removal of Fan Motor..........................................................................180
2. Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S20-35G2V1B, ARXS20-35G2V1B ...................183
2.1 Removal of Outer Panels / Fan Motor..................................................183
2.2 Removal of Electrical Box ....................................................................192
2.3 Removal of Thermistors .......................................................................196
2.4 Removal of PCB...................................................................................198
2.5 Removal of Reactor / Partition Plate ....................................................201
2.6 Removal of Sound Blanket...................................................................203
2.7 Removal of Four Way Valve.................................................................204
2.8 Removal of Compressor.......................................................................207
3. Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S20-35G2V1B9, ARXS20-35G3V1B .................209
3.1 Removal of Outer Panels / Fan Motor..................................................209
3.2 Removal of Electrical Box ....................................................................218
3.3 Removal of PCB...................................................................................221
3.4 Removal of Reactor / Partition Plate ....................................................229
3.5 Removal of Sound Blanket...................................................................231
3.6 Removal of Four Way Valve.................................................................233
3.7 Removal of Compressor.......................................................................236
4. Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S42G2V1B, ARXS42G2V1B .............................238
4.1 Removal of Outer Panels .....................................................................238
4.2 Removal of Electrical Box ....................................................................240
4.3 Removal of PCB...................................................................................245
4.4 Removal of Sound Blanket...................................................................250
4.5 Removal of Outdoor Fan / Fan Motor...................................................252
4.6 Removal of Thermistors .......................................................................255
4.7 Removal of Four Way Valve / Electronic Expansion Valve ..................256
4.8 Removal of Compressor.......................................................................259
5. Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S50G2V1B, ARXS50G2V1B .............................262
5.1 Removal of Outer Panels .....................................................................262
5.2 Removal of Outdoor Fan / Fan Motor...................................................266
5.3 Removal of Electrical Box ....................................................................270
5.4 Removal of PCB...................................................................................275
5.5 Removal of Sound Blanket / Thermistors.............................................278
5.6 Removal of Four Way Valve.................................................................280
5.7 Removal of Electronic Expansion Valve...............................................281
5.8 Removal of Compressor.......................................................................282
Removal Procedure 154
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Indoor Unit SiENBE04-808_A

1. Indoor Unit
1.1 Removal of Air Filter
Procedure Warning Be sure to wait 10 minutes or more after turning off all power supplies
before disassembling work.
Step Procedure Points
1. Appearance features
Warning
Dangerous: High voltage
A high voltage is applied to
all the electric circuits of this
product including
thermistors.
„ When the signal receiver
catches a signal from the
(R7900) remote control, the receiving
tone sounds and the
operation lamp blinks
Signal receiver
immediately to confirm the
Operation lamp signal reception.
„ When the ON/OFF button is
TIMER lamp
kept pressed for 5 seconds,
the forced cooling operation
INTELLIGENT
EYE lamp is performed for about 15
minutes.
INTELLIGENT
EYE sensor

ON / OFF button Room temperature thermistor

(R7901)

2. Remove the air filter.

1 Hold the both sides of Front panel
the front panel, and
open the panel to the
position where it stops.

(R7902)

2 Slightly push up the „ The air filter is not marked

center knob of the air for difference between the
filter and release the right and left sides.
hooks. „ The air filter can be set
easily by inserting it along
3 Pull out the air filter the guides.
downward and remove „ Insert the air filter with the
it. "FRONT"-mark faced up.
„ Be sure to insert the hooks
Air filter
(at 2 lower positions) when
(R7903) mounting the air filter.

155 Removal Procedure

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Indoor Unit

Step Procedure Points

3. Remove the Titanium
apatite photocatalytic air-
purifying filter.
1 The Titanium apatite „ The Titanium apatite
photocatalytic air- Air filter photocatalytic air-purifying
purifying filter ASSY is filter is not marked for
attached to the back of difference between the right
the air filter. and left sides.

Titanium apatite
photocatalytic
air-purifying filter ASSY
(R7904)

2 Remove the Titanium

apatite photocatalytic
air-purifying filter ASSY
by bending the air filter
and unfastening the
projections from the air
filter frame.

Projections

(R7905)

3 Remove the Titanium

apatite photocatalytic
air-purifying filter from
its frame (at 5 positions)
by bending it.

(R4311)

Removal Procedure 156

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Indoor Unit SiENBE04-808_A

1.2 Removal of Front Panel

Procedure Warning Be sure to wait 10 minutes or more after turning off all power supplies
before disassembling work.
Step Procedure Points
1 Hold the both sides of
Front panel
the front panel, and
open the panel over the
position where it stops.

(R7906)

2 Slide the left rotary

shaft to the right and
release it.
Rotary shaft

(R7907)

3 Slide the right rotary

shaft to the left and
release it.

Rotary shaft (R7909)

4 Remove the front panel.

(R7910)

157 Removal Procedure

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Indoor Unit

Step Procedure Points

5 When mounting the Caution on Mounting
Shaft
front panel, make sure „ When mounting the front
that the shaft is fitted in panel, fit the right and left
the guide before closing rotary shafts one by one into
the panel. the grooves and fully push
them in position.

(R7908)

Removal Procedure 158

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Indoor Unit SiENBE04-808_A

1.3 Removal of Front Grille

Procedure Warning Be sure to wait 10 minutes or more after turning off all power supplies
before disassembling work.
Step Procedure Points
1. Remove the service cover.
1 Remove the screw of Preparation
Service cover
the service cover. „ Remove the front panel
according to the “Removal
of Front Panel”.

(R7911)

2 Pull out the service

cover diagonally down
in the direction of the
arrow.

(R8077)

3 The figure shows the

appearance of the
inside.

(R7913)

159 Removal Procedure

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Indoor Unit

Step Procedure Points

2. Remove the front grille.
1 Remove the 2 screws.
(one each at the right
and left)

(R12267)

2 The front grille has 3

hooks at the top. Hooks

(R8076)

3 Unfasten the left hook.

Front grille

(R7917)

4 Unfasten the center

hook.

(R7918)

Removal Procedure 160

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Indoor Unit SiENBE04-808_A

Step Procedure Points

5 Unfasten the right hook.

(R8078)

6 Pull the upper part of Caution on Mounting

the front grille out and „ When mounting the front
lift the lower part up, grille, make sure that the 3
and then remove the hooks are fastened as they
front grille. were.

(R12268)

161 Removal Procedure

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Indoor Unit

1.4 Removal of Horizontal Blades / Vertical Blades

Procedure Warning Be sure to wait 10 minutes or more after turning off all power supplies
before disassembling work.
Step Procedure Points
1. Remove the horizontal
blade (large).
1 Open the horizontal Caution on Mounting
blade (large). „ Mount the large horizontal
blade to the upper side and
the small horizontal blade to
the lower side.
Horizontal blade (large) Do not put them in the
wrong place.

Horizontal blade (small) (R7921)

2 Unfasten the center

shaft while bending the
horizontal blade (large)
slightly.

(R7922)

3 Unfasten the left shaft.

(R7923)

4 Unfasten the key Caution on Mounting

alignment shaft at the „ There is a key alignment at
right side. the right shaft. When
mounting, insert the right
shaft first while turning.

„ After inserting the right

shaft, mount the horizontal
blade first to the center shaft
and then to the left shaft.

(R7924)

Removal Procedure 162

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Indoor Unit SiENBE04-808_A

Step Procedure Points

2. Remove the horizontal
blade (small).
1 Unfasten the center
shaft while bending the
horizontal blade (small)
Horizontal blade (small)
slightly.

(R7925)

2 Unfasten the left shaft.

(R7926)

3 Unfasten the key

alignment shaft at the
right side.

Key
(R7927)

3. Remove the fan guard.

1 Unfasten the hooks at
the lower part of the fan
guard with a flat
screwdriver.

(R7928)

2 Remove the fan guard.

(R8079)

163 Removal Procedure

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Indoor Unit

Step Procedure Points

4. Remove the vertical blade
ASSY.
1 Detach the pivot from
Vertical blade ASSY Pivot
the interlock shaft for
vertical blades with a
flat screwdriver.

Interlock
shaft

(R12270)

2 Remove the interlock

rod. Interlock rod

(R10302)

3 Unfasten the hooks at

the upper 3 positions by
pressing them with a
flat screwdriver.

(R10303)

4 Remove the vertical „ A vertical blade ASSY has 5

Hook
blade ASSY. fins. It is impossible to
replace only one fin.
„ The vertical blade ASSY is
not marked for difference
between right and left.

(R12269)

Removal Procedure 164

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Indoor Unit SiENBE04-808_A

1.5 Removal of Electrical Box

Procedure Warning Be sure to wait 10 minutes or more after turning off all power supplies
before disassembling work.
Step Procedure Points
1 The figure shows the Preparation
Electrical box
connections of wire „ Remove the front grille
harnesses. according to the “Removal
of Front Grille”.

(R7931)

2 Remove the screw of

the wire fixture.

Wire
fixture

(R7932)

3 Remove the screws on

the terminal board to
disconnect the
connecting wires. Terminal
board

Connecting
wires

(R7933)

4 Disconnect the
connector for fan motor
[S1].

[S1] (R7934)

165 Removal Procedure

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Indoor Unit

Step Procedure Points

5 Disconnect the
connector for swing
motors [S41].

[S41] (R7935)

6 Release the harness for

swing motors from the
hook.

(R7936)
7 Pull out the indoor heat „ Be careful not to lose the
Indoor heat exchanger thermistor
exchanger thermistor. clip of the thermistor.

Clip

(R11268)

(R7937)

8 Remove the screw and

detach the earth wire.

Earth wire (R7938)

Removal Procedure 166

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Indoor Unit SiENBE04-808_A

Step Procedure Points

9 Remove the screw of
the electrical box.

(R3939)

10 Unfasten the hook at

the upper far side by
pressing it from above
and pulling the
Hook
electrical box toward
yourself.

(R8081)

11 Lift up the electrical box „ There is a hook also at the

and pull it out. lower part of the back. When
mounting the electrical box,
make sure that it is securely
fastened.

(R8082)

167 Removal Procedure

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Indoor Unit

1.6 Removal of PCB

Procedure Warning Be sure to wait 10 minutes or more after turning off all power supplies
before disassembling work.
Step Procedure Points
1. Remove the shield plate.
1 The figure shows the Preparation
appearance of the Shield plate „ Remove the electrical box
electrical box. according to the “Removal
of Electrical Box”.

Control PCB

Signal receiver PCB

INTELLIGENT EYE
sensor PCB

(R8083)

2 Unfasten the hooks at

the upper 2 positions of
Hook
the shield plate.

Hook

(R8085)

3 Unfasten the hook at

the side of the shield
plate.
Shield plate

Hook (side)

4 Lift up the shield plate

to unfasten the lower
hooks and remove it. Hook (lower)

(R10619)

2. Remove the terminal

board.
1 Remove the screw to
remove the terminal Terminal board
board.

(R10315)

Removal Procedure 168

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Indoor Unit SiENBE04-808_A

Step Procedure Points

3. Remove the signal
Signal receiver unit
receiver unit.
1 Unfasten the 3 hooks.

(R12277)

2 Unfasten the book on

the opposite side, and
lift up the signal
receiver unit.

(R8262)

Hook

(R12278)

3 Remove the signal

receiver unit.

Signal receiver unit

(R8088)

169 Removal Procedure

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Indoor Unit

Step Procedure Points

4. Remove the
INTELLIGENT EYE
sensor PCB.
1 Unfasten the 3 hooks
INTELLIGENT EYE
and remove the sensor PCB
INTELLIGENT EYE
sensor PCB.

(R8092)

2 Disconnect the [S26]

connector [S26] from
the INTELLIGENT EYE
sensor PCB.

(R8093)

5. Remove the signal

receiver PCB.
1 Unfasten the 3 hooks
and remove the signal
receiver PCB.

Signal
receiver
PCB

(R8090)

2 Disconnect the
connector [S48] from [S48]
the signal receiver
PCB.

(R8091)

Removal Procedure 170

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Indoor Unit SiENBE04-808_A

Step Procedure Points

6. Remove the display PCB. „ The display PCB is
1 The figure shows the positioned on the rear side
connection of wire of the signal receiver unit.
harness for the display
PCB.

Display PCB

(R8094)

2 Unfasten the 4 hooks

and remove the display
PCB.

Hook (R10318)

3 Disconnect the
connector [S49] from
the display PCB.

[S49] LED 3 (Green)

LED 2 (Yellow)

LED 1 (Green) (R8096)

7. Remove the control PCB.

1 Unfasten the lower 2 Hook
hooks of the control
PCB.
Control PCB

(R8097)

171 Removal Procedure

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Indoor Unit

Step Procedure Points

2 Lift up the bottom of the „ When mounting the control
control PCB and pull it PCB, make sure that it is
out. fixed by upper 2 hooks.

(R8098)

3 The figures show the [S1]: DC fan motor

names of the PCB [S21]: HA connector
component parts. [S25]: INTELLIGENT EYE
sensor PCB
[S32] [S26]: control PCB
[S32]: indoor heat exchanger
[S1]
thermistor
[S41]: swing motors
[S46]: display PCB
[S47]: signal receiver PCB
[S48] [S49]: control PCB
[S21]
[S47]
„ Refer to page 19, 20 for
[S41] [S46] [S25]
(R8099) detail.

[S26]

[S48]

[S49]

LED2 LED3
(Yellow) (Green)
LED1
(Green) (R8100)

Removal Procedure 172

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Indoor Unit SiENBE04-808_A

1.7 Removal of Indoor Heat Exchanger

Procedure Warning Be sure to turn off all power supplies at least 10 min. before
disassembling work.
Step Procedure Points
1. Disconnect the refrigerant
piping.
1 Remove the screws
which fix the indoor
heat exchanger to the
installation plate.

(R8103)

2 Lift the indoor unit with

a wooden base. Caution
In pump-down work, be sure
to stop the compressor
before disconnecting the
refrigerant pipe. If the
refrigerant pipe is
disconnected with the
compressor operating and
the stop valve open, air may
(R8104) be sucked in to generate an
over-pressure in refrigeration
cycle, thus resulting in pipe
rupture or accidental injury.
3 Lift up the indoor unit „ Place a plastic sheet under
slightly and pull out the the drain pan to prevent
drain hose. (The from wetting the floor with
illustration is for the remaining drain.
case of left piping.) „ If the drain hose is
embedded in the wall,
disconnect the drain hose
beforehand.

Drain hose (R8101)

4 Disconnect the piping „ Carry out the removal works

connection with 2 with 2 wrenches.
wrenches. „ When the pipings are
disconnected, protect the
both openings of pipe side
and unit side from entering
Caution of moisture.
From the viewpoint of
global environment
protection, be sure to
use a vacuum pump
for air purging.
(R8105)

173 Removal Procedure

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Indoor Unit

Step Procedure Points

2. Remove the indoor heat Preparation
exchanger. „ Remove the indoor unit from
1 Unfasten the hook of the installation plate.
Piping
the piping fixture at the fixture
back of the indoor unit
and pull out the pipe.

(R10622)

2 Widen the auxiliary pipe

by about 10-20 Caution
degrees. When dismounting or
mounting the indoor heat
exchanger, be sure to wear
gloves or wrap it with cloth
before proceeding. (You may
be injured by the fins.)

Unbending angle:
10-20 deg.

(R10543)

3 Remove the 2 screws

on the left side.

(R10546)

4 Unfasten the lower

hook on the right side
with a flat screwdriver.

Lower hook (R10326)

Removal Procedure 174

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Indoor Unit SiENBE04-808_A

Step Procedure Points

5 After unfastening the „ When mounting the indoor
Indoor heat exchanger
lower hooks, lift up the heat exchanger, make sure
indoor heat exchanger that the hook (right) is
by its right side. fastened.

Hook

(R10327)

6 Remove the indoor heat

exchanger.

(R10328)

175 Removal Procedure

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Indoor Unit

1.8 Removal of Swing Motors

Procedure Warning Be sure to turn off all power supplies at least 10 minutes before
disassembling work.
Step Procedure Points
1. Remove the swing motor
for vertical blade.
1 Lift the indoor unit with
a wooden base.

(R10323)

2 Remove the screw

behind the drain hose,
and disconnect the
drain hose.

Drain hose

(R10329)
3 Remove the screw at
the rear, and remove
the screws on the right
and the left side of the
swing motors.

Swing motors

(R10330)

Removal Procedure 176

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Indoor Unit SiENBE04-808_A

Step Procedure Points

4 Detach the pivot from
Vertical blade ASSY Pivot
the interlock shaft for
vertical blades with a
flat screwdriver.

Interlock
shaft

(R12270)
5 Remove the swing
motor unit.

Swing motor unit

(R8126)

6 Detach the interlock Interlock shaft

shaft from the swing
motor with a flat screw-
driver.

(R8127)

7 Remove the vertical

Vertical blade interlock
blade interlock with a
flat screwdriver.

(R10331)

177 Removal Procedure

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Indoor Unit

Step Procedure Points

8 Remove the 2 screws.

Screws

(R10332)

9 Remove the swing

motor for vertical blade.

(R10333)

10 Disconnect the „ Connector : green

connector.

(R10334)

Removal Procedure 178

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Indoor Unit SiENBE04-808_A

Step Procedure Points

2. Remove the swing motor
for horizontal blade. Caution
1 Remove the screw and When reassembling, do not
remove the swing confuse the installing order
motors for horizontal of the 2 motors and the
blades. Connector for colors of the connectors.
lower blade (red) If you set the connectors or
motors opposite, the
horizontal blades do not
move smoothly or the noise
may be heard.
Screw (1) Set the motor for the upper
blade first.
Connector for
upper blade (white)
(connector: white)
(R8131) (2) Then, set the motor for the
lower blade.
(connector: red)
(3) Fix the both motors with a
screw.

(R8132)

2 Disconnect the
harnesses from the
motors.

(R10335)

179 Removal Procedure

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Indoor Unit

1.9 Removal of Fan Motor

Procedure Warning Be sure to turn off all power supplies at least 10 min. before
disassembling work.
Step Procedure Points
1. Remove the right side Preparation
panel. „ Remove the indoor heat
exchanger according to the
“Removal of Indoor Heat
Exchanger”.

(R8112)

1 Remove the 2 screws

and remove the right
side panel.

Right side
panel

(R8113)

(R8114)

2 Release the fan motor

wire harness from the
hook.

(R8115)

Removal Procedure 180

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Indoor Unit SiENBE04-808_A

Step Procedure Points

3 Remove the 2 screws
of the fan motor fixing
plate.

Fan motor fixing plate

(R8116)

4 Unfasten the hook of

the fan motor fixing
plate and remove the
plate.

(R8117)

(R8118)

2. Remove the fan rotor.

1 Dislocate the fan rotor
by sliding it to the right.

Fan rotor
(R8119)

181 Removal Procedure

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Indoor Unit

Step Procedure Points

2 Loosen the lock screw „ When reassembling the fan
and remove the fan rotor, provide as much as
rotor. Lock screw 5 mm of play between the
side face of the rotor and the
bottom frame.

Side face of
Side face of rotor bottom frame

Fan motor 5 mm
(R2808)
(R8120)

3 Press the bearing

ASSY from outside.

(R9582)

(1) Insert the fan motor with

approx. 5 mm left.
(2) Tighten the screw until it
stops. Then turn the screw
(R8121) in one scroll.
(3) Move the fan rotor and
4 Remove the bearing. confirm the fan motor and
the fan rotor are installed
appropriately.
(4) Tighten the screw
completely if appropriate.
(5) If not appropriate, go back to
(1).
(R8122)

Removal Procedure 182

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S20-35G2V1B, ARXS20-35G2V1B SiENBE04-808_A

2. Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S20-35G2V1B,

ARXS20-35G2V1B
2.1 Removal of Outer Panels / Fan Motor
Procedure Warning Be sure to wait for 10 minutes or more after turning off all power
supplies before disassembling work.
Step Procedure Points
1. Appearance features

DAIKIN
INVERTER

„ Take care not to cut your

finger by the fins of the
outdoor heat exchanger.

(R11890)

2. Remove the panels.

1 Remove the screw of
the stop valve cover.
Pull down the stop
valve cover and remove
it.
Stop
valve
cover

Shield plate

„ The stop valve cover is

united with the shield plate.
„ When reassembling, make
sure to fit the 5 hooks.

Hooks

(R7189)

183 Removal Procedure

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S20-35G2V1B, ARXS20-35G2V1B

Step Procedure Points

2 Remove the 2 screws
Top panel
and lift the top panel.

DAIKIN
INVERTER

(R7190)

3 Remove the drip proof Drip proof plate

plate.

DAIKIN
INVERTER

(R7191)

4 Remove the 4 screws

and remove the
discharge grille.

DAIKIN
INVERTER

Discharge grille (R7192)

„ The discharge grille has 4

hooks.

(R7193)

Removal Procedure 184

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S20-35G2V1B, ARXS20-35G2V1B SiENBE04-808_A

Step Procedure Points

5 Remove the 8 screws
of the front panel.

DAIKIN
INVERTE
R

Front panel (R7194)

6 Unfasten the hooks. „ The front panel has 4 hooks.

Pull and remove the
front panel.

Hooks

(R7195)

185 Removal Procedure

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S20-35G2V1B, ARXS20-35G2V1B

Step Procedure Points

3. Remove the fan motor. „ The screw has reverse
1 Remove the washer- winding.
fitted nut of the outdoor „ Nut size: M6
fan.

10 mm

(R12236)
Outdoor fan
(R7196)

2 Remove the outdoor „ When reassembling, align

fan. mark of the outdoor fan
with D-cut section of the
motor shaft.

D-cut

(R7197)

3 Cut the clamp.

(R7198)

Removal Procedure 186

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S20-35G2V1B, ARXS20-35G2V1B SiENBE04-808_A

Step Procedure Points

4 Disconnect the
connector for the fan [S70]
motor [S70].

(R9332)

5 Release the fan motor

Fan motor
lead wire from the hook. lead wire

(R7200)

6 Open the hooks and „ When reassembling, put the

release the fan motor fan motor lead wire through
lead wire. the back of the fan motor (so
as not to be entangled with
the outdoor fan).

Lead wire Outdoor fan

(R3249)
(R7201)

7 Remove the 4 screws „ Be sure to remove the lower

and remove the fan screws first. If the upper
motor. screws are removed first, the
fan motor, the center of
gravity of which is toward the
front, may tilt down or fall,
getting you injured.

Fan motor (R7202)

187 Removal Procedure

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S20-35G2V1B, ARXS20-35G2V1B

Step Procedure Points

8 Remove the screw and
remove the fan motor
fixing frame.

Fan motor fixing frame

(R7204)

(R7205)

„ When reassembling, fit the

lower hooks into the bottom
frame.

(R7206)

Removal Procedure 188

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S20-35G2V1B, ARXS20-35G2V1B SiENBE04-808_A

Step Procedure Points

4. Remove the right side
panel.
1 Remove the 2 screws
on the rear side.

(R7207)

2 Release the outdoor

Outdoor temperature thermistor
temperature thermistor.

(R7208)

3 Lift up the guard net

and remove it. Guard net

(R7209)

189 Removal Procedure

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S20-35G2V1B, ARXS20-35G2V1B

Step Procedure Points

4 Remove the 4 screws
on the right side panel.
Right side panel

(R7210)

5 Remove the screw near

the stop valves.

(R7211)

Removal Procedure 190

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S20-35G2V1B, ARXS20-35G2V1B SiENBE04-808_A

Step Procedure Points

6 Unfasten the hook on „ When reassembling, make
the rear side. sure to fit the hook.

(R7212)

7 Lift up the right side „ When reassembling, make

panel and remove it. sure to fit the hook.

Hook

(R7213)

191 Removal Procedure

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S20-35G2V1B, ARXS20-35G2V1B

2.2 Removal of Electrical Box

Procedure Warning Be sure to wait for 10 minutes or more after turning off all power
supplies before disassembling work.
Step Procedure Points
1 Disconnect the 2 Preparation
connectors for the „ Remove the panels and
reactor. disconnect the connector for
the fan motor according to
the “Removal of Outer
Panels / Fan Motor”.

(R9338)

2 Cut the clamps at 2

locations.

(R9339)

3 Disconnect the [S30] „ When reassembling, coil the

connector for the excessive lead wire and
compressor [S30]. hang the loop on the hook.

(R9340)

Removal Procedure 192

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S20-35G2V1B, ARXS20-35G2V1B SiENBE04-808_A

Step Procedure Points

4 Disconnect the [S90] [S50]
connectors for the
magnetic relay [S50]
and for the thermistors
[S90].

(R9341)

5 Disconnect the [S40] [S10]

connectors for the filter
PCB [S10] and for the
overload protector
[S40].

(R9342)

6 Disconnect the
[S80] [S20]
connectors for the
electronic expansion
valve coil [S20] and for
the four way valve coil
[S80].

(R9343)

193 Removal Procedure

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S20-35G2V1B, ARXS20-35G2V1B

Step Procedure Points

7 Disconnect the [HN3] [HL3]
connectors for the filter
PCB [HL3] [HN3].

(R9344)

8 Remove the wire Wire harness

harness for standby
electricity saving.

(R9345)

9 Cut the clamps at

2 locations.

(R9346)

Removal Procedure 194

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S20-35G2V1B, ARXS20-35G2V1B SiENBE04-808_A

Step Procedure Points

10 Lift and remove the Electrical box
electrical box.

(R9348)

195 Removal Procedure

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S20-35G2V1B, ARXS20-35G2V1B

2.3 Removal of Thermistors

Procedure Warning Be sure to wait 10 minutes or more after turning off all power supplies
before disassembling work.
Step Procedure Points
1 Release the discharge „ Be careful not to lose the clip
pipe thermistor. for the thermistor.
Clip

(R12279)

Discharge pipe thermistor (R0267)

2 Cut the clamp.

(R7221)

3 Pull out the outdoor „ Be careful not to lose the clip

heat exchanger for the thermistor.
thermistor.

Clip
Outdoor heat exchanger
thermistor

(R7222)

Removal Procedure 196

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S20-35G2V1B, ARXS20-35G2V1B SiENBE04-808_A

Step Procedure Points

4 Feature of the
thermistors

(R9356)

197 Removal Procedure

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S20-35G2V1B, ARXS20-35G2V1B

2.4 Removal of PCB

Procedure Warning Be sure to wait 10 minutes or more after turning off all power supplies
before disassembling work.
Step Procedure Points
1. Remove the main PCB. „ You can remove the main
1 Feature of the main PCB when you disconnect
PCB the lead wires on the
terminal board without
removing the electrical box.

(R9357)

2 Remove the screw on

the terminal board.

Terminal
board

(R7256)

3 Release the 2 earth

terminals.

Earth
terminals

(R9358)

Removal Procedure 198

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S20-35G2V1B, ARXS20-35G2V1B SiENBE04-808_A

Step Procedure Points

4 Remove the 4 screws.

Screws

(R9359)

5 Unfasten the 3 hooks

on the upper side.

(R9360)

6 Lift and pull out the

main PCB.

(R9361)

199 Removal Procedure

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S20-35G2V1B, ARXS20-35G2V1B

Step Procedure Points

7 Feature of the main „ Refer to page 22 for detail.
[S30] [S10] [S40] [S90] [S50]
PCB
[S10] [HL3] [HN3]: filter PCB
[S20]: electronic expansion
valve coil
[S30]: compressor
[S40]: overload protector
[S50]: magnetic relay
[S70]: fan motor
[S70] [S80]: four way valve coil
[S90]: thermistors

[HN3] [HL3] [S80] [S20]

(R12189)

Removal Procedure 200

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S20-35G2V1B, ARXS20-35G2V1B SiENBE04-808_A

2.5 Removal of Reactor / Partition Plate

Procedure Warning Be sure to wait 10 minutes or more after turning off all power supplies
before disassembling work.
Step Procedure Points
1. Remove the reactor. Preparation
Reactor
1 Remove the screw and „ Remove the outer panels
remove the reactor. according to the “Removal of
Outer Panels / Fan Motor”.
„ Remove the electrical box
according to the "Removal of
Electrical Box".

(R7224)

(R7225)

2. Remove the partition

Partition plate
plate.
1 Remove the 2 screws.

(R7226)

201 Removal Procedure

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S20-35G2V1B, ARXS20-35G2V1B

Step Procedure Points

2 The partition plate has
a hook on the lower
side. Lift and pull the
partition plate to
remove.

(R7227)

„ When reassembling, fit the

lower hook into the bottom
frame.

Hook

(R7228)

Removal Procedure 202

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S20-35G2V1B, ARXS20-35G2V1B SiENBE04-808_A

2.6 Removal of Sound Blanket

Procedure Warning Be sure to wait for 10 minutes or more after turning off all power
supplies before disassembling work.
Step Procedure Points
1 Untie the string and Preparation
open the sound blanket „ Remove the outer panels
(outer). according to the “Removal of
Outer Panels / Fan Motor”.
„ Remove the electrical box
according to the "Removal of
Electrical Box".

Sound blanket (outer) (R7229)

2 Lift and remove the „ Since the piping ports are
sound blanket (outer). torn easily, remove the
sound blanket carefully.

(R12212)

3 Remove the sound

blanket (top).

Sound blanket
(top)

(R7231)

4 Pull the sound blanket

(inner) out.

Sound blanket (inner)

(R12271)

203 Removal Procedure

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S20-35G2V1B, ARXS20-35G2V1B

2.7 Removal of Four Way Valve

Procedure Warning Be sure to wait for 10 minutes or more after turning off all power
supplies before disassembling work.
Step Procedure Points
1 Pull out the electronic
expansion valve coil.

Electronic
expansion
valve coil

(R7233)

2 Remove the terminal

cover. Terminal cover

(R7234)

3 Disconnect the lead

wires of the
compressor.
Red (U)

U
V
W

Yellow (V) Blue (W)

(R7235)

Removal Procedure 204

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S20-35G2V1B, ARXS20-35G2V1B SiENBE04-808_A

Step Procedure Points

4 Remove the screw and
Four way valve coil
remove the four way Warning
valve coil. Be careful not to get yourself
burnt with the pipes and other
parts that are heated by the
gas brazing machine.

Warning
If the refrigerant gas leaks
during work, ventilate the
room. (If the refrigerant gas is
exposed to flames, toxic gas
may be generated.)

Caution
From the viewpoint of global
(R7247) environment protection, do
5 Remove the sheets of not discharge the refrigerant
putty. gas in the atmosphere. Make
sure to collect all the
refrigerant gas.

Cautions for restoration

1. Restore the piping by non-
oxidation brazing.
2. It is required to prevent the
carbonization of the oil inside
the four way valve and the
deterioration of the gaskets
affected by heat. (Keep
below 120°C.) For the sake
(R7248)
of this, wrap the four way
„ Before working, make Four way valve
valve with wet cloth and
sure that the refrigerant provide water so that the
gas is empty in the circuit. cloth does not dry.
„ Be sure to apply nitrogen
replacement when In case of difficulty with gas
heating up the brazed brazing machine
part. 1. Disconnect the brazed part
6 Heat up the brazed part where is easy to disconnect
and withdraw the piping and restore.
with pliers. 2. Cut pipes on the main unit
with a tube cutter in order to
make it easy to disconnect.

(R7249)

205 Removal Procedure

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S20-35G2V1B, ARXS20-35G2V1B

Step Procedure Points

Note:
„ Do not use a metal saw for
cutting pipes by all means
because the sawdust comes
into the circuit.

„ When withdrawing the pipes,

be careful not to pinch them
firmly with pliers. The pipes
may get deformed.

„ Provide a protective sheet or

a steel plate so that the
(R7250)
brazing flame cannot
influence peripheries.

Removal Procedure 206

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S20-35G2V1B, ARXS20-35G2V1B SiENBE04-808_A

2.8 Removal of Compressor

Procedure Warning Be sure to wait for 10 minutes or more after turning off all power
supplies before disassembling work.
Step Procedure Points
1 Remove the 2 nuts of
the compressor. Warning
Be careful not to get yourself
burnt with the pipes and other
parts that are heated by the
gas brazing machine.

Warning
If the refrigerant gas leaks
during work, ventilate the
room. (If the refrigerant gas is
exposed to flames, toxic gas
may be generated.)

Warning
Since it may happen that the
Compressor
refrigerant oil in the
(R11889)
compressor catches fire,
prepare wet cloth so as to
extinguish fire immediately.
„ Before working, make
sure that the refrigerant is Caution
empty in the circuit. From the viewpoint of global
„ Be sure to apply nitrogen environment protection, do
replacement when not discharge the refrigerant
heating up the brazed gas in the atmosphere. Make
part. sure to collect all the
2 Heat up the brazed part refrigerant gas.
of the discharge side
and disconnect. Cautions for restoration
1. Restore the piping by non-
oxidation brazing.
2. It is required to prevent the
carbonization of the oil inside
the four way valve and the
deterioration of the gaskets
affected by heat. (Keep
below 120°C.) For the sake
(R12031)
Discharge side of this, wrap the four way
valve with wet cloth and
provide water so that the
cloth does not dry.

In case of difficulty with gas

brazing machine
1. Disconnect the brazed part
where is easy to disconnect
and restore.
2. Cut pipes on the main unit
with a tube cutter in order to
make it easy to disconnect.

207 Removal Procedure

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S20-35G2V1B, ARXS20-35G2V1B

Step Procedure Points

3 Heat up the brazed part Note:
of the suction side and „ Do not use a metal saw for
disconnect. cutting pipes by all means
because the sawdust comes
into the circuit.

„ When withdrawing the pipes,

be careful not to pinch them
firmly with pliers. The pipes
may get deformed.

Suction side „ Provide a protective sheet or

a steel plate so that the
(R12032)
brazing flame cannot
influence peripheries.
4 Lift the compressor up
and remove it. „ Be careful so as not to burn
the compressor terminals,
the name plate, the heat
exchanger fin.

(R7254)

Removal Procedure 208

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S20-35G2V1B9, ARXS20-35G3V1B SiENBE04-808_A

3. Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S20-35G2V1B9,

ARXS20-35G3V1B
3.1 Removal of Outer Panels / Fan Motor
Procedure Warning Be sure to wait 10 minutes or more after turning off all power supplies
before disassembling work.
Step Procedure Points
1. Appearance features

DAIKIN
INVERTER

„ Take care not to cut your

finger by the fins of the
outdoor heat exchanger.

(R11890)

2. Remove the panels.

1 Remove the screw of
the stop valve cover.
Pull down the stop
valve cover and remove
it. Stop
valve
cover

(R7188)

Shield plate

„ The stop valve cover is

united with the shield plate.
„ When reassembling, make
sure to fit the 5 hooks.

Hooks

(R7189)

209 Removal Procedure

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S20-35G2V1B9, ARXS20-35G3V1B

Step Procedure Points

2 Remove the 2 screws
Top panel
and lift the top panel.

DAIKIN
INVERTER

(R7190)
3 Remove the drip proof Drip proof plate
plate.

DAIKIN
INVERTER

(R7191)

4 Remove the 4 screws

and remove the
discharge grille.

DAIKIN
INVERTER

Discharge grille (R7192)

„ The discharge grille has 4

hooks.

(R7193)

Removal Procedure 210

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S20-35G2V1B9, ARXS20-35G3V1B SiENBE04-808_A

Step Procedure Points

5 Remove the 8 screws
of the front panel.

DAIKIN
INVERTE
R

Front panel (R11825)

6 Unfasten the hooks. „ The front panel has 4 hooks.

Pull and remove the
front panel.

Hooks

(R11826)

211 Removal Procedure

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S20-35G2V1B9, ARXS20-35G3V1B

Step Procedure Points

3. Remove the fan motor. „ The screw has reverse
1 Remove the washer- winding.
fitted nut of the outdoor „ Nut size: M6
fan.

10 mm

(R12236)
Outdoor fan (R11827)

2 Remove the outdoor „ When reassembling, align

fan. mark of the outdoor fan
with D-cut section of the
motor shaft.

D-cut

(R11828)

3 Release the outdoor

temperature thermistor.

Outdoor temperature
thermistor (R11829)

Removal Procedure 212

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S20-35G2V1B9, ARXS20-35G3V1B SiENBE04-808_A

Step Procedure Points

4 Cut the clamp.

(R11830)

5 Disconnect the
connector for the fan
motor [S70].

[S70] (R11831)

6 Release the fan motor

Fan motor
lead wire from the hook. lead wire

(R11832)

213 Removal Procedure

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S20-35G2V1B9, ARXS20-35G3V1B

Step Procedure Points

7 Remove the screw and
remove the fan motor
fixing frame.

Fan motor fixing frame

(R11833)

(R12314)

„ When reassembling, fit the

lower hooks into the bottom
frame.

(R7206)

Removal Procedure 214

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S20-35G2V1B9, ARXS20-35G3V1B SiENBE04-808_A

Step Procedure Points

8 Open the hooks and „ When reassembling, put the
release the fan motor fan motor lead wire through
lead wire. the back of the fan motor
(so as not to be entangled
with the outdoor fan).

(R11835)

Lead wire Outdoor fan

(R3249)

9 Remove the 4 screws

and remove the fan
motor. Fan motor

(R12311)

4. Remove the right side

panel.
1 Remove the 2 screws
on the rear side.

(R12162)

215 Removal Procedure

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S20-35G2V1B9, ARXS20-35G3V1B

Step Procedure Points

2 Remove the 4 screws
Right side panel
on the right side panel.

(R12163)

3 Remove the screw near

the stop valves.

(R11839)

4 Unfasten the hook on „ When reassembling, make

the rear side. sure to fit the hook.

(R11842)

Removal Procedure 216

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S20-35G2V1B9, ARXS20-35G3V1B SiENBE04-808_A

Step Procedure Points

5 Lift up the right side „ When reassembling, make
panel and remove it. sure to fit the hook.

Hook

(R12272)

6 Lift up the guard net

Guard net
and remove it.

(R11841)

217 Removal Procedure

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S20-35G2V1B9, ARXS20-35G3V1B

3.2 Removal of Electrical Box

Procedure Warning Be sure to wait 10 minutes or more after turning off all power supplies
before disassembling work.
Step Procedure Points
1 Disconnect the Preparation
connector for the „ Remove the panels and
overload protector disconnect the connector for
[S40]. the fan motor according to
the “Removal of Outer
Panels / Fan Motor”.
[S40]

(R11846)

2 Disconnect the
connector for the four
way valve coil [S80].

[S80]

(R11848)

3 Disconnect the 2
connectors for the
reactor.

(R11844)

Removal Procedure 218

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S20-35G2V1B9, ARXS20-35G3V1B SiENBE04-808_A

Step Procedure Points

4 Disconnect the relay
connector for the
compressor.

(R11845)

5 Disconnect the
connector for the
electronic expansion
valve coil [S20].

[S20]

(R11847)

6 Cut the clamp.

(R11850)

7 Pull out the outdoor „ Be careful not to lose the clip

heat exchanger for the thermistor.
thermistor.

Outdoor heat
exchanger thermistor

(R11851)

219 Removal Procedure

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S20-35G2V1B9, ARXS20-35G3V1B

Step Procedure Points

8 Release the discharge „ Be careful not to lose the clip
pipe thermistor. for the thermistor.
Clip

(R12279)

Discharge pipe thermistor (R11849)

9 Lift and remove the

Electrical Box
electrical box.

(R11852)

Removal Procedure 220

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S20-35G2V1B9, ARXS20-35G3V1B SiENBE04-808_A

3.3 Removal of PCB

Procedure Warning Be sure to wait 10 minutes or more after turning off all power supplies
before disassembling work.
Step Procedure Points
1. Remove the main PCB. „ You can remove the main
1 Feature of the main PCB when you disconnect
PCB the lead wires on the
terminal board without
removing the electrical box.

(R11853)

2 Remove the screw on

the terminal board.

Terminal
board

(R11854)

3 Release the 2 earth

terminals.

Earth
terminal

(R11855)

221 Removal Procedure

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S20-35G2V1B9, ARXS20-35G3V1B

Step Procedure Points

4 Pull out the forced „ Be careful of a sharp
operation button PCB. protrusion at the back of the
Disconnect the forced operation button
connector [S110] to PCB.
remove the forced
operation button PCB.

Forced operation button PCB

(R11856)

5 Disconnect the relay

connector.

(R11857)

6 Cut the clamp.

(R11858)

Removal Procedure 222

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S20-35G2V1B9, ARXS20-35G3V1B SiENBE04-808_A

Step Procedure Points

7 Release the harness.

(R11859)

8 Cut the clamps at the 2

locations.

(R11860)

9 Disconnect the
connector for the filter
PCB [S10].

[S10] (R11861)

223 Removal Procedure

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S20-35G2V1B9, ARXS20-35G3V1B

Step Procedure Points

10 Disconnect the
connectors for the
[S100]
magnetic relay [S50]
and for the forced
operation button PCB
[S100].

[S50] (R11862)

11 Disconnect the
connector for the filter
PCB [HL3] [HN3]. [HN3]

[HL3]

(R11863)

12 Release the harnesses

from the hook.

(R11864)

13 Release the harness for

the outdoor
temperature thermistor.

(R11865)

Removal Procedure 224

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S20-35G2V1B9, ARXS20-35G3V1B SiENBE04-808_A

Step Procedure Points

14 Remove the 6 screws.

(R11866)

15 Unfasten the 4 hooks

and remove the main
PCB.

(R11867)

„ Refer to page 24 for detail.

[S50] [S100]
[S10] [HL3] [HN3]: filter PCB
[HL3] [S20]: electronic expansion
[HN3] valve coil
[HL3] [S40]: overload protector
[S80] [S50]: magnetic relay
[S70]: fan motor
[S20]
[S80]: four way valve coil
[S90]: thermistors
[S40] [S100]: forced operation button
PCB
[S70]

[S90] [S10]
(R11868)

225 Removal Procedure

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S20-35G2V1B9, ARXS20-35G3V1B

Step Procedure Points

2. Remove the filter PCB.
1 Release the harnesses
from the hook.

Filter PCB (R11869)

2 Cut the clamp.

(R11871)

3 Release the harnesses

from the hook.

(R11872)

Removal Procedure 226

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S20-35G2V1B9, ARXS20-35G3V1B SiENBE04-808_A

Step Procedure Points

4 Release the harnesses
from the hooks.

(R11873)

5 Remove the screw.

(R11874)

6 Unfasten the 2 hooks.

Filter PCB (R11876)

7 Lift and pull out the filter

PCB.

(R11877)

227 Removal Procedure

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S20-35G2V1B9, ARXS20-35G3V1B

Step Procedure Points

8 Feature of the filter „ Refer to page 24 for detail.
PCB

(R11878)

Removal Procedure 228

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S20-35G2V1B9, ARXS20-35G3V1B SiENBE04-808_A

3.4 Removal of Reactor / Partition Plate

Procedure Warning Be sure to wait 10 minutes or more after turning off all power supplies
before disassembling work.
Step Procedure Points
1. Remove the reactor. Reactor Preparation
1 Remove the screw and „ Remove the outer panels
remove the reactor. according to the “Removal of
Outer Panels / Fan Motor”.
„ Remove the electrical box
according to the “Removal of
Electrical Box”.

(R11879)

(R11880)

2. Remove the partition

Partition plate
plate.
1 Remove the 2 screws.

(R12273)

229 Removal Procedure

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S20-35G2V1B9, ARXS20-35G3V1B

Step Procedure Points

2 The partition plate has
a hook on the lower
side. Lift and pull the
partition plate to
remove.

(R12280)

„ When reassembling, fit the

lower hook into the bottom
frame.

(R11883)

Removal Procedure 230

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S20-35G2V1B9, ARXS20-35G3V1B SiENBE04-808_A

3.5 Removal of Sound Blanket

Procedure Warning Be sure to wait 10 minutes or more after turning off all power supplies
before disassembling work.
Step Procedure Points
1 Remove the sound „ Since the piping ports are
blanket (top). torn easily, remove the
sound blanket carefully.

Sound blanket
(top)

(R11884)

2 Untie the string and

open the sound blanket
(outer).

Sound blanket
(outer) (R11885)

3 Lift and remove the

sound blanket (outer).

(R11886)

231 Removal Procedure

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S20-35G2V1B9, ARXS20-35G3V1B

Step Procedure Points

4 Pull the sound blanket
(inner) out.

Sound blanket
(inner)
(R11887)

5 Pull the sound blanket

(bottom) out.

Sound blanket
(bottom) (R11888)

Removal Procedure 232

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S20-35G2V1B9, ARXS20-35G3V1B SiENBE04-808_A

3.6 Removal of Four Way Valve

Procedure Warning Be sure to wait 10 minutes or more after turning off all power supplies
before disassembling work.
Step Procedure Points
1 Pull out the electronic
expansion valve coil.

Electronic
expansion
valve coil

(R7233)

2 Remove the terminal

Terminal cover
cover.

(R7234)

3 Disconnect the lead

wires of the
compressor.
Red (U)

U
V
W

Yellow (V) Blue (W)

(R7235)

233 Removal Procedure

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S20-35G2V1B9, ARXS20-35G3V1B

Step Procedure Points

4 Remove the screw and
Four way valve coil
remove the four way Warning
valve coil. Be careful not to get yourself
burnt with the pipes and other
parts that are heated by the
gas brazing machine.

Warning
If the refrigerant gas leaks
during work, ventilate the
room. (If the refrigerant gas is
exposed to flames, toxic gas
may be generated.)

Caution
From the viewpoint of global
(R7247) environment protection, do
5 Remove the sheets of not discharge the refrigerant
putty. gas in the atmosphere. Make
sure to collect all the
refrigerant gas.

Cautions for restoration

1. Restore the piping by non-
oxidation brazing.
2. It is required to prevent the
carbonization of the oil inside
the four way valve and the
deterioration of the gaskets
affected by heat. (Keep
below 120°C.) For the sake
(R7248)
of this, wrap the four way
„ Before working, make valve with wet cloth and
Four way valve
sure that the refrigerant provide water so that the
gas is empty in the circuit. cloth does not dry.
„ Be sure to apply nitrogen
replacement when In case of difficulty with gas
heating up the brazed brazing machine
part. 1. Disconnect the brazed part
6 Heat up the brazed part where is easy to disconnect
and withdraw the piping and restore.
with pliers. 2. Cut pipes on the main unit
with a tube cutter in order to
make it easy to disconnect.

(R7249)

Removal Procedure 234

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S20-35G2V1B9, ARXS20-35G3V1B SiENBE04-808_A

Step Procedure Points

Note:
„ Do not use a metal saw for
cutting pipes by all means
because the sawdust comes
into the circuit.

„ When withdrawing the pipes,

be careful not to pinch them
firmly with pliers. The pipes
may get deformed.

„ Provide a protective sheet or

a steel plate so that the
(R7250)
brazing flame cannot
influence peripheries.

235 Removal Procedure

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S20-35G2V1B9, ARXS20-35G3V1B

3.7 Removal of Compressor

Procedure Warning Be sure to wait 10 minutes or more after turning off all power supplies
before disassembling work.
Step Procedure Points
1 Remove the 2 nuts of
the compressor. Warning
Be careful not to get yourself
burnt with pipes and other
parts that are heated by the
gas brazing machine.

Warning
If the refrigerant gas leaks
during work, ventilate the
room. (If the refrigerant gas is
exposed to flames, toxic gas
may be generated.)

Warning
Since it may happen that the
Compressor
refrigerant oil in the
(R11889)
compressor catches fire,
prepare wet cloth so as to
extinguish fire immediately.
„ Before working, make
sure that the refrigerant is Caution
empty in the circuit. From the viewpoint of global
„ Be sure to apply nitrogen environment protection, do
replacement when not discharge the refrigerant
heating up the brazed gas in the atmosphere. Make
part. sure to collect all the
2 Heat up the brazed part refrigerant gas.
of the discharge side
and disconnect. Cautions for restoration
1. Restore the piping by non-
oxidation brazing.
2. It is required to prevent the
carbonization of the oil inside
the four way valve and the
deterioration of the gaskets
affected by heat. (Keep
(R12031)
below 120°C.) For the sake
Discharge side of this, wrap the four way
valve with wet cloth and
provide water so that the
cloth does not dry.

In case of difficulty with gas

brazing machine
1. Disconnect the brazed part
where is easy to disconnect
and restore.
2. Cut pipes on the main unit
with a tube cutter in order to
make it easy to disconnect.

Removal Procedure 236

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S20-35G2V1B9, ARXS20-35G3V1B SiENBE04-808_A

Step Procedure Points

3 Heat up the brazed part Note:
of the suction side and „ Do not use a metal saw for
disconnect. cutting pipes by all means
because the sawdust comes
into the circuit.

„ When withdrawing the pipes,

be careful not to pinch them
firmly with pliers. The pipes
may get deformed.

Suction side „ Provide a protective sheet or

a steel plate so that the
(R12032) brazing flame cannot
influence peripheries.
4 Lift the compressor up
and remove it. „ Be careful so as not to burn
the compressor terminals,
the name plate, the heat
exchanger fin.

(R7254)

237 Removal Procedure

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S42G2V1B, ARXS42G2V1B

4. Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S42G2V1B, ARXS42G2V1B

4.1 Removal of Outer Panels
Procedure Warning Be sure to wait 10 minutes or more after turning off all power supplies
before disassembling work.
Step Procedure Points
1. Appearance features

DAIKIN
INVERTER

Han

(R12281)

2. Remove the panels.

1 Remove the 2 screws „ The front panel has 4 hooks.
to remove the top Top panel

panel, and 8 screws to

remove the front panel.

Hooks

Hooks

Discharge grille Front panel (R9363)

Removal Procedure 238

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S42G2V1B, ARXS42G2V1B SiENBE04-808_A

Step Procedure Points

2 Remove the 4 screws „ When reassembling, make
and remove the sure to fit the 4 hooks.
discharge grille.

(R9364)

3 Remove the screw and „ The stop valve cover is

remove the stop valve united with the shield plate.
cover.

Stop
valve
cover

(R8139)

„ When reassembling, make

sure to fit the 5 hooks.
Shield plate

(R12213)

239 Removal Procedure

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S42G2V1B, ARXS42G2V1B

4.2 Removal of Electrical Box

Procedure Warning Be sure to wait 10 minutes or more after turning off all power supplies
before disassembling work.
Step Procedure Points
1. Disconnect the „ When reassembling, fasten
connecting wires. the wires with screws on the
1 Remove the 3 screws Terminal terminal board.
to remove the wiring board
fixture.
Then remove the all Connecting Power
screws to disconnect wire supply
the power supply cable
cables and the
connecting wires.

Wiring fixture
(R12192)

2. Remove the electrical

box.
1 Release the outdoor
temperature thermistor.

(R12193)

2 Lift up the guard net

and remove it.

Guard net

(R8143)

Removal Procedure 240

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S42G2V1B, ARXS42G2V1B SiENBE04-808_A

Step Procedure Points

3 Remove the 7 screws,
and remove the right Right side panel
side panel.

(R12217)

4 Remove the screw of

the terminal board. Terminal board

(R12218)

5 Disconnect the „ For removal procedure of the

connector for the fan [S70] fan motor lead wire, refer to
motor [S70]. “Removal of Outdoor Fan /
Fan Motor”.

(R0254)

241 Removal Procedure

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S42G2V1B, ARXS42G2V1B

Step Procedure Points

6 Disconnect the
connector for the [S40]
overload protector
[S40].

(R0255)

7 Disconnect the
connector for the [S20]
electronic expansion
valve coil [S20].

(R0256)

8 Disconnect the
connector for the four [S80]
way valve coil [S80].

(R0257)

9 Disconnect the
connector for the [S90]
thermistors [S90].

(R0258)

Removal Procedure 242

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S42G2V1B, ARXS42G2V1B SiENBE04-808_A

Step Procedure Points

10 Disconnect the relay
connector for the
compressor.

(R0259)

11 Disconnect the 2
connectors for the
reactor.

(R0260)

12 Release the discharge „ Be careful not to lose the clip

pipe thermistor. for the thermistor.
Clip

(R12279)

Discharge
pipe thermistor (R12197

13 Detach the clamp for

the thermistors from the
electrical box.

(R12196)

(R0262)

243 Removal Procedure

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S42G2V1B, ARXS42G2V1B

Step Procedure Points

14 Remove the screw in
front of the electrical
box.

(R0263)

15 Lift and remove the

electrical box.

(R0264)

Removal Procedure 244

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S42G2V1B, ARXS42G2V1B SiENBE04-808_A

4.3 Removal of PCB

Procedure Warning Be sure to wait 10 minutes or more after turning off all power supplies
before disassembling work.
Step Procedure Points
1 Remove the screw and Preparation
remove the electrical Electrical box cover „ Remove the panels
box cover. according to the “Removal of
Outer Panels”.
„ Remove the electrical box
according to the “Removal of
Electrical Box”.

(R12274)

(R8156)

2 Detach the insulation „ The trimmed part goes front.

sheet. Insulation
sheet

Earth
terminals

(R8157)

3 Remove the 2 screws

of the earth terminals.

(R8158)

245 Removal Procedure

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S42G2V1B, ARXS42G2V1B

Step Procedure Points

4 Release the earth wire
from the hook.

(R8159)

5 Remove the 2 screws

and detach the 1 clip to
remove the radiation Clip
shield plate.

Radiation shield plate

(R12198)

(R8161)

6 Cut off the 5 clamps

and disconnect the wire
harnesses.

(R8162)

Removal Procedure 246

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S42G2V1B, ARXS42G2V1B SiENBE04-808_A

Step Procedure Points

7 Remove the 8 screws in
total to remove the
PCB.

(R8163)

(R8164)

8 Lift up the back side „ When reassembling, make

slightly and unfasten sure that the hooks of the
the hooks of the front. electrical box are placed on
the PCB.

Hooks

(R8166)

9 Lift up the PCB.

(R8167)

247 Removal Procedure

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S42G2V1B, ARXS42G2V1B

Step Procedure Points

10 Remove the PCB.

(R8168)

11 Detach the terminals „ Refer to page 26 for detail.

from the terminal board. [S20]
[S70] [S40]
[S90] [S80]

(R8169)

[S20] : electronic expansion

valve coil
[S40] : overload protector
[S70] : fan motor
[S80] : four way valve coil
[S90] : thermistors

Removal Procedure 248

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S42G2V1B, ARXS42G2V1B SiENBE04-808_A

Step Procedure Points

12 Remove the screw of
the radiation fin.

Radiation fin
(R12214)

(R8171)

249 Removal Procedure

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S42G2V1B, ARXS42G2V1B

4.4 Removal of Sound Blanket

Procedure Warning Be sure to wait 10 minutes or more after turning off all power supplies
before disassembling work.
Step Procedure Points
1. Remove the partition
plate. Partition plate
1 Remove the 2 screws.

„ When reassembling, fit the

lower hook into the bottom
frame.
(R12282)

2 The partition plate has

hooks on the lower
side. Lift and pull the
partition plate to
remove.

(R8175)

„ Remove the screw to remove

the reactor.

(R8174)

Removal Procedure 250

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S42G2V1B, ARXS42G2V1B SiENBE04-808_A

Step Procedure Points

2. Remove of the sound „ Since the piping ports are
blanket. torn easily, remove the
1 Untie the string, open blanket carefully.
the sound blanket
(outer) and pull it out.

Sound blanket (outer) (R12199)

(R8180)
2 Remove the sound
Sound blanket (top upper)
blanket (top upper).

(R12200)

3 Remove the sound

Sound blanket (top lower)
blanket (top lower).

(R8178)

4 Open the sound blanket

(inner) and pull it out.

Sound blanket (inner) (R12201)

251 Removal Procedure

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S42G2V1B, ARXS42G2V1B

4.5 Removal of Outdoor Fan / Fan Motor

Procedure Warning Be sure to wait 10 minutes or more after turning off all power supplies
before disassembling work.
Step Procedure Points
1. Remove the outdoor fan. „ The screw has reverse
1 Remove the washer winding.
fitted nut of the outdoor „ Nut size: M6
fan.

10 mm

(R8181)

2 Remove the outdoor (R12236)

fan.

D-cut

(R8182)

„ When reassembling, align

mark of the outdoor fan
with D-cut section of the
motor shaft.

(R8183)

2. Remove the fan motor.

[S70]
1 Disconnect the
connector for the fan
motor [S70].

(R8184)

Removal Procedure 252

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S42G2V1B, ARXS42G2V1B SiENBE04-808_A

Step Procedure Points

2 The figure shows the
arrangement of the fan
motor lead wire.

(R8185)

3 Remove the 1 screw of

the fan motor fixing
frame.

Fan motor
fixing frame

(R12202)

(R8187)

4 Remove the fan motor

fixing frame.

(R8188)

253 Removal Procedure

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S42G2V1B, ARXS42G2V1B

Step Procedure Points

5 Turn the fan motor
fixing frame backward
and open the 2 hooks of
the fan motor lead wire.

(R8189)

6 Release the fan motor „ When reassembling, put the

lead wire. fan motor lead wire through
the back of the fan motor (so
as not to be entangled with
the outdoor fan).

Lead wire Outdoor fan

(R12215)
(R7627)

7 Remove the 4 screws

and 4 rubber vibration
isolators to remove the
fan motor.

(R8190)

(R8191)

Removal Procedure 254

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S42G2V1B, ARXS42G2V1B SiENBE04-808_A

4.6 Removal of Thermistors

Procedure Warning Be sure to wait 10 minutes or more after turning off all power supplies
before disassembling work.
Step Procedure Points
1 Release the discharge „ Be careful not to lose the clip
pipe thermistor. for the thermistor.
Discharge pipe thermistor
Clip

(R12279)

(R8192)

2 Cut the clamp and pull

out the outdoor heat
exchanger thermistor.

Outdoor heat
exchanger thermistor

(R8193)

3 The thermistors for

outdoor temperature /
discharge pipe /
outdoor heat exchanger
are united as one
assembly.

4 The figure shows the

arrangement of the
thermistors.

(R8194)

255 Removal Procedure

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S42G2V1B, ARXS42G2V1B

4.7 Removal of Four Way Valve / Electronic Expansion Valve

Procedure Warning Be sure to wait 10 minutes or more after turning off all power supplies
before disassembling work.
Step Procedure Points
1. Remove the peripheries. Preparation
1 Remove the screw and „ Remove the sound blanket.
remove the four way
valve coil.

(R7703)
(R8203)

„ Detach the four way valve

coil and the 2 clamps, and
2 Pull out the electronic
then detach the wire
expansion valve coil.
harnesses.

(R8204)

3 Remove the putty.

(R8205)

4 Remove the terminal

cover. Terminal cover

(R8195)

Removal Procedure 256

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S42G2V1B, ARXS42G2V1B SiENBE04-808_A

Step Procedure Points

„ Before working, make
sure that the refrigerant Warning
gas is empty in the circuit. Be careful not to get yourself
„ Be sure to apply nitrogen burnt with the pipes and other
replacement when parts that are heated by the
heating up the brazed gas brazing machine.
part.
2. Remove the four way Warning
valve and electronic If the refrigerant gas leaks
expansion valve. during work, ventilate the
room. (If the refrigerant gas is
1 Heat up the 2 brazed
exposed to flames, toxic gas
parts of the electronic
may be generated.)
expansion valve and
remove it. Caution
From the viewpoint of global
environment protection, do
not discharge the refrigerant
gas in the atmosphere. Make
sure to collect all the
refrigerant gas.
(R8206)
Cautions for restoration
2 Heat up the brazed 1. Restore the piping by non-
parts of the four way oxidation brazing.
valve. 2. It is required to prevent the
carbonization of the oil inside
the four way valve and the
deterioration of the gaskets
affected by heat. (Keep
below 120°C.) For the sake
of this, wrap the four way
valve with wet cloth and
provide water so that the
cloth does not dry.
(R8207)
3 Pull the pipe with pliers In case of difficulty with gas
and disconnect. brazing machine
1. Disconnect the brazed part
where is easy to disconnect
and restore.
2. Cut pipes on the main unit
with a tube cutter in order to
make it easy to disconnect.

(R8208)

257 Removal Procedure

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S42G2V1B, ARXS42G2V1B

Step Procedure Points

Note:
„ Do not use a metal saw for
cutting pipes by all means
because the sawdust comes
into the circuit.

„ When withdrawing the pipes,

be careful not to pinch them
firmly with pliers. The pipes
may get deformed.

(R8209) „ Provide a protective sheet or

a steel plate so that the
brazing flame cannot
influence peripheries.

Removal Procedure 258

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S42G2V1B, ARXS42G2V1B SiENBE04-808_A

4.8 Removal of Compressor

Procedure Warning Be sure to wait 10 minutes or more after turning off all power supplies
before disassembling work.
Step Procedure Points
1 Remove the terminal
cover. Terminal cover

(R8195)

2 Disconnect the lead

Red (U)
wires of the
compressor.

U V
W
Blue
Yellow (V) (W)

(R8196)

U V
W

(R8197)

3 Unfasten the hooks with

a flat screwdriver to
remove the overload
protector.

U V
W

(R8198)

259 Removal Procedure

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S42G2V1B, ARXS42G2V1B

Step Procedure Points

4 Remove the protection
Protection bushing
bushing.

U V
W

(R8199)

5 Remove the 2 nuts of

the compressor.

Warning
(R0265)
Be careful not to get yourself
„ Before working, make burnt with the pipes and other
sure that the refrigerant parts that are heated by the
gas is empty in the circuit. gas brazing machine.
„ Be sure to apply nitrogen
replacement when Warning
heating up the brazed If the refrigerant gas leaks
part. during work, ventilate the
6 Heat up the brazed part room. (If the refrigerant gas is
of the discharge side exposed to flames, toxic gas
and disconnect. may be generated.)

7 Heat up the brazed part Warning

of the suction side and Since it may happen that the
disconnect. refrigerant oil in the
compressor catches fire,
(R8201)
prepare wet cloth so as to
extinguish fire immediately.

Caution
From the viewpoint of global
environment protection, do
not discharge the refrigerant
gas in the atmosphere. Make
sure to collect all the
refrigerant gas.

Removal Procedure 260

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S42G2V1B, ARXS42G2V1B SiENBE04-808_A

Step Procedure Points

8 Lift the compressor up Cautions for restoration
to remove. 1. Restore the piping by non-
oxidation brazing.
2. It is required to prevent the
carbonization of the oil inside
the four way valve and the
deterioration of the gaskets
affected by heat. (Keep
below 120°C.) For the sake
of this, wrap the four way
valve with wet cloth and
provide water so that the
cloth does not dry.

In case of difficulty with gas

(R8202) brazing machine
1. Disconnect the brazed part
where is easy to disconnect
and restore.
2. Cut pipes on the main unit
with a tube cutter in order to
make it easy to disconnect.

Note:
„ Do not use a metal saw for
cutting pipes by all means
because the sawdust comes
into the circuit.

„ When withdrawing the pipes,

be careful not to pinch them
firmly with pliers. The pipes
may get deformed.

„ Provide a protective sheet or

a steel plate so that the
brazing flame cannot
influence peripheries.

„ Be careful so as not to burn

the compressor terminals,
the name plate, the heat
exchanger fin.

261 Removal Procedure

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S50G2V1B, ARXS50G2V1B

5. Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S50G2V1B, ARXS50G2V1B

5.1 Removal of Outer Panels
Procedure Warning Be sure to wait for 10 minutes or more after turning off all power
supplies before disassembling work.
Step Procedure Points
1. Remove the panels.
1 Remove the 4 screws Top panel
and lift the top panel.

(R12283)

„ Take care not to cut your

finger by the fins of the
outdoor heat exchanger.

(R12315)

2 Remove the 4 screws „ Slide the discharge grille

and remove the upwards and remove it.
discharge grille.

Discharge grille (R5245)

Removal Procedure 262

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S50G2V1B, ARXS50G2V1B SiENBE04-808_A

Step Procedure Points

„ The discharge grille has 4
hooks.

3 Remove the 6 screws

of the front panel.

Front panel

(R12284)

4 Push the front panel

and lift the shield plate
to unfasten the hooks.

Shield plate

1 Push the
front panel.

2 Lift the shield

plate upwards.

(R5248)

263 Removal Procedure

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S50G2V1B, ARXS50G2V1B

Step Procedure Points

5 Unfasten the left side „ Lift the front panel while
hooks, and then the pushing the left side panel
right side hook. inwards.
Remove the front panel.

„ Lift the front panel and

unfasten the right side hook.

„ When reassembling, fit the

right side of the front panel
first.

Removal Procedure 264

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S50G2V1B, ARXS50G2V1B SiENBE04-808_A

Step Procedure Points

2. Remove the stop valve
cover.
1 Remove the screw of
the stop valve cover.

Stop valve cover

(R5252)

2 Pull down the stop

valve cover to unfasten
the hooks and remove
it.

„ The stop valve cover has 6

hooks.

(R5254)

265 Removal Procedure

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S50G2V1B, ARXS50G2V1B

5.2 Removal of Outdoor Fan / Fan Motor

Procedure Warning Be sure to wait for 10 minutes or more after turning off all power
supplies before disassembling work.
Step Procedure Points
1. Remove the electrical box Preparation
cover. Shield plate
„ Remove the top panel and
1 Remove the screw of the front panel according to
the shield plate. the “Removal of Outer
Panels”.

„ This procedure is not

necessary to remove the
outdoor fan only.

(R5255)

2 Unfasten the 2 hooks

and remove the shield
plate.

Hook (R12029)

3 Unfasten the 4 hooks of

the electrical box cover
and remove it.

Electrical
box cover

(R5257)

Removal Procedure 266

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S50G2V1B, ARXS50G2V1B SiENBE04-808_A

Step Procedure Points

(R5258)

2. Remove the fan motor.

1 Disconnect the
connector for the fan [S70]
motor [S70].

(R5259)

2 Release the fan motor

lead wire from the 7
hooks.

Fan motor
lead wire

(R5260)

267 Removal Procedure

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S50G2V1B, ARXS50G2V1B

Step Procedure Points

3 Remove the washer- „ The screw has reverse
fitted nut of the outdoor winding.
fan. „ Nut size: M6

10 mm

(R12236)
Outdoor fan (R5262)

„ When reassembling, align

mark of the outdoor fan
with D-cut section of the
motor shaft.

(R5263)

4 Remove the lower 2 „ Be sure to remove the lower

screws from the fan screws first. If the upper
motor first. screws are removed first, the
fan motor, the center of
gravity of which is toward the
5 Then, remove the upper front, may tilt down or fall,
2 screws. getting you injured.

Fan motor

(R5264)

Removal Procedure 268

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S50G2V1B, ARXS50G2V1B SiENBE04-808_A

Step Procedure Points

6 Release the fan motor „ When reassembling, put the
lead wire from the 2 fan motor lead wire through
hooks and pull the fan the back of the fan motor (so
motor out. as not to be entangled with
the outdoor fan).

Fan motor lead wire

(R5265)

269 Removal Procedure

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S50G2V1B, ARXS50G2V1B

5.3 Removal of Electrical Box

Procedure Warning Be sure to wait for 10 minutes or more after turning off all power
supplies before disassembling work.
Step Procedure Points
1 Remove the 2 screws Preparation
of the shield plate. „ Remove the top panel and
the front panel according to
Shield
plate the “Removal of Outer
Panels”.

(R5266)

2 Slide the shield plate

upward to unfasten the
1 hook on the bottom
left, and then remove
the shield plate.

(R5267)

3 Disconnect the 2 power

supply cables and the 1
earth wire.

Earth wire

(R5268)

Removal Procedure 270

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S50G2V1B, ARXS50G2V1B SiENBE04-808_A

Step Procedure Points

4 Disconnect the 2 earth
wires.

Earth wires

(R5269)

5 Remove the 3 screws

of the right side panel.

Right
side
panel

(R5270)

6 Remove the screw of

[S70]
the electrical box.

(R5259)

271 Removal Procedure

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S50G2V1B, ARXS50G2V1B

Step Procedure Points

7 Unfasten the hooks and „ When reassembling, insert
remove the right side the 2 hooks of the lower part
panel. and the 1 hook of the upper
Hook
back.

(R5272)

Hooks (R5273)

8 Disconnect the
connectors of the front [S40] [S20] [S90] [S80]
side.
[S20]: electronic
expansion valve
coil
[S40]: overload
protector
[S80]: four way valve
coil
[S90]: thermistors

(R5275)

9 Disconnect the relay

connector for the
compressor.

Removal Procedure 272

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S50G2V1B, ARXS50G2V1B SiENBE04-808_A

Step Procedure Points

10 Release the clamp of
the compressor relay
harness with pliers.

Compressor relay harness

(R5277)

11 Detach the clamp and

release the thermistor
Hook Clamp
lead wires from the
hook.

Thermistor lead wire (R5278)

12 Remove the screw.

(R12316)

273 Removal Procedure

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S50G2V1B, ARXS50G2V1B

Step Procedure Points

13 Release the harness of
the outdoor
temperature thermistor
from the hook.

(R9403)

14 Lift and remove the

electrical box. Electrical box

(R5279)

Removal Procedure 274

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S50G2V1B, ARXS50G2V1B SiENBE04-808_A

5.4 Removal of PCB

Procedure Warning Be sure to wait for 10 minutes or more after turning off all power
supplies before disassembling work.
Step Procedure Points
1 Disconnect the Preparation
connectors from the [S52] [S102] „ Remove the electrical box
service monitor PCB according to the “Removal of
[S52] [S102]. Electrical Box”.

Service monitor PCB

(R5280)

2 Detach the 4 clamps

with pliers.

Clamps

(R5281)

3 Remove the screws of

the terminal board and
the earth wire.

Earth wire
(R12285)
Terminal board

275 Removal Procedure

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S50G2V1B, ARXS50G2V1B

Step Procedure Points

4 Unfasten the hook on
the right.

5 Open the terminal

board.

6 Disconnect the 1: Black

harnesses. L2
2: White
3: Red
L1: Black
L2: Brown
N1: White
N2: Blue

N2

1 2 3 L1 N1 (R5285)

7 Disconnect the 2
connectors for the
reactor [HR1] [HR2]. [HR1] [HR2]

(R11473)

Removal Procedure 276

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S50G2V1B, ARXS50G2V1B SiENBE04-808_A

Step Procedure Points

8 Remove the 3 screws
of the main PCB.

Main PCB

(R5287)

9 Unfasten the 4 hooks.

Hooks (R5288)

10 Lift up and remove the „ Refer to page 28 for detail.

main PCB. Main PCB

(R5289)

277 Removal Procedure

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S50G2V1B, ARXS50G2V1B

5.5 Removal of Sound Blanket / Thermistors

Procedure Warning Be sure to wait for 10 minutes or more after turning off all power
supplies before disassembling work.
Step Procedure Points
1 Remove the sound
blanket (back).

Sound blanket
(back)

2 Remove the sound „ Since the piping ports are

blanket (outer). Sound blanket torn easily, remove the
(outer)
sound blanket carefully.

(R5293)

3 Remove the sound

blanket (top upper).

Sound blanket
(top upper)

(R5294)

Removal Procedure 278

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S50G2V1B, ARXS50G2V1B SiENBE04-808_A

Step Procedure Points

4 Remove the sound
Sound blanket
blanket (top lower). (top lower)

(R11398)

5 Remove the sound

blanket (inner).

Sound blanket
(inner) (R5296)

6 Release the discharge „ Be careful not to lose the clip

pipe thermistor. for the thermistor.

Clip

(R12287)

Discharge pipe thermistor

(R12286)

7 Cut the clamp and pull

out the outdoor heat
exchanger thermistor. Outdoor heat
exchanger
thermistor

Clamp

(R5292)

279 Removal Procedure

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S50G2V1B, ARXS50G2V1B

5.6 Removal of Four Way Valve

Procedure Warning Be sure to wait 10 minutes or more after turning off all power supplies
before disassembling work.
Step Procedure Points
1 Remove the screw and
remove the four way Warning
valve coil. Four way Be careful not to get yourself
valve
burnt with the pipes and other
Four way
valve coil parts that are heated by the
gas brazing machine.

Warning
If the refrigerant gas leaks
during work, ventilate the
room. (If the refrigerant gas is
exposed to flames, toxic gas
may be generated.)
(R5297)
Caution
From the viewpoint of global
environment protection, do
not discharge the refrigerant
gas in the atmosphere. Make
sure to collect all the
refrigerant gas.
„ Before working, make
sure that the refrigerant Cautions for restoration
gas is empty in the circuit. 1. Restore the piping by non-
„ Be sure to apply nitrogen oxidation brazing.
replacement when 2. It is required to prevent the
heating up the brazed carbonization of the oil inside
part. the four way valve and the
2 Heat up the brazed part deterioration of the gaskets
of the four way valve affected by heat. (Keep
and disconnect. below 120°C.) For the sake
of this, wrap the four way
valve with wet cloth and
provide water so that the
cloth does not dry.
3 Heat up every brazed
part in turn and Note:
disconnect. „ Do not use a metal saw for
cutting pipes by all means
because the sawdust comes
into the circuit.

„ When withdrawing the pipes,

be careful not to pinch them
firmly with pliers. The pipes
may get deformed.

„ Provide a protective sheet or

a steel plate so that the
brazing flame cannot
influence peripheries.

Removal Procedure 280

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S50G2V1B, ARXS50G2V1B SiENBE04-808_A

5.7 Removal of Electronic Expansion Valve

Procedure Warning Be sure to wait for 10 minutes or more after turning off all power
supplies before disassembling work.
Step Procedure Points
1 Pull out the electronic
expansion valve coil. Electronic expansion valve coil

(R2737)

2 Remove the sheets of

putty.

Warning
Be careful not to get yourself
„ Before working, make
burnt with the pipes and other
sure that the refrigerant Electronic expansion valve
parts that are heated by the
gas is empty in the circuit.
gas brazing machine.
„ Be sure to apply nitrogen
replacement when
Warning
heating up the brazed
If the refrigerant gas leaks
part.
during work, ventilate the
3 Heat up the 2 brazed
room. (If the refrigerant gas is
parts of the electronic exposed to flames, toxic gas
expansion valve and may be generated.)
remove it.
Caution
From the viewpoint of global
environment protection, do
(R2739) not discharge the refrigerant
gas in the atmosphere. Make
sure to collect all the
refrigerant gas.

281 Removal Procedure

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S50G2V1B, ARXS50G2V1B

5.8 Removal of Compressor

Procedure Warning Be sure to wait for 10 minutes or more after turning off all power
supplies before disassembling work.
Step Procedure Points
1 Remove the terminal
cover.

Terminal cover

(R5302)

2 Disconnect the lead

wires of the
compressor.

Red (U)

Blue (W)
Yellow (V)

(R12204)

Removal Procedure 282

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S50G2V1B, ARXS50G2V1B SiENBE04-808_A

Step Procedure Points

3 Release the clamp with
pliers to detach the
compressor lead wires.

4 Remove the putty.

„ Before working, make

sure that the refrigerant
gas is empty in the circuit. Warning
„ Be sure to apply nitrogen Be careful not to get yourself
replacement when burnt with the pipes and other
heating up the brazed parts that are heated by the
part. gas brazing machine.
5 Heat up the brazed
Warning
parts indicated by the
If the refrigerant gas leaks
arrows.
during work, ventilate the
room. (If the refrigerant gas is
exposed to flames, toxic gas
may be generated.)

Warning
Since it may happen that the
refrigerant oil in the
compressor catches fire,
prepare wet cloth so as to
extinguish fire immediately.

Caution
From the viewpoint of global
environment protection, do
not discharge the refrigerant
gas in the atmosphere. Make
sure to collect all the
refrigerant gas.

283 Removal Procedure

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S50G2V1B, ARXS50G2V1B

Step Procedure Points

6 Remove the 2 nuts of Cautions for restoration
the compressor. 1. Restore the piping by non-
oxidation brazing.
2. It is required to prevent the
carbonization of the oil inside
the four way valve and the
deterioration of the gaskets
affected by heat. (Keep
below 120°C.) For the sake
of this, wrap the four way
valve with wet cloth and
provide water so that the
cloth does not dry.

In case of difficulty with gas

brazing machine
1. Disconnect the brazed part
where is easy to disconnect
and restore.
(R10257)
2. Cut pipes on the main unit
7 Heat up the brazed part with a tube cutter in order to
of the discharge side make it easy to disconnect.
and disconnect.
Note:
„ Do not use a metal saw for
cutting pipes by all means
because the sawdust comes
into the circuit.

„ When withdrawing the pipes,

be careful not to pinch them
firmly with pliers. The pipes
may get deformed.

8 Heat up the brazed part „ Provide a protective sheet or

of the suction side and a steel plate so that the
disconnect. brazing flame cannot
influence peripheries.

„ Be careful so as not to burn

the compressor terminals,
the name plate, the heat
exchanger fin.
9 Lift the compressor up
and remove it.

Removal Procedure 284

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Outdoor Unit - RK(X)S50G2V1B, ARXS50G2V1B SiENBE04-808_A

285 Removal Procedure

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A

Part 8
Trial Operation and
Field Settings
1. Trial Operation ....................................................................................286
2. Field Settings ......................................................................................288
2.1 Model Type Setting ..............................................................................288
2.2 When 2 Units are Installed in 1 Room..................................................288
2.3 Standby Electricity Saving....................................................................289
2.4 Facility Setting Jumper and Switch
(cooling at low outdoor temperature)....................................................290
2.5 Jumper and Switch Settings.................................................................291
3. Application of Silicon Grease to a Power Transistor and
a Diode Bridge ....................................................................................292

Trial Operation and Field Settings 286

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Trial Operation SiENBE04-808_A

1. Trial Operation
Outline 1. Measure the supply voltage and make sure that it falls in the specified range.
2. Trial operation should be carried out in either cooling or heating mode.
3. Carry out the trial operation in accordance with the operation manual to ensure that all
functions and parts, such as louver movement, are working properly.
„ The air conditioner requires a small amount of power in its standby mode. If the system is
not to be used for some time after installation, shut off the circuit breaker to eliminate
unnecessary power consumption.
„ If the circuit breaker trips to shut off the power to the air conditioner, the system backs up the
operation mode. The system then restarts operation with the previous mode when the circuit
breaker is restored.

In cooling mode, select the lowest programmable temperature; in heating mode, select the
highest programmable temperature.
„ Trial operation may be disabled in either mode depending on the room temperature.
„ After trial operation is complete, set the temperature to a normal level.
(26°C to 28°C in cooling mode, 20°C to 24°C in heating mode)
„ For protection, the system does not start for 3 minutes after it is turned off.

Detail ARC452 Series

(1) Press the ON / OFF button to turn on the system.
(2) Press the both of TEMP buttons and the MODE button at the same time.
(3) Press the MODE button twice.
(“T” appears on the display to indicate that trial operation is selected.)
(4) Press the MODE button and select operation mode.
(5) Trial operation terminates in approx. 30 minutes and switches into normal mode. To quit a
trial operation, press the ON / OFF button.

(3)

(2)

(2)

(2) (3) (4) (1) (5) (R9675)

287 Trial Operation and Field Settings

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Trial Operation

ARC433 Series
(1) Press the ON/OFF button to turn on the system.
(2) Press the center of the TEMP button and the MODE button at the same time.
(3) Press the MODE button twice.
(“T” appears on the display to indicate that trial operation is selected.)
(4) Press the MODE button and select operation mode.
(5) Trial operation terminates in approx. 30 minutes and switches into normal mode. To quit a
trial operation, press the ON/OFF button.

(3)

(2)

(1) (5)

(R9663)
(2) (3) (4)

Trial Operation and Field Settings 288

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Field Settings SiENBE04-808_A

2. Field Settings
2.1 Model Type Setting
ARC452A3
„ This remote control is common to the heat pump model and cooling only model. Use the DIP
switch on the remote control to set the heat pump model or cooling only model.
„ Make the setting as shown in the illustration. (The factory set is the heat pump side.)
• Heat pump model: Set the DIP switch to H/P.
• Cooling only model: Set the DIP switch to C/O.

DIP switch

H/P C/O (R12275)

2.2 When 2 Units are Installed in 1 Room

When 2 indoor units are installed in 1 room, 1 of the 2 pairs of indoor unit and infrared remote
control can be set for different address.
Both the indoor unit PCB and the infrared remote control need alteration.

Indoor Unit PCB (1) Remove the front grille. (2 screws)

(2) Remove the electrical box. (1 screw)
(3) Remove the shield plate. (4 hooks)
(4) Cut the address setting jumper JA on the control PCB.

ADDRESS

JA

JA ADDRESS
EXIST 1
CUT 2

(R12216)

289 Trial Operation and Field Settings

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Field Settings

Infrared Remote (1) Remove the cover and take it off.

Control (2) Cut the address setting jumper J4.
<ARC452 series> <ARC433 series>

Jumper

J4

J4 Address
EXIST 1
ADDRESS:J4 CUT 2 (R6573)
EXIST 1
CUT 2 (R12065)

2.3 Standby Electricity Saving

Outline 20-42 Class Only
This function turns power supply OFF to the outdoor unit and sets the indoor unit into energy-
saving mode, thus reducing the power consumption of the air conditioner.

Detail For 20/25/35 class models, following procedure is required for turning ON the function.
1. Check that the main power supply is turned OFF. Turn OFF if it has not been turned OFF.
2. Remove the stop valve cover.
3. Disconnect the selective connector for standby electricity saving.
4. Turn ON the main power supply.

1 2 3 1 2 3

Function OFF Function ON

The standby electricity saving function is turned OFF

before shipping.

(R11820)

Caution Before connecting or disconnecting the selective connector for standby electricity saving, make
sure that the main power supply is turned OFF.

Trial Operation and Field Settings 290

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Field Settings SiENBE04-808_A

2.4 Facility Setting Jumper and Switch (cooling at low

outdoor temperature)
Outline For Cooling Only Model
This function is limited only for facilities (the target of air conditioning is equipment (such as
computer)). Never use it in a residence or office (the space where there is a human).

Detail You can expand the operation range to –15°C by cutting jumper or turning on switch on the
outdoor unit PCB. If the outdoor temperature falls to –20°C or lower, the operation stops. If the
outdoor temperature rises, the operation starts again.
„ RKS20-35G2V1B

S50
S1
S90
J4 1 2 3

J8
J9 PCB

Cut the jumper J8. S10

S20

(R12206)

„ RKS20-35G2V1B9

1 2 3
J3
J4
J5

S40
S70

Cut the jumper J4.

S90 S2

(R12187)

„ RKS42G2V1B
1) Remove the
2 screws.
Top panel

Electrical
box cover 2) Remove the
1 screw.

Insulation
sheet 4) Remove the
Fan motor lead wire insulation
sheet.
Hook
Notch
Electrical box
3) Remove the
electrical box
cover from the PCB
hook.
J5
J4
J3

PCB 5) Cut the jumper J4.

(R12185)

291 Trial Operation and Field Settings

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Field Settings

„ RKS50G2V1B

S102

S2

LED-A
Turn on the

A B CD
switch SW4-B.

ON
SW4

SW1

(R12186)

Caution 1. If the outdoor unit is installed where the outdoor heat exchanger of the unit is exposed to
direct wind, provide a windbreak wall.
2. Intermittent noises may be produced by the indoor unit due to the outdoor fan turning on and
off when using facility settings.
3. Do not place humidifiers or other items which might raise the humidity in rooms where facility
settings are being used.
A humidifier might cause dew jumping from the indoor unit outlet vent.
4. Cutting jumper sets the indoor fan tap to the highest position. (20/25/35/42 class)
5. Use the indoor unit at the highest level of airflow rate. (50 class)

2.5 Jumper and Switch Settings

Jumper Function When connected When cut
(factory set)
JB Fan speed setting Fan speed setting ; Fan rpm is set to “0”
(on indoor unit PCB) when compressor Remote control <Fan stop>
stops for thermostat setting
OFF.
(effective only at
cooling operation)
JC Power failure Auto-restart The unit does not resume
(on indoor unit PCB) recovery function operation after recovering from
a power failure. Timer ON/OFF
settings are cleared.
J5 Improvement of Standard control Reinforced control
(on outdoor unit PCB defrost performance (ex. The frequency increases,
of 20-42 class) the duration time of defrost
lengthens.)

For the location of the jumper, refer to the following pages.

Indoor unit; page 19
Outdoor unit; page 22, 24, 26

Switch Function OFF (factory set) ON

SW4-C Improvement of Standard control Reinforced control (ex. The
(on outdoor unit PCB defrost performance frequency increases, the
of 50 class) duration time of defrost
lengthens.)

For the location of the switch, refer to page 28.

Trial Operation and Field Settings 292

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Application of Silicon Grease to a Power Transistor and a Diode Bridge SiENBE04-808_A

3. Application of Silicon Grease to a Power

Transistor and a Diode Bridge
Applicable All outdoor units using inverter type compressor for room air conditioner.
Models
When the printed circuit board (PCB) of an outdoor unit is replaced, it is required that silicon
grease (*1) is certainly applied to the heat radiation part (the contact point to the radiation fin) of
the power transistor and diode bridge.
*1: Parts number of the silicon grease – 1172698 (Drawing number 3FB03758-1)

Details The silicon grease is an essential article for encouraging the heat radiation of the power
transistor and the diode bridge. Applying the paste should be implemented in accordance with
the following instruction.
Remark: There is the possibility of failure with smoke in case of bad heat radiation.

„ Wipe off the old silicon grease completely on a radiation fin.

„ Apply the silicon grease evenly to the whole.
„ Do not leave any foreign object such as solder or paper waste between the power transistor
and the radiation fin, and also the diode bridge, and the radiation fin.
„ Tighten the screws of the power transistor and the diode bridge, and contact to the radiation
fin without any gap.

<Example>
Take out a PCB

Power transistor
Diode bridge (TRM, TPM, IGBT, IPM, SPM, etc.)
(Diode bridge, Rectifier stack, etc.)

Not applied. Paper waste

OK : Evenly applied NG : Not evenly NG : Foreign object

silicon grease. applied
(R9056)

293 Trial Operation and Field Settings

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A

Part 9
Appendix
1. Piping Diagrams..................................................................................294
1.1 Indoor Unit............................................................................................294
1.2 Outdoor Unit .........................................................................................295
2. Wiring Diagrams..................................................................................299
2.1 Indoor Unit............................................................................................299
2.2 Outdoor Unit .........................................................................................299

Appendix 294
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Piping Diagrams SiENBE04-808_A

1. Piping Diagrams
1.1 Indoor Unit
FTXS20/25/35/42G2V1B, FTXS50G2V1B, ATXS50G2V1B
ATXS20/25/35/42G2V1B
INDOOR UNIT INDOOR UNIT

6.4CuT 6.4CuT

HEAT EXCHANGER HEAT EXCHANGER

THERMISTOR THERMISTOR
CROSS FLOW FAN ON HEAT EXCH. CROSS FLOW FAN ON HEAT EXCH.
FIELD PIPING FIELD PIPING
6.4CuT M 6.4CuT M
FAN MOTOR FAN MOTOR
FIELD PIPING FIELD PIPING
9.5CuT 9.5CuT 12.7CuT 9.5CuT

REFRIGERANT FLOW REFRIGERANT FLOW

COOLING COOLING
HEATING HEATING

4D058897C 4D058898C

295 Appendix
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Piping Diagrams

1.2 Outdoor Unit

1.2.1 Cooling Only
RKS20G2V1B, RKS20G2V1B9

OUTDOOR UNIT
OUTDOOR TEMPERATURE
7.0CuT HEAT EXCHANGER THERMISTOR
9.5CuT

7.0CuT

HEAT EXCHANGER
THERMISTOR MOTOR OPERATED
VALVE
7.0CuT 6.4CuT 6.4CuT

φ.4.0xD. 2.0CuT
MUFFLER MUFFLER
M WITH WITH
FILTER FILTER

PROPELLER FAN
9.5CuT

9.5CuT MUFFLER
WITH
FILTER

6.4CuT
FOUR WAY
7.9CuT

9.5CuT

VALVE FIELD PIPING

NORMALLY:OFF
(6.4CuT)
LIQUID STOP
VALVE
MUFFLER
DISCHARGE PIPE
THERMISTOR
7.9CuT

9.5CuT 9.5CuT FIELD PIPING

COMPRESSOR (9.5CuT)
ACCUMULATOR MUFFLER MUFFLER GAS STOP
VALVE REFRIGERANT FLOW
COOLING

3D059588A

RKS25/35G2V1B, RKS25/35G2V1B9

OUTDOOR UNIT
OUTDOOR TEMPERATURE
7.0CuT HEAT EXCHANGER THERMISTOR
9.5CuT

7.0CuT

HEAT EXCHANGER
THERMISTOR MOTOR OPERATED
VALVE
4.8CuT
6.4CuT 6.4CuT
4.8CuT MUFFLER MUFFLER
φ.4.0xD. 2.0CuT

M WITH WITH
FILTER FILTER

PROPELLER FAN
9.5CuT

9.5CuT MUFFLER
WITH
FILTER
6.4CuT

FOUR WAY
9.5CuT

VALVE
7.9CuT

FIELD PIPING
NORMALLY:OFF
LIQUID STOP (6.4CuT)
VALVE
MUFFLER

DISCHARGE PIPE
THERMISTOR
7.9CuT

9.5CuT 9.5CuT FIELD PIPING

COMPRESSOR (9.5CuT)
MUFFLER MUFFLER GAS STOP
ACCUMULATOR VALVE REFRIGERANT FLOW
COOLING

3D059589B

Appendix 296
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Piping Diagrams SiENBE04-808_A

RKS42G2V1B

OUTDOOR UNIT
OUTDOOR TEMPERATURE
HEAT EXCHANGER THERMISTOR
7.9CuT
12.7CuT

7.9CuT

HEAT EXCHANGER
THERMISTOR MOTOR OPERATED
VALVE
4.8CuT
6.4CuT 6.4CuT
4.8CuT MUFFLER MUFFLER

φ.4.0xD. 2.0CuT
M WITH WITH
FILTER FILTER

PROPELLER FAN
9.5CuT

9.5CuT
MUFFLER
WITH
FILTER

6.4CuT
FOUR WAY
9.5CuT
7.9CuT

VALVE FIELD PIPING

NORMALLY:OFF (6.4CuT)
LIQUID STOP
VALVE
MUFFLER

DISCHARGE PIPE
THERMISTOR
7.9CuT

9.5CuT 9.5CuT FIELD PIPING

COMPRESSOR
MUFFLER GAS STOP (9.5CuT)
ACCUMULATOR VALVE REFRIGERANT FLOW
COOLING

3D059591

RKS50G2V1B

OUTDOOR UNIT
7.9CuT HEAT EXCHANGER OUTDOOR AIR TEMPERATURE
7.9CuT THERMISTOR
7.9CuT
7.9CuT
12.7CuT 7.9CuT CAPILLARY TUBE 1
7.9CuT 7.9CuT 4.0CuT
MUFFLER
7.9CuT 7.9CuT 4.0CuT WITH
FILTER REFRIGERANT FLOW
7.9CuT CAPILLARY TUBE 2 6.4CuT COOLING
CAPILLARY TUBE 3
6.4CuT

4.0CuT
HEAT 4.0CuT
EXCHANGER
THERMISTOR CAPILLARY TUBE 4
M
6.4CuT

PROPELLER FAN

12.7CuT
MOTOR OPERATED
VALVE
12.7CuT 12.7CuT
MUFFLER
FOUR WAY WITH FILTER
7.9CuT

VALVE
12.7CuT

NORMALLY:OFF
MUFFLER MUFFLER FIELD PIPING
6.4CuT (6.4 CuT)
7.9CuT

LIQUID
DISCHARGE PIPE 12.7CuT STOP VALVE
THERMISTOR
12.7CuT FIELD PIPING
(12.7 CuT)
GAS STOP VALVE
COMPRESSOR WITH SERVICE PORT

3D051636N

297 Appendix
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Piping Diagrams

1.2.2 Heat Pump

RXS20G2V1B, ARXS20G2V1B, RXS20G2V1B9, ARXS20G3V1B

OUTDOOR UNIT
OUTDOOR TEMPERATURE
7.0CuT HEAT EXCHANGER
9.5CuT
7.0CuT

HEAT EXCHANGER
THERMISTOR MOTOR OPERATED
VALVE
7.0CuT 6.4CuT 6.4CuT

φ.4.0xD. 2.0CuT
MUFFLER MUFFLER
M WITH WITH
FILTER FILTER

PROPELLER FAN
9.5CuT

9.5CuT
MUFFLER
WITH
FILTER

6.4CuT
9.5CuT

FOUR WAY
7.9CuT

FIELD PIPING
VALVE (6.4CuT)
ON:HEATING LIQUID STOP
VALVE
MUFFLER

DISCHARGE PIPE
THERMISTOR
7.9CuT

9.5CuT 9.5CuT FIELD PIPING

COMPRESSOR (9.5CuT) REFRIGERANT FLOW
ACCUMULATOR MUFFLER MUFFLER GAS STOP COOLING
VALVE HEATING

3D059587A

RXS25/35G2V1B, ARXS25/35G2V1B, RXS25/35G2V1B9, ARXS25/35G3V1B

OUTDOOR UNIT
OUTDOOR TEMPERATURE
7.0CuT HEAT EXCHANGER THERMISTOR
9.5CuT

7.0CuT

HEAT EXCHANGER
THERMISTOR MOTOR OPERATED
4.8CuT VALVE
6.4CuT 6.4CuT
4.8CuT MUFFLER
f.4.0xD. 2.0CuT

MUFFLER
M WITH WITH
FILTER FILTER

PROPELLER FAN
9.5CuT

9.5CuT
MUFFLER
WITH
FILTER
6.4CuT
9.5CuT

FOUR WAY
7.9CuT

FIELD PIPING
VALVE (6.4CuT)
ON:HEATING LIQUID STOP
VALVE
MUFFLER

DISCHARGE PIPE
THERMISTOR
7.9CuT

9.5CuT 9.5CuT FIELD PIPING

COMPRESSOR (9.5CuT)
ACCUMULATOR MUFFLER MUFFLER GAS STOP
VALVE REFRIGERANT FLOW
COOLING
HEATING

3D059586E

Appendix 298
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Piping Diagrams SiENBE04-808_A

RXS42G2V1B, ARXS42G2V1B

OUTDOOR UNIT
OUTDOOR TEMPERATURE
7.9CuT HEAT EXCHANGER THERMISTOR

12.7CuT
7.9CuT

HEAT EXCHANGER
THERMISTOR MOTOR OPERATED
VALVE
4.8CuT
6.4CuT 6.4CuT
4.8CuT MUFFLER MUFFLER

f.4.0xD. 2.0CuT
M WITH WITH
FILTER FILTER

PROPELLER FAN
9.5CuT

9.5CuT
MUFFLER
WITH
FILTER

6.4CuT
9.5CuT
7.9CuT

FOUR WAY FIELD PIPING

VALVE (6.4CuT)
ON:HEATING LIQUID STOP
VALVE
MUFFLER
DISCHARGE PIPE
THERMISTOR
7.9CuT

9.5CuT 9.5CuT FIELD PIPING

COMPRESSOR (9.5CuT)
MUFFLER GAS STOP
ACCUMULATOR VALVE REFRIGERANT FLOW
COOLING
HEATING
3D059590A

RXS50G2V1B, ARXS50G2V1B

OUTDOOR UNIT
7.9CuT HEAT EXCHANGER OUTDOOR AIR TEMPERATURE
7.9CuT THERMISTOR
7.9CuT
7.9CuT
12.7CuT 7.9CuT CAPILLARY TUBE 1
7.9CuT 7.9CuT 4.0CuT MUFFLER
7.9CuT 4.0CuT WITH
7.9CuT REFRIGERANT FLOW
FILTER
7.9CuT CAPILLARY TUBE 2 6.4CuT COOLING
CAPILLARY TUBE 3
HEATING
6.4CuT 6.4CuT

4.0CuT
HEAT 4.0CuT
EXCHANGER
CAPILLARY TUBE 4
THERMISTOR
M
MOTOR OPERATED
PROPELLER FAN VALVE

FILTER
12.7CuT
6.4CuT

12.7CuT 9.5CuT
12.7CuT

FOUR WAY RECEIVER

7.9CuT
VALVE ON :
MUFFLER HEATING MUFFLER FIELD PIPING
7.9CuT 6.4CuT (6.4 CuT)
9.5CuT

LIQUID
MUFFLER STOP VALVE
7.9CuT
12.7CuT FIELD PIPING
DISCHARGE PIPE (12.7 CuT)
THERMISTOR GAS STOP VALVE
COMPRESSOR WITH SERVICE PORT

3D051637Q

299 Appendix
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Wiring Diagrams

2. Wiring Diagrams
2.1 Indoor Unit
FTXS20/25/35/42/50G2V1B, ATXS20/25/35/42/50G2V1B

FIELD WIRING.

PCB3 S49 S46 PCB1 F1U H1 1

~ ~
LED1 RECTIFIER 3.15A X1M 2
H1P V1 BLK 1
H2 3
OUTDOOR
LED2 WHT 2
H2P
RED 3
GRN CAUTION
LED3 H3
TRANSMISSION NOTE THAT OPERATION WILL
H3P
CIRCUIT RESTART AUTOMATICALLY IF
GRN /
FG YLW
THE MAIN POWER SUPPLY IS
S1W TURNED OFF AND THEN BACK
S1 ON AGAIN.
S21 RED
t°

HA
R1T BLU
BRN FG : FRAME GROUND
M
ORG F1U : FUSE
WHT H1P~H3P : PILOT LAMP
PCB4 S26 S25 M1F
M1F : FAN MOTOR
INTELLIGENT EYE S47 S32 S41 M1S~M3S : SWING MOTOR
SENSOR PCB1~PCB4 : PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD
R1T, R2T : THERMISTOR
ORG

ORG

ORG
RED

RED

RED
YLW

YLW

YLW
PNK

PNK

PNK
BLU

BLU

BLU

S1~S49 : CONNECTOR
PCB2 t° S1W : OPERATION SWITCH
S48 X1M : TERMINAL STRIP
R2T
INFRARED : PROTECTIVE EARTH
REMOTE SIGNAL M M M INDOOR
CONTROL RECEIVER
M1S M2S M3S
3D058246B

2.2 Outdoor Unit

RK(X)S20/25/35G2V1B, ARXS20/25/35G2V1B

FIELD WIRING.

N=1 MRM20 ORG IPM1

indoor FU3
X1M Z3C HL1 20A HR1 L1R HR2 DB1
L1 ~ + +
1 L 1 BLK ORG
HN1 MRM10 +
2 N 2 WHT V2 HN3
S HN2 DB2 C5
3 3 RED BLU ~ - - + FU2
~ +
C118 3.15A
V3 HL3 -
HL2 +
C6
GRN/YLW

L GRY
~ - -
FU1
N MR30 1 WHT 9 3.15A -
BLK
SA1 BLK V1 W V U
E1 BLK PCB2
S11 BLK S10
BLK
BLK
GRN

YLW

BLK
9 BLK 1
E2 PCB1
MR30_A MR30_B 2 MRCW S30
S50 1 3
Z2C
BLK 1 S20 S40 S90 S70
BRN
BRN

N=2 1 6 2 1 1 S80 3 1 6 1 2 3 4 7
BLK
4 1
RED
YLW
BLU

outdoor
WHT

ORG

WHT
ORG
BRN
RED
YLW

BRN

RED
BLK
BLK
BLK
BLK
BLK
BLK
BLU

BLU
BLK

BLK

GRY
BLK

NOTE Y1R
1. REFER TO THE NAMEPLATE FOR THE POWER REQUIREMENTS. 1 3 IN CASE OF t° t° t° Z1C
C5, C6, C118 : CAPACITOR S80 M
M HEAT PUMP 1~ V N=4
DB1, DB2 : DIODE BRIDGE
IN CASE OF TYPE
FU1, FU2, FU3 : FUSE Y1E Q1L R1T R2T R3T M1F
COOLING ONLY W U
IPM1 : INTELLIGENT POWER MODULE TYPE (OUTDOOR) (DISCHARGE)
L : LIVE (CONDENSER) M1C
L1 : COIL PCB1, PCB2 : PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD V1, V2, V3 : VARISTOR
L1R : REACTOR PTC1 : THERMISTOR PTC X1M : TERMINAL STRIP
M1C : COMPRESSOR MOTOR S10, S11, S20, S30, Y1E : ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE COIL
M1F : FAN MOTOR S40, S50, S70, S80, Y1R : REVERSING SOLENOID VALVE COIL
MRCW, MR30, MRM10, MRM20 : MAGNETIC RELAY S90, HL3, HN3 : CONNECTOR Z1C, Z2C, Z3C : FERRITE CORE
N : NEUTRAL R1T, R2T, R3T : THERMISTOR : PROTECTIVE EARTH
Q1L : OVERLOAD PROTECTOR
3D058684B
SA1 : SURGE ARRESTER

Appendix 300
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Wiring Diagrams SiENBE04-808_A

RK(X)S20/25/35G2V1B9, ARXS20/25/35G3V1B

FIELD WIRING.

indoor
N=2 MRM20 WHT IPM1
FU3
X1M Z3C AC1 20A HR1 L1R HR2 DB1
L1 +
1 L 1 BLK BRN ~ +
AC2 MRM10
2 N 2 WHT V2 HN3 +
S HN2 HA1 HA2 DB2 C5
3 3 RED BLU GRY ~ - - +
~ +
HL2 HL3 C119
V3 ORG + -
L FU1 C6
GRN/YLW

MR30 ~ - Q1 -
3.15A 1 WHT 1
N BLK V1 -
BLK PCB2 DB3 FU2
BLK
SA1 S11 BLK ~ + 3.15A
BLK
S10
E1 BLK W V U
BLK IPM2
E2 9 BLK 9 ~ - + -
MR30_A MR30_B
GRN

MRCW

BLU
YLW

RED
Z2C S50 S100 S70
PCB1 S20 S90 S40 X11A
N=2 3 1 1 2 1 6 3 S80 1 1 6 2 1 1 4 7 10 11 12 13
GRN

outdoor

WHT

WHT
BLK

BLU
YLW

RED
BRN
BRN

BLK
GRY
BLU
BLU
WHT
YLW
ORG
BLU
BRN
RED

YLW
RED
WHT
BLK
BRN
ORG
BLU
BLK
BLK
BLK
BLK
BLK
BLK
NOTE BLK
4 1
1.REFER TO THE NAMEPLATE FOR THE POWER REQUIREMENTS.
2 1
C5, C6, C119 : CAPACITOR 3 1 Y1R t° t° t°
X12A S80 Z1C
DB1, DB2, DB3 : DIODE BRIDGE S110 M Q1L MS
R1T R2T R3T 3~ N=3 V U
BLK
BLK

FU1, FU2, FU3 : FUSE SW1 IN CASE OF W

Y1E (OUTDOOR) (DISCHARGE) MS
IPM1, IPM2 : INTELLIGENT POWER MODULE COOLING ONLY M1F
(CONDENSER) 3~
L : LIVE PCB3 TYPE M1C
L1 : COIL
PCB1, PCB2, PCB3 : PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD SW1 : FORCED OPERATION SWITCH
L1R : REACTOR
V1, V2, V3 : VARISTOR
M1C : COMPRESSOR MOTOR S10, S11, S20, S40, S50
X1M : TERMINAL STRIP
S70, S80, S90, S100, S110
M1F : FAN MOTOR
HL3, HN3, X11A, X12A : CONNECTOR Y1E : ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE COIL
MRCW, MR30, MRM10, MRM20 : MAGNETIC RELAY
Y1R : REVERSING SOLENOID VALVE COIL
N : NEUTRAL R1T, R2T, R3T : THERMISTOR
Z1C, Z2C, Z3C : FERRITE CORE
Q1L : OVERLOAD PROTECTOR SA1 : SURGE ARRESTER
: PROTECTIVE EARTH
3D065704A

RKS42G2V1B

indoor L1R
ORG
BRN

PCB1 HR1 HR2

MRM20 IPM1
Z2C DB1
N=3 HL1 FU3 L1 ~ + +
V4 MRM10
DB2 C74
30A + C94 C95
~ _ ~ + _
+ + FU2
BLK

X1M HN1 _ _ 3.15A

V3
WHT

FU1
1 L 1 3.15A DB3 ~ _ Q31 C75
~ + +
2 N 2 S Z3C SA1 V1 _
3 3 RED N=3 E _
~ _ Z4C W V U
E2
N=3
L
N MRCW
MR30 S20 S80 S90 S70 S40
1 6 3 1 1 6 1 7 2 1 W V U
POWER
SUPPLY
WHT
ORG
BRN
RED
YLW
BLU

BLU
BLK
BLK
BLK
BLK
BLK
BLK

BLK
BLK
WHT
ORG

RED
BRN
GRN/YLW

Z1C
N=7
t° t° t°
GRN

M
RED
YLW
BLU

M 1~
R1T R2T R3T
Y1E (OUTDOOR) (DISCHARGE) M1F X11A
outdoor (CONDENSER) Q1L
RED
YLW
BLU

FIELD WIRING WV U
M
3~
C74, C75, C94 M1F : FAN MOTOR V1, V3, V4 : VARISTOR
M1C
C95 : CAPACITOR MRCW, MRM10, X1M : TERMINAL STRIP
DB1, DB2, DB3 : DIODE BRIDGE MRM20, MR30 : MAGNETIC RELAY Y1E : ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE COIL
FU1, FU2, FU3 : FUSE N : NEUTRAL Z1C, Z2C, Z3C BLK : BLACK
IPM1 : INTELLIGENT POWER MODULE PCB1 : PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD Z4C : FERRITE CORE BLU : BLUE
L : LIVE Q1L : OVERLOAD PROTECTOR : PROTECTIVE EARTH BRN : BROWN
L1 : COIL R1T~R3T : THERMISTOR S20, S40, S70 GRN : GREEN
L1R : REACTOR SA1 : SURGE ARRESTER S80, S90 ORG : ORANGE
M1C : COMPRESSOR MOTOR Q31 : IGBT X11A : CONNECTOR RED : RED
WHT : WHITE
YLW : YELLOW
3D059615

301 Appendix
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SiENBE04-808_A Wiring Diagrams

RXS42G2V1B, ARXS42G2V1B

indoor L1R

ORG
BRN
PCB1 MRM20 HR1 HR2 IPM1
Z2C DB1
N=3 HL1 FU3 L1 ~ + +
V4 MRM10
DB2 C74
30A + C94 C95
~ _ ~ + _
+ + FU2

BLK
HN1 _ _ 3.15A
X1M V3

WHT
FU1
1 L 1 3.15A DB3 ~ _ Q31 C75
~ + +
2 N 2 S Z3C SA1 V1 _
N=3 E _
3 3 RED
~ _ Z4C W V U
E2
N=3
L
N MR30 MRCW
S20 S80 S90 S70 S40
1 6 3 1 1 6 1 7 2 1 W V U
POWER
SUPPLY

WHT
ORG
BRN
RED
YLW

WHT
ORG

RED
BRN
BLU

BLU
BLU

BLU
BLK
BLK
BLK
BLK
BLK
BLK

BLK
BLK
Z1C
GRN/YLW

N=7
t° t° t°
GRN

RED
YLW
BLU
M Y1R 1~
R1T R2T R3T
Y1E (OUTDOOR) (DISCHARGE) M1F X11A
outdoor (CONDENSER) Q1L

RED
YLW
BLU
FIELD WIRING W V U
M
3~
C74, C75, C94 M1F : FAN MOTOR V1, V3, V4 : VARISTOR
: TERMINAL STRIP
M1C
C95 : CAPACITOR MRCW, MRM10, X1M
DB1, DB2, DB3 : DIODE BRIDGE MRM20, MR30 : MAGNETIC RELAY Y1E : ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE COIL
FU1, FU2, FU3 : FUSE N : NEUTRAL Y1R : REVERSING SOLENOID VALVE COIL BLK : BLACK
IPM1 : INTELLIGENT POWER MODULE PCB1 : PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD Z1C, Z2C, Z3C BLU : BLUE
L : LIVE Q1L : OVERLOAD PROTECTOR Z4C : FERRITE CORE BRN : BROWN
L1 : COIL R1T~R3T : THERMISTOR : PROTECTIVE EARTH GRN : GREEN
L1R : REACTOR SA1 : SURGE ARRESTER S20, S40, S70 ORG : ORANGE
M1C : COMPRESSOR MOTOR Q31 : IGBT S80, S90 RED : RED
X11A : CONNECTOR WHT : WHITE
YLW : YELLOW
3D059601

RKS50G2V1B

L1R
GRN
GRN
WHT

WHT

YLW
X1M Z1C Z5C X12A
GRN HR1 HR2 FU3 7
RED RED
L SA2 E1 E2 MRM20 M1F
POWER SUPPLY 3.15A
FU1 V2 BLU M
L Z2C AC1 30A MRM10 BLU BRN
N N BRN 1 6(P) + + + S70 BRN ORG
9 8 ORG
V11 1 WHT WHT
Z3C AC2 V6 7(N)
BLK

BLU 2
M1C
WHT

PM1 X11A
TO INDOOR UNIT X2M Z4C 5 U U
RED RED
1 1 RED 1 FU2 V V M
2 2 3.15A 4 YLW YLW 3~
S10 W
3 3 3 BLU BLU
W
V3
Q1L
BLK
BLK

PCB1
MRC W
S40
1 4
V5
SHEET METAL
S80
1 S51 5 1S101 5 3 1 1 S20 6 1 S90 6
indoor
WHT
ORG
BLU
BLU
BLU
BLU
BLU

WHT
BLK

BLK
BLK
BLK
RED

GRN

BRN
RED
YLW
BLU

FIELD WIRING
t° t° t°
1 S52 5 1 S102 5 M
PCB2 R3T R2T R1T
Y1E
LED A S2 (OUTDOOR) (DISCHARGE)
(CONDENSER)
SW1 SW4
outdoor

Z1C~Z5C : FERRITE CORE

X1M, X2M : TERMINAL STRIP MRM10, MRM20 L : LIVE M1C : COMPRESSOR MOTOR
Y1E : ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE COIL MRC/W : MAGNETIC RELAY N : NEUTRAL M1F : FAN MOTOR
V2, V3, V5, V6, V11 : VARISTOR R1T~R3T : THERMISTOR SW1 : FORCED OPERATION ON/OFF SW (SW1) L1R : REACTOR
SA2 : SURGE ARRESTER S2~S102 : CONNECTOR SW4 : LOCAL SETTING SW (SW4) Q1L : OVERLOAD PROTECTOR
FU1, FU2, FU3 : FUSE LEDA : PILOT LAMP PM1 : POWER MODULE
AC1, AC2 PCB1,2 : PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD
U, V, W, X11A, X12A STEEL METAL : TERMINAL STRIP FIXED PLATE
E1, E2
HR1, HR2 : CONNECTOR 3D056145A

Appendix 302
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Wiring Diagrams SiENBE04-808_A

RXS50G2V1B, ARXS50G2V1B

L1R
GRN
GRN

WHT

WHT
YLW
X1M Z1C
FU3 Z5C X12A
GRN HR1 HR2 7 RED
RED
L SA2 E1 E2 MRM20 M1F
POWER SUPPLY 3.15A
FU1 V2 BLU M
L Z2C AC1 30A MRM10 BLU
BRN
N N BRN 1 6(P) S70 BRN ORG
9 8 + + + ORG
V11 1 WHT WHT
Z3C AC2 V6 7(N)
2
BLK

BLU
M1C
WHT

TO INDOOR UNIT PM1 X11A

X2M Z4C U U
5 RED RED
1 1 RED 1 FU2 V V M
2 2 3.15A 4 YLW YLW
3~
S10 W
3 3 3 BLU BLU W
V3
Q1L

BLK
BLK
PCB1
MRC W
S40
1 4
V5
SHEET METAL
1 S51 5 1 S101 5 3 S80 1 1 S20 6 1 S90 6
indoor WHT
GRN

WHT
ORG
RED
BLU
BLU
BLU
BLU
BLU

BLU
BLU

BRN
RED
YLW

BLK
BLK
BLK
BLK

BLU
FIELD WIRING
t° t° t°
1 S52 5 1 S102 5 M
PCB2 Y1R R3T R2T R1T
S2 Y1E (OUTDOOR) (DISCHARGE)
LED A
(CONDENSER)
SW1 SW4
outdoor

Z1C~Z5C : FERRITE CORE

X1M, X2M : TERMINAL STRIP MRM10, MRM20 L : LIVE M1C : COMPRESSOR MOTOR
Y1E : ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE COIL MRC/W : MAGNETIC RELAY N : NEUTRAL M1F : FAN MOTOR
V2, V3, V5, V6, V11 : VARISTOR R1T~R3T : THERMISTOR SW1 : FORCED OPERATION ON/OFF SW (SW1) L1R : REACTOR
SA2 : SURGE ARRESTER S2~S102 : CONNECTOR SW4 : LOCAL SETTING SW (SW4) Q1L : OVERLOAD PROTECTOR
FU1, FU2, FU3 : FUSE LEDA : PILOT LAMP PM1 : POWER MODULE
AC1, AC2 PCB1,2 : PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD
U, V, W, X11A, X12A Y1R : REVERSING SOLENOID VALVE COIL
E1, E2 SHEET METAL : TERMINAL STRIP FIXED PLATE 3D056095C
HR1, HR2 : CONNECTOR

303 Appendix
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Daikin’s unique position as a manufacturer of air Daikin Europe N.V. is approved by LRQA for its Quality "The present publication is drawn up by way of information only and does
conditioning equipment, compressors and Management System in accordance with the ISO9001 not constitute an offer binding upon Daikin Europe N.V.. Daikin Europe N.V.
refrigerants has led to its close involvement in standard. ISO9001 pertains to quality assurance regarding has compiled the content of this publication to the best of its knowledge. No
environmental issues. For several years Daikin has design, development, manufacturing as well as to services express or implied warranty is given for the completeness, accuracy,
had the intension to become a leader in the provision related to the product. reliability or fitness for particular purpose of its content and the products and
of products that have limited impact on the services presented therein. Specifications are subject to change without
environment. This challenge demands the eco design prior notice. Daikin Europe N.V. explicitly rejects any liability for any direct or
and development of a wide range of products and an indirect damage, In the broadest sense, arising from or related to the use
energy management system, resulting in energy and/or interpretation of this publication. All content is copyrighted by Daikin
Prepared in Belgium by Lannoo (www.lannooprint.be), a company whose concern for

conservation and a reduction of waste. ISO14001 assures an effective environmental Europe N.V.."
Responsible Editor: Daikin Europe N.V., Zandvoordestraat 300, B- 8400 Oostende

management system in order to help protect human health

and the environment from the potential impact of our
activities, products and services and to assist in
maintaining and improving the quality of the environment.
the environmont is set in the EMAS and ISO 14001 systems.

Daikin units comply with the European regulations that

SiENBE04-808_A • 02/2011 • Copyright Daikin

guarantee the safety of the product.

Naamloze Vennootschap
Zandvoordestraat 300 Daikin Europe N.V. is participating in the EUROVENT
Certification Programme. Products are as listed in the
B-8400 Oostende - Belgium EUROVENT Directory of Certified Products.
www.daikin.eu
BE 0412 120 336
RPR Oostende

q<R.7+.!!H*Kst
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine